Owner's Manual for FREIGHTLINER models including: MY2021 FTL Sprinter, MY2021, FTL Sprinter, Sprinter
Owner Manuals | Freightliner Sprinter
Mbvans.com Coupon
Your Operating Instructions Vehicle document wallet in the vehicle Here you can find information on operation, service work and the guarantee for your vehicle in printed form.
Sprinter Operating Instructions
É9075841608ÅËÍ
9075841608 Order no. T907 0294 13 Part no. 907 584 16 08 Edition B-2021
Sprinter
Operating Instructions
Co-driver's airbag warning
Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
Publication details Internet Further information about Freightliner Sprinter vehicles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.freightlinersprinterusa.com Documentation team © Daimler VANS USA, LLC © MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans- lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG. Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Vehicle dealers Daimler VANS USA, LLC One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.freightlinersprinterusa.com Customer Assistance Center: 1-877-762-8267 Daimler VANS USA, LLC is a Daimler AG enter- prise.
As at 13.07.20
Welcome to the world of Freightliner Sprinter Before you first drive off, read these Operating Instructions carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in these Operating Instructions. Disre- garding them may result in damage to the vehicle or environment or in personal injury. Vehicle damage caused by failure to observe the instructions is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol- lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Freightliner Sprinter reserves the right to intro- duce changes in: R Design R Equipment R Technical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Printed Operating Instructions R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent supplements Always keep these documents in the vehicle. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Daimler VANS USA, LLC A Daimler Company
90758491075684016808
2 Contents
Symbols ..................................................... 4 At a glance ................................................. 6 Cockpit ........................................................ 6 Instrument cluster ....................................... 8 Overhead control panel .............................. 11 Door control panel ..................................... 16 Emergencies and breakdowns ................... 18 General notes .......................................... 20 Environmental protection .......................... 20 Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts ........... 20 Information about attachments, addon equipment, installations and con- versions ..................................................... 21 Operating Instructions ............................... 22 Service and vehicle operation ................... 22 Operating safety ........................................ 23 Declarations of conformity ........................ 24 Diagnostics connection ............................. 25 Notes on changes to the engine output ..... 26 Qualified specialist workshop .................... 26 Vehicle registration ................................... 26 Correct use of the vehicle ......................... 26 Multi Purpose Vehicle ................................ 27 Notes for persons with electronic med- ical aids ..................................................... 27 Information on problems with your vehicle ....................................................... 27 Reporting safety defects ............................ 27 Limited Warranty ....................................... 28 QR codes for rescue card .......................... 28 Data storage .............................................. 28 Copyright ................................................... 31 Occupant safety ...................................... 32 Restraint system ........................................ 32 Seat belts .................................................. 33 Airbags ...................................................... 36 Automatic measures after an accident ...... 37 Safely transporting children in the vehicle ....................................................... 38 Notes on pets in the vehicle ...................... 45 Opening and closing ............................... 46 SmartKey ................................................... 46 Doors ........................................................ 49 Sliding door ............................................... 52 Electric sliding door ................................... 53 Rear-end doors .......................................... 56 Partition sliding door ................................. 58
Electrical step ............................................ 59 Side window .............................................. 60 Anti-theft prevention ................................. 63 Seats and stowage .................................. 66 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi- tion ............................................................ 66 Seats ......................................................... 66 Adjusting the steering wheel ..................... 78 Stowage areas ........................................... 78 Information about the bottle holder ........... 79 Cup holders ............................................... 79 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ..................... 80 Sockets ..................................................... 80 Wirelessly charging the mobile phone and coupling with the exterior antenna ..... 82 Installing or removing the floor mats ......... 83 Light and vision ....................................... 84 Exterior lighting ......................................... 84 Adjusting the interior lighting .................... 87 Changing bulbs .......................................... 90 Windshield wipers ..................................... 94 Mirrors ....................................................... 97 Climate control ....................................... 99 Overview of climate control systems ......... 99 Operating climate control systems .......... 100 Operating air vents .................................. 103 Auxiliary heating ...................................... 104 Operating cargo compartment ventila- tion .......................................................... 106 Driving and parking .............................. 107 Driving ..................................................... 107 Battery main switch ................................. 119 Automatic transmission ........................... 120 All-wheel drive ......................................... 123 Electronic level control ............................ 125 Refueling ................................................. 130 Parking .................................................... 137 Driving and driving safety systems .......... 142 Work mode .............................................. 165 Trailer operation ...................................... 166 Instrument Display and on-board computer ............................................... 172 Overview of Instrument Display ............... 172 Overview of the buttons on the steer- ing wheel ................................................. 173 Operating the on-board computer ........... 173
Contents 3
Overview of what is shown on the mul- tifunction display ...................................... 174 Setting the instrument lighting ................ 175 Menus and submenus .............................. 175 Mercedes PRO ....................................... 180 Information about Mercedes PRO (Mercedes me) ........................................ 180 Information about Mercedes PRO con- nect (Mercedes me connect) ................... 180 Calling the Freightliner Sprinter Cus- tomer Center using the multimedia system ..................................................... 180 Making a call via the overhead control panel ........................................................ 181 Information on the breakdown assis- tance call via the overhead control panel ........................................................ 181 Giving permission for data transfer .......... 181 Transmitted data during a service call ..... 181 Multimedia system ............................... 183 Overview and operation ........................... 183 System settings ....................................... 189 Vehicle information .................................. 192 Telephone ................................................ 193 Media ...................................................... 200 Radio ....................................................... 204 Sound ...................................................... 205 Transporting .......................................... 206 Notes on loading guidelines .................... 206 Load distribution ..................................... 207 Securing loads ......................................... 207 Carrier systems ....................................... 209 Placing a load on the wheel arch ............. 209
Wheels and tires ................................... 240 Information on noise or unusual driving characteristics ......................................... 240 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires .................................................. 240 Information on driving with summer tires ......................................................... 240 Information on M+S tires ......................... 241 Notes on snow chains .............................. 241 Tire pressure ........................................... 242 Loading the vehicle .................................. 249 Tire labeling ............................................. 251 Information on definitions (tires and loading) ................................................... 255 Changing a wheel .................................... 256 Spare wheel ............................................ 264 Technical data ....................................... 268 Notes on the technical data .................... 268 On-board electronics ............................... 268 Vehicle identification plate, vehicle identification number (VIN) and engine number .................................................... 269 Operating fluids and capacities ............... 271 Vehicle data ............................................ 280 Trailer hitch ............................................. 280 Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys- tems ........................................................ 284 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps ..................................... 286 Display messages .................................... 286 Indicator and warning lamps ................... 306 Index ....................................................... 316
Maintenance and care .......................... 210 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ...... 210 Engine compartment ............................... 210 Cleaning and care .................................... 218
Breakdown assistance ......................... 224 Emergency ............................................... 224 Emergency Call System ........................... 224 Flat tire .................................................... 226 Battery .................................................... 226 Towing or tow-starting ............................. 232 Electrical fuses ........................................ 236 Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 237 Hydraulic jack ......................................... 238
4 Symbols
In these Operating Instructions, you will find the following symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe environ- mental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi- ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being dam- aged. # Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
#
Instructions
(/
Further information on a topic
page)
Display Display in the multifunction display/ media display
4 Highest menu level to be selected in the multimedia system
5
Corresponding submenus to be selec-
ted in the multimedia system
*
Indicates a cause
6 At a glance Cockpit
1 Combination switch Turn signals High beam Windshield wipers Rear window wiper
2 Steering-wheel buttons 3 DIRECT SELECT lever 4 Inside rearview mirror
F MBUX multimedia system con-
185
85 trol elements
85 G 12 V socket
80
94 H 230 V socket
95
I Opens and closes the electric sliding door
53
173 J Hazard warning light
85
120 K Vehicles with KEYLESS START:
109
98 key slot
5 Overhead control panel
87 L USB port
78
6 Device installation frame, e.g.
M Start/stop button
108
for mounting a tachograph or the switch clock for the sta-
N Right-hand switch panel
tionary heater
Activates/deactivates all-wheel
124
7 Sun visor
drive
8 Front passenger window lifter
60
Engages/disengages LOW RANGE
125
9 Central locking system
50 Activates/deactivates DSR
149
A Storage compartment cover
238 Raises/lowers the vehicle level
126
B Front passenger storage com- partment or tachograph hous- ing
Engages/disengages power take-off
C Cup holders
Activates/deactivates working
165
speed control (ADR)
D Climate control system
99 Activates/deactivates cargo
106
E MBUX multimedia system dis-
183 compartment ventilation
play
Activates/deactivates the bea-
con
O Steering wheel gearshift pad- dles
P Opens the hood
Q Left-hand switch panel
Sets the working speed (ADR)
R Light switch
At a glance Cockpit 7
122 Headlamp range adjuster
S Adjusts the driver's seat 210 T Seat heating
68
77
Central locking system 166 U Driver's window lifter
50
60
8 At a glance Instrument cluster
Instrument display (color dis- play)
E Coolant temperature indicator
313
and ? coolant too hot
1 Speedometer
172 F ! Electric parking brake
307
2 ÷ ESP®
3 · Distance warning
4 ü Seat belt not fastened
5 #! Turn signal lights
6 Multifunction display
307 (yellow) 313 G 6 Restraint system 312 H K High beam 85 I L Low beam 307 J T Parking lamps
32
85
84
84
7 h Tire pressure loss warn- ing lamp
307
K Fuel level indicator and Ë fuel reserve with fuel filler cap
location indicator
313
8 ; Check Engine
313 L
84
9 % Preglow and malfunction in preglow system
A Tachometer
B F and ! Parking brake applied (red)
Fog light 172 M R Rear fog light 307 N J Brakes (yellow)
O ! ABS malfunction
84
307
307
C $ and J Brakes (red)
307 P å ESP® deactivated
307
D # Electrical malfunction
313
At a glance Instrument cluster 9
Instrument display (black and
e (white) Lane Keeping
163
white display) with steering
Assist active and ready to issue
wheel buttons
warnings and e (red) Lane
1 Speedometer
172
Keeping Assist issuing a warn- ing
2 ÷ ESP®
307 7 ; Check Engine
313
3 · Distance warning
313 8 % Preglow and malfunction
4 ü Seat belt not fastened
312 in preglow system
5 #! Turn signal lights
85 9 Tachometer
6 Display of indicator and warn- ing lamps
A F and ! Parking brake
307
applied (red)
1 At least one door is not
B $ and J Brakes (red)
307
completely closed
C 6 Reserve fuel
313
h Tire pressure loss
307 D DEF supply low
133
Ð Electric power steering malfunction # Electrical malfunction
313 E + LOW RANGE active
313
F ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
125 307
G SOS emergency call sys- tem (emergency call system)
æ Active Brake Assist
switched off
G Multifunction display 147 H 6 Restraint system
I K High beam
307
32
85
é ATTENTION ASSIST
switched off
· Lane Keeping Assist inac- tive
_ Highbeam Assist
161 J L Low beam
K T Parking lamps 165 L
86
Fog light
M R Rear fog light
84
84
84
84
10 At a glance Instrument cluster
N J Brakes (yellow) O ! ABS malfunction P å ESP® deactivated
307
307
307
At a glance Overhead control panel 11
Version 1 of the overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
7 w Switches the rear interior
2 Breakdown assistance call but-
lighting on/off
ton (Mercedes PRO connect)
8 p Switches the right-hand
3 Ì Activates/deactivates
65 reading light on/off
interior protection
9 Ë Switches the tow-away
64
Activates/deactivates the bus
alarm on/off
interior lighting
A Glasses compartment
4 p Switches the left-hand reading light on/off
B G SOS emergency call sys- tem
5 | Switches automatic light control on/off
C ATA indicator lamp
6 c Switches the front inte- rior lighting on/off
12 At a glance Overhead control panel
Version 2 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 2 p Switches the left-hand
reading light on/off 3 | Switches automatic light
control on/off 4 c Switches the front inte-
rior lighting on/off
5 w Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
6 p Switches the right-hand reading light on/off
At a glance Overhead control panel 13
Version 3 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 2 | Switches automatic light
control on/off
3 c Switches the front inte-
65
rior lighting on/off
4 w Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
14 At a glance Overhead control panel
Version 4 of the overhead control panel 1 Sun visors 2 Switches the interior lighting
on/off
At a glance Overhead control panel 15
Overhead control panel for vehicles with bus equipment
1 Sun visors
7 w Switches the rear interior
87
2 F Breakdown assistance
lighting on/off
call button
8 p Switches the right-hand
3 i Activates/deactivates
87 reading light on/off
the bus function
9 Switches reading lights in the
87
4 p Switches the left-hand reading light on/off
passenger compartment on/off
5 | Switches automatic light
87 A Glasses compartment
control on/off
6 c Switches the front inte- rior lighting on/off
16 At a glance Door control panel
Door control panel in vehicles with electrically adjustable seats
1 To adjust the outside mirrors
97 6 To open a door
50
2 To unlock/lock the central
50 7 To open/close the right-hand
60
locking system
side window
3 To switch seat heating on/off
77 8 To open/close the left-hand
60
4 To adjust the front seats elec-
69 side window
tronically
5 To operate the memory func-
71
tion
At a glance Door control panel 17
Door control panel vehicles without electrically adjustable seats
1 To adjust the outside mirrors
97 5 To open/close the right-hand
60
2 To switch seat heating on/off
77 side window
3 To unlock/lock the central
locking system
50
6 To open/close the left-hand side window
60
4 To open a door
50
18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1 Checking and topping up oper-
271 5 Hazard warning lights
85
ating fluids
6 QR code for accessing the res-
28
Starting assistance
227 cue card
2 Buttons for the SOS emergency call system and roadside assis-
225
7 To disconnect the starter bat- tery
230
tance
8 Fuel filler flap with instruction
130
3 Warning lamp
224
labels for tire pressure, fuel type and QR code for access-
Safety vest
224 ing the rescue card
First-aid kit (soft sided)
224 9 Flat tire
226
4 Vehicles with rear-wheel drive:
238
hydraulic jack and tire-change
tool kit
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19
A Spare wheel (example)
264
20 General notes
Environmental protection
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the vehicle's operation. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi- ronment. Please observe the following recom- mendations on operating conditions and per- sonal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. # Do not transport any unnecessary
weight (e.g. a roof rack which is no lon- ger required). # Observe the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib- ute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while sta-
tionary. # Drive carefully and maintain a sufficient
distance to other vehicles. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking. # Shift gears in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the engine when in stationary traffic for a prolonged time. # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Pay attention to the ECO display for a fuelefficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended to re-use and recycle substan- ces instead of immediately disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regula- tions serve to protect the environment and should be followed carefully.
Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to not using recycled recon- ditioned components MercedesBenz AG offers recycled recondi- tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from MercedesBenz AG.
* NOTE The effectiveness of the restraint systems can be impaired by installing accessory parts, performing repairs or welding operations
Airbags, Emergency Tensioning Devices as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems can be installed in the fol- lowing areas of the vehicle: R Door frames R Roof frames R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console
# Do not install any accessories such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not perform repairs or welding oper- ations.
# Have accessory parts installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you use parts, tires, wheels or safety-relevant accessories which have not been approved by Freightliner Sprinter , the operating safety of the vehicle may be jeopardized. Safety-relevant sys- tems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessories that are approved for your vehicle model. Freightliner Sprinter tests original parts, conver- sion parts and accessory parts that have been approved for your vehicle model for reliability,
General notes 21
safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, we are unable to assess other parts. We therefore accept no responsibility for the use of such parts in Freightliner Sprinter vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or inde- pendently approved by a testing center. In some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts satisfy these requirements. Make sure that all parts are suita- ble for your vehicle. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) and the engine number when ordering Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts (/ page 269).
Information about attachments, add-on equipment, installations and conversions
Notes on body/equipment mounting direc- tives For safety reasons, have add-on equipment pro- duced and installed in accordance with the valid Freightliner Sprinter body/equipment mounting directives. These body/equipment mounting directives ensure that the chassis and add-on equipment form one unit and that the greatest possible level of operational and driving safety is achieved. Both vehicle manufacturers and body manufac- turers must always ensure that the products they manufacture come into circulation only in a safe state and do not pose any risks to people. Other- wise, there may be consequences under civil, criminal or public law. All manufacturers are responsible for the products that they have man- ufactured. Manufacturers of attachments, add-on equipment, installations and conversions must guarantee compliance with Directive 2001/95/EC on general product safety. Freightliner Sprinter recommends the following procedure for safety reasons: R Do not make any other changes to the vehi-
cle. R Obtain approval from the dealer named on
the inside title page in the event of deviations from the approved body/equipment mounting directives. Acceptance tests performed by public test bodies or official approvals do not rule out safety risks.
Observe the information about Freightliner Sprinter Genuine Parts (/ page 20). % You can obtain further information at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury in the event of improper conversions or changes to the vehicle
Conversions or changes to the vehicle can prevent systems or components from func- tioning properly and/or jeopardize the vehi- cle's operational safety. # Always have conversions or changes to
the vehicle carried out at a qualified workshop.
If you intend to make changes to your vehicle, Freightliner Sprinter strongly recommends that you contact the dealer. They will give you all the information you need. There may be a charge for this service. If body manufacturers and dealers make modifi- cations that affect the final inspection of the engine, vehicle or equipment, they must accept sole responsibility for the vehicle. This also applies to marking and documenting the vehicle parts affected by the changes that they make. You are responsible for ensuring and providing evidence that the following conditions are met: R The vehicle complies with all relevant stand-
ards and regulations that are affected by the modification. R The modified vehicle still meets the vehicle safety standards and emissions laws and reg- ulations. R The modification does not impair the safety of the vehicle.
Freightliner is not responsible for the final inspec- tion, product liability or warranty claims resulting from modification. This applies to the following points: R The modified components or systems R The resultant violation of emissions laws and
regulations or vehicle safety standards R All consequences resulting from the modified,
less safe or even faulty vehicle
Freightliner accepts no responsibility as final manufacturer or for the resultant product liability.
22 General notes
Notes on the radiator Even seemingly minor changes to the vehicle, such as attaching a radiator grille in winter, are not permitted. Do not cover the radiator. Do not use any thermal mats, insect protection covers etc. Otherwise, the values of the vehicle's diagnostic system will be distorted. Some of these values are prescribed by law and must be correct at all times. Notes on the cargo compartment floor The factory equips the vehicle with a wooden or plastic cargo compartment floor; this is an inte- gral part of the vehicle structure. If you have the cargo compartment floor removed, the vehicle body may be damaged. Load securing will then be impaired and the maximum loading capacity of the tie-down points will no longer be guaran- teed. Therefore, do not have the cargo compart- ment floor removed. Notes on the partition Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as commercial vehicles (N1, N2) do not fulfill ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for properly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods, retrofitting the partition is strongly recommended, as prop- erly securing the load in vehicles without a parti- tion will always be a complex operation.
Operating Instructions These Operating Instructions describe all models, as well as standard and optional equipment of your vehicle that was available at the time of going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus- trations. The original purchase agreement documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equip- ment and operation, please consult a Freightliner Sprinter service center. The Operating Instructions and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Note on vehicles which are equipped by body manufacturers Always observe the body manufacturer's Operat- ing Instructions. You could otherwise fail to rec- ognize dangers.
Service and vehicle operation Warranty The Limited Warranty for your vehicle is in accordance with the warranty terms and condi- tions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the terms of the following war- ranty terms and conditions: R New Vehicle Limited Warranty R Exhaust System Warranty R Emission Systems Warranty R California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System War- ranty R State Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon Laws") Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Freightliner Sprinter Parts and Accessories Warranties. These are available at any authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center. % Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.
Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are traveling abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately. R unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. R the fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
General notes 23
Certain Freightliner Sprinter models are available in Europe through the European Delivery Pro- gram. For more information, please consult an author- ized Freightliner Sprinter Center, or write to one of the following addresses. Daimler VANS USA, LLC One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328
Maintenance information Your customer service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet.
Information on Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-877-762-8267 You can find further information in the Roadside Assistance brochure. You will find the brochure in the vehicle document wallet.
Information on changing address or owner In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Information booklet or sim- ply call the Customer Assistance Center at the hotline number 1-877-762-8267. This way, if nec- essary, we can reach you in a timely fashion. If you sell your Freightliner Sprinter, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have pur- chased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Warranty Information booklet or call the Cus- tomer Assistance Center hotline 1-877-762-8267.
Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal- functions or system failures
To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and
maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts
Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com- ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec-
tronic component parts or their soft- ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "Vehicle electronics" section in "Technical data".
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys- tem
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under- side.
24 General notes
# Remove trapped plants or other flam- mable material, in particular.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv- ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo- nents
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot- hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo- nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon- ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam- mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con- tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work- shop.
Declarations of conformity Radio equipment approval for wireless cen- tral locking
Radio equipment approval numbers 920510A Country Radio equipment approval
information
Indonesia
60598/SDPPI/2019 Supplier number: 16833352 Radio frequency: 433.47 434.37 MHz
Pakistan
Approved by PTA TAC No. 9.287/2020
Vietnam
C0290181218AF04A2 Supplier number: 16833352 Radio frequency: 433.47 434.37 MHz
Radio operating permit for head unit Radio equipment approval numbers for Con- nect5 Country Radio equipment approval
information Indonesia 61671/SDPPI/2019/7163
General notes 25
Radio operating permit of transmitter key
Radio equipment approval number DC12B and DC12K
Country Radio equipment approval information
Serbia
DC12B: 005 20 20 P1620124700 DC12K: 005 20 P1620124800
Wireless vehicle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi- ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): this device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con- necting devices to the diagnostics con- nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics con- nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # It is recommended for reasons of safety
to use and connect only products approved by your Freightliner Sprinter service center.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the bat-
tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis- tance.
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter- face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be con- nected by a qualified specialist workshop.
26 General notes
The connection and use of another device on the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions regarding this. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos- tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require- ments of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Notes on changes to the engine output Output increases can: R Change the emission values. R Lead to malfunctions. R Result in consequential damage. The operating safety of the engine is not guaran- teed in all situations. Any tampering with the engine management in order to increase the engine output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and other warranty entitlements. If you sell the vehicle, inform the buyer of any alterations to the vehicle's engine output. This may constitute a punishable offense under national legislation.
Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Always have the following work on the vehicle carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and con-
versions R Work on electronic components
Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you use an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center for this purpose.
Vehicle registration Freightliner Sprinter may ask its service center to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi- cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Freightliner Sprinter can only inform you about vehicle checks if it Freightliner Sprinter has your registration data. In the following cases your vehicle may not be registered to you yet: R you did not purchase your vehicle at an
authorised specialist dealer. R Your vehicle has not yet been inspected at a
Freightliner Sprinter service center.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Freightliner Sprinter service center. Inform Freightliner Sprinter as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle owner- ship. You can do this, for example, at a Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove warning stickers, others may fail to recognize the dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when operating the vehicle: R Safety notes in these Operating Instructions R Technical data for the vehicle
General notes 27
R Traffic rules and regulations R Laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety
standards
Multi Purpose Vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident when the center of gravity is too high
The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adap- ted to the road conditions. # Always adapt your speed and driving
style to the vehicle's driving characteris- tics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Unsafe operation of the vehicle can result in an accident or rollover, as well as serious or even fatal injuries. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Despite careful development, Mercedes-Benz AG cannot completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components built into the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of your vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multi- media and sound system or also in the seating area, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola- ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac- turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil-
ity of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only a few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining an appropri- ate distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center imme- diately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please contact an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center again or write to one of the following addresses. Daimler VANS USA, LLC One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328
Reporting safety defects The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
28 General notes
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to https:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA. You can find more information on vehicle safety at: https://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola- tion of these operating instructions. Such damage is not covered by either the Limited Warranty or the new or used-vehicle warranty. # Observe the instructions in these oper-
ating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as regarding pos- sible vehicle damage.
QR codes for rescue card The QR code stickers are affixed to the B-pillar on the driver's and co-driver's side. In the event of an accident, emergency services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding res- cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in compact form, the most important information about your vehicle e.g. the routing of electric cables. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi- cle. Control units process data which, for exam- ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe oper- ation of your vehicle, some assist you when driv- ing, such as driver assistance systems, while oth- ers enable comfort or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general informa- tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what pur-
pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques- tion in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to deter- mine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities for using data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con- trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov- ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ- ual cases and within the applicable legal frame- work, authorized to read out data from the vehi- cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.
Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi- cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
Generally, these are volatile data and will not be stored beyond the period of operation but will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Con- trol units, vehicle keys for example, often contain data memories. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical infor-
General notes 29
mation about the vehicle's operating state, com- ponent loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the technical equipment, the fol- lowing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such
as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system
components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situations,
such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems R Information on events in which the vehicle is damaged
In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been temporary. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance meas- ures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal- functions and other malfunctions may be trans- mitted along with the vehicle identification num- ber to the manufacturer. In addition, the manu- facturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the cus- tomer's warranty and guarantee claims. Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.
Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data on the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par- ticular, when you use online services in accord- ance with the settings that you have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound can be output via the multimedia system. Simul- taneously, specific items of information are trans- ferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle sta- tuses. For more information, please consult the vehicle Operating Instructions/infotainment sys- tem. This integration allows the use of selected smart- phone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no additional interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle, particularly active access to vehicle data. The type of addi- tional data processing is determined by the pro-
30 General notes
vider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, data can be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via this wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers. Manufacturer's own services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manu- facturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operating Instructions or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection infor- mation is also given. Personal identification data may be used to provide online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the man- ufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescri- bed emergency call system, a contractual agree- ment or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva- ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Services of third parties If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibil- ity of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.
Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There, you will also find the con- tact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officer. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.
Event Data Recorders
USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating; R Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened; R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, R How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and spe-
General notes 31
cial equipment is required. In addition to the vehi- cle manufacturer, other parties that have the spe- cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Daimler Vans USA, LLC ("DVUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Freightliner Sprinter personnel. DVUSA will not share EDR data with others with- out the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les- see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving DVUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter- ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen- tex Corporation.
R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
R Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
R HD RadioTM is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation.
R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
R ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Copyright Information on free and open-source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data storage medium in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource.
Information on registered trademarks R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc. R DTSTM is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby® and MLPTM are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories. R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade-
marks of Daimler AG.
32 Occupant safety
Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com- ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu- pants are subjected. Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can pro- vide the intended level of protection. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air- bags are not deployed in every accident. Vehicles with a co-driver bench seat: the Emer- gency Tensioning Device on the co-driver's seat is triggered whether or not the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu- pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable for this vehicle.
However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Limited protection provided by the restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec- ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact a Freightliner Sprinter service center for details. USA only: contact our Customer Assistance Cen- ter at 18777628267.
Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys- tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Restraint system malfunction A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys- tem in the following cases: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Occupant safety 33
Function of the restraint system in an acci- dent
How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari- ous points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system should take place in good time at the start of the colli- sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci- sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro- vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with- out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for example, the vehicle deceleration may be high enough for this to happen. Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact,
rear impact, side impact1), rollover R Driver's airbag, co-driver airbag: frontal
impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
1) Only when the vehicle is equipped with a side airbag or window curtain airbag.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed.
# Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
For your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if an Emer- gency Tensioning Device is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig- gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear-
ing. R In general, the powder released is not hazard-
ous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protec- tion measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. You can use the search function to find information on perchlo- rate, for example.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can provide the intended level of protec- tion.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.
34 Occupant safety
# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 66). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro- vide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit
tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen-
ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul- der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin- ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 206). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Co-driver seat R Rear seats
Activate or deactivate the special seat belt retrac- tor of the seat belt (/ page 40). If children are traveling in the vehicle, always observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 38).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi- tional restraint system. # Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys- tem.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
Occupant safety 35
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by the sales organization named on the inside front cover.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi- ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
For your safety and that of your passengers, it is recommended that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can- not be pulled out any further.
# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor- responding seat.
# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position.
# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position.
Vehicles with single co-driver's seat:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Ten- sioning Device when the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front-passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Releasing the seat belt # Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
Function of the seat belt warning system for driver and co-driver The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru- ment Display reminds you that all vehicle occu- pants must fasten their seat belts correctly.
36 Occupant safety
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time after switching on the igni- tion. A warning tone may also sound. After the vehicle is started, the seat belt warning goes out as soon as the driver's and the co-driver seat belts are fastened. While driving, the seat belt warning lights up in the following cases: R If the vehicle's speed is higher than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or co-driver's seat belt is not fastened R If the driver or co-driver unfasten their seat belt during the journey
Airbags Overview of airbags
1 Driver's airbag 2 Window curtain airbag 3 Co-driver airbag 4 Side airbag An airbag's installation location is identified by the AIRBAG label. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Possible protection of each airbag: R Driver's airbag, co-driver airbag: head and rib-
cage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the co-driver seat, observe the vehicle-specific infor- mation (/ page 43). Also be sure to observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat.
Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor- rectly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro- tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; both the driver's and co-driver seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa- tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 66). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may
Occupant safety 37
otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 38). R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air- bag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. R There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica- tions to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
An airbag's installation location is identified by the label AIRBAG (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten- ded. # Only use seat covers that have been
approved for your vehicle by the sales organization named on the inside front cover.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc- tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per- formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. # Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro- tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci- dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 224) R Switching off the engine
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 108). Depend- ing on the type and severity of the accident, it may possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R switching off the fuel supply
38 Occupant safety
R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the front side windows R Switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the postcollision brake can minimize the severity of a fur- ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident has been detected, the post-colli- sion brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic braking R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Always observe the safety notes relevant to
the situation. In doing so, you will be able to identify possible risks and avoid dangers when children are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 38).
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri- ous consequences. Always be diligent and secure a child carefully before each journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Freightliner Sprinter recommends you always observe the following notes: R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Freightliner Sprinter vehicle. R The child restraint system must be appropri- ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal- ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Freightliner Sprinter strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in these Operating Instructions. A child restraint system is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guides
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observe laws and regulations Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observe standards for child restraint systems All child restraint systems must meet the follow- ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system com- plies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal- lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The seat belt system of the vehicle R The Top Tether anchorages
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system (/ page 41).
Occupant safety 39
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be instal- led properly without a booster seat. Freightliner Sprinter recommends a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer- vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor- rectly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys- tem. # Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.
# Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: - Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 41). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 43). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 43). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 43).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.
R Also secure Top Tether if present. Do not modify the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifica- tions to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer func- tion properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been
specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.
Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys- tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.
40 Occupant safety
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been dam- aged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket. # If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor
(/ page 41) ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 42) Alternative securing system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat
Co-driver seat Securing system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat
Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Seat belt on vehicle seat ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 42)
Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord-
ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seal belt retractor
again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
Occupant safety 41
Requirements When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Co-driver seat R Rear seats
Installing a child restraint system # When installing a child restraint system,
always observe the manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used, as well as the notes in these Operating Instructions. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor # Extend the seat belt fully and then allow the
inertia reel to retract the belt. When the special seat belt retractor is activa- ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt is tight.
Deactivating the special seat belt retractor # Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee- ded.
Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys-
tem together weigh more than the per- missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ),
only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if available
Check regularly that the permissible gross mass of the child plus the child restraint system is not exceeded. When you install a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use and suitabil-
ity of the seats for attaching a child restraint system. O Always observe the manufacturer's installa- tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat
and a Group I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the rear seat and/or the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys- tem. O When using a Group I forward-facing child restraint system: the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possi- ble, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight Group II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi- ble contact with the roof. O Do not put the child restraint system under strain between the roof and the sitting sur- face and/or install it facing the wrong direc- tion.
42 Occupant safety O Do not put the child restraint system under
strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
restraint system attached with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi- cle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap- ped.
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets 1 in the vehicle.
Securing Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect attachment of the Top Tether belt
If the Top Tether belt is not correctly attached, the child restraint system will not be correctly secured and so will not be able to perform its intended protective function. # Only secure the Top Tether hook to the
intended Top Tether anchorage.
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child
Top Tether anchorages 1 are located on the back of the rear bench seat on the bench seat legs.
# If necessary, move the head restraint upwards (/ page 76).
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
# Guide Top Tether belt 3 under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether anchorage 1 without twisting.
# Tension Top Tether belt 3. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions.
# If necessary, slide the head restraint down- wards (/ page 76). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 3.
Occupant safety 43
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat and a category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a category I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi- ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi- ately and adjust all head restraints correctly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi- ble contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip- ped with a child seat safety feature: R Co-driver's seat R Rear seats
When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the co-driver's seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 40).
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let.
Notes on rearward-facing child restraint sys- tems The co-driver airbag cannot be disabled. Always install a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat, but never on the co-driver seat. Observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint sys- tem used.
Notes on child restraint systems on the codriver seat Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason Freightliner Sprinter strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the co-driver seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint sys- tem on the co-driver seat, always observe the fol- lowing: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the co-driver seat (/ page 43). O Observe the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation and operating instruc- tions. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi- ble contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.
44 Occupant safety
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
The seat belt on the co-driver side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 40). # Set the co-driver seat as far back as possible
and move the seat into the highest position possible. # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust- ment. # Set the seat cushion inclination in such a way that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the back edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. # Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the seat belt out- let. # If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat as appropriate.
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating child safety locks for the doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-
lar, unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Occupant safety 45
# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
The following doors have child safety locks: R Sliding doors The child safety locks on the doors secure each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside (exception: electric slid- ing door). When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. If the electric sliding door is secured, only the sliding door controls in the rear compartment are deactivated. The electric sliding door can be opened at any time using the switch in the center console.
An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-
tended. # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.
Example: sliding door child safety lock # Slide child safety lock bolt 1 to position 2
(activate) or 3 (deactivate). # Make sure that the child safety locks are
working properly.
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unatten- ded in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches.
46 Opening and closing
SmartKey Notes on radio connections of the key
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury to persons with medical devices due to electromag- netic radiation when using the start/stop button
Persons with medical devices, e.g. pacemak- ers or defibrillators: There is a radio connection between the key and the vehicle. The function of a medical device can be impaired. # Before operating the vehicle, consult
your doctor or the manufacturer of the medical device about any possible effects from such systems.
Detection range of the KEYLESS-START func- tion antenna
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.
1 Position of the key holder when the detection range of the antenna is reduced
Overview of key functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
1 To lock 2 Battery check lamp 3 To unlock 4 To unlock the cargo compartment (sliding
doors and rear-end doors)/to unlock and open/close the electric sliding doors 5 Emergency key
The key's factory setting enables you to centrally lock and unlock the following components: R the driver's door and co-driver door R the sliding doors R the rear-end doors
Opening and closing 47
% If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 40 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle will lock again and anti-theft protection will be armed again.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devi- ces or metallic objects. This can affect the key's functionality. % If the check lamp does not light up when you
press the % or & button, the battery is discharged. Replace the key battery (/ page 47).
When starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the slot in the shift console, the SmartKey func- tions are activated automatically.
Removing and inserting the emergency key Removing
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
Changing the unlocking settings The key has the following adjustable unlocking functions: R Unlock centrally R Unlock the driver's door (vehicles without
partition or with cab) R Unlock the driver's door and co-driver's door
(vehicles with partition) # To switch between the settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons at the same time for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. # To unlock the vehicle centrally when the unlocking function is selected for the driv- er's door or the driver's and co-driver's door: press the % button a second time.
Reducing the energy consumption of the SmartKey If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period, you may deactivate the KEY- LESS START function of the SmartKey. # To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession. The battery check lamp on the SmartKey lights up twice quickly and once for longer. # To activate: press any button on the Smart- Key.
# Press release button 2. Emergency key 1 is pushed slightly out.
# Pull emergency key 1 out completely. Inserting # Press release button 2. # Slide emergency key 1 in completely until it
engages.
Replacing the key battery
& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. Swallowing batteries may cause severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil-
dren. # If the cap and/or the battery compart-
ment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
48 Opening and closing
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements R A CR 2032 3 V cell battery Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have the battery replaced by a qualified specialist workshop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 47).
Example image # Press release button 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 forward. # Remove battery compartment 3 and remove
the discharged battery. # Insert the new battery into battery compart-
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat- tery. # Insert battery compartment 3. # Replace cover 1 so that it engages. # Slide the emergency key in completely until it engages (/ page 47).
Opening and closing 49
Problems with the key
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle any more.
Possible causes: R The key battery is weak or discharged. R There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. R The key is faulty.
# Check the battery with the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 47).
# Use the emergency key to unlock and lock the vehicle (/ page 47). # Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key.
# Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.
Doors Unlocking and opening the door from inside
# To unlock and open the front door: pull door handle 2. Safety pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked.
The % symbol indicates that the rear door is unlocked. # To unlock and open the rear door: pull
opening lever 1 and open the rear door. When the door unlocks, latch 2 moves forward. The % symbol is visible. # To close: pull the rear door closed by the door handle. # To lock: slide latch 2 back. The & symbol is visible.
50 Opening and closing
Centrally locking and unlocking the door from the inside
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats)
& WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in particu-
lar, unattended in the vehicle.
You can use the central locking buttons to cen- trally lock and unlock the entire vehicle from the inside. The central locking buttons are located in the driver's and co-driver's doors.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually adjustable front seats) # To unlock: with the doors closed, press but-
ton 1. # To lock: with the doors closed, press button
2.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock- ing mechanism Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on. R The doors are closed. When the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is traveling at a speed above 9 mph (15 km/h), the vehicle locks automatically.
Opening and closing 51
Central locking buttons (vehicles with electrically adjustable front seats)
# To unlock: turn the emergency key counterclockwise to position 1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.
% Right-hand drive vehicles: turn the emer- gency key in the opposite direction for each case.
Central locking buttons (vehicles with manually adjustable front seats) R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer or is being tow-started or push-star- ted, there is a risk of being locked out when the function is activated. # To activate: press and hold button 2 until you hear a tone. # To deactivate: press and hold button 1 until you hear a tone.
Unlocking and locking the driver's door with the emergency key % If you want to lock the vehicle completely
with the emergency key, press the button for the locking mechanism from inside first with the driver's door open. Then lock the driver's door with the emergency key.
Using the grab handles when getting into and out of the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive strain on the grab handle
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or become loose from its anchorage. # Use the grab handles only to stabilize
the seating position or to assist in get- ting in and out of the seat.
The entrances on buses are equipped with grab handles and steps. The grab handles to enter and exit the vehicle are at the front door and the slid- ing door. % To avoid risks:
R When getting into and out of the vehicle, only use the grab handles and steps. Only they are designed for such a load.
R Keep steps and entry sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and ice.
52 Opening and closing
Getting into and out of the vehicle (example: slid- ing door)
# When getting into and out of the vehicle, use grab handles 1 and steps.
% The grab handles on the sliding door are there to help people enter and exit the vehi- cle and can hold up to a maximum of 176 lbs (80 kg). Do not use the grab handle on the sliding door to secure a load (lashing down). Do not secure any objects to the easy entry and exit aids.
Sliding door Opening and closing the sliding door
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to an open sliding door which is not engaged in place
On an incline, the sliding door can move by itself. This can cause you or other people to become trapped. # Always make sure that the open sliding
door is engaged. To do so, open the slid- ing door to the stop.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear
When you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle. # Only open the sliding door when traffic
conditions permit.
% Your vehicle may be equipped with a long sliding door with an intermediate catch. You can also lock the sliding door in place around halfway when opening and closing. If you do this, the door does not have to be opened fully when getting into or out of the vehicle. The sliding door is not fully engaged when in the intermediate catch.
# To unlock: pull locking pin 3 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50).
# To open: press button 1 in and pull door handle 2.
# Push back the sliding door using door handle 2 fully until it engages.
# Check the sliding door catch. # To close: press button 1 in and pull door
handle 2. # Slide the sliding door firmly forwards by han-
dle 2 until it closes.
Opening and closing 53
# To lock: push locking pin 3 downwards manually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door (/ page 50).
Notes on electrical closing assist If your vehicle is equipped with an electrical clos- ing assist, you will require less force to close the sliding door.
Electric sliding door Function of the electric sliding door Your vehicle can be equipped with an electric sliding door on the left and/or right-hand side. You can operate the electric sliding door in the following ways: R by pressing the sliding door buttons on the
center console R by pressing the sliding door button on the
door sill (B-pillar) R using the door handle (inside or outside) R using the key If the electric sliding door is obstructed while opening, it moves a few centimeters in the oppo- site direction and stops. If the sliding door is obstructed during the closing procedure, it opens fully again. If the electric motor of the sliding door is in dan- ger of overheating, e.g. due to frequent opening and closing within a short period, the sliding door opens fully. The sliding door is then locked in place. The sliding door is operational again after approximately 30 seconds. If there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use the release catch to disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually (/ page 55).
# Only open the sliding door when traffic conditions permit.
& WARNING Risk of injury despite the object detection function
The object detection function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, such as fingers. The object detection function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these sit- uations. # When opening and closing the electric
sliding door, make sure that no parts of the body are within the operating range of the sliding door. # If someone becomes trapped, press the button again to stop the sliding door. Object detection: If an object obstructs the sliding door as it is closing, the sliding door will be stopped. Object detection is only an aid. It is not a substitute you having to pay attention.
1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right side of the vehicle
Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the button
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to sliding door opening towards the rear
When you open the sliding door, the sliding door could hit other people as it moves towards the rear of the vehicle.
54 Opening and closing
On vehicles with a partition, button 3 is loca- ted on the partition next to the doorway at the level of the inside door handle.
The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely closed, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will go out. # To stop automatic operation: briefly press button 1 or 2. The sliding door stops moving. # To lock: push locking pin 3 downwards manually or use the central locking button to lock the sliding door (/ page 50). % When you stop automatic operation upon opening the door, the door closes when you press the button again. % In unfavorable operating conditions, e.g. frost or ice, or if the vehicle is very dirty, you can press and hold the corresponding button. The electric sliding door moves with increased force. Observe that, in such circumstances, the object detection function is less sensi- tive. To stop the movement, release the but- ton.
When the sliding door is locked, it can only be opened from the inside by manually unlocking locking pin 4.
# To unlock: pull locking pin 4 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50).
# To open: briefly press button 1, 2 or but- ton 3. The sliding door opens automatically. When you open the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning sig- nals. The indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will flash and button 3 will flash. When the sliding door is completely open, the indicator lamp at the top of button 1 or 2 will light up.
# To close: briefly press button 1, 2 or but- ton 3. The sliding door closes automatically. When you close the door using button 1 or 2, you will additionally hear two warning sig- nals.
Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the key
# To unlock: briefly press the 5 or 4 button on the key.
# To open: press and hold the 5 or 4 button on the key for longer than 0.5 sec- onds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the sliding door will open automatically.
# To close: press and hold the 5 or 4 button on the key for longer than 0.5 sec- onds. You will hear two acoustic signals and the sliding door will close automatically.
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 5 or 4 button on the key. The sliding door stops moving.
% When you stop automatic operation upon opening the door, the door closes when you press the button again.
Opening/closing the electric sliding door with the door handle
Opening and closing 55 Unlocking the electric sliding door manually
If there has been a malfunction or if the battery has been disconnected, you can use disconnect switch 2 to disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor. Then you can open or close the door manually.
# To unlock: pull locking pin 2 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50).
# Press button 1 or pull outside door handle 3. The sliding door opens or closes.
# Press button 1 again or pull outside door handle 3. The sliding door stops moving.
Cover in sliding door trim
# Vehicles with sliding door trim: fold the cover of disconnect switch 2 up. The disconnect switch is accessible.
# To disconnect the sliding door from the electric motor: turn disconnect switch 2 180° clockwise. The "MAN" position is set.
# To unlock: pull locking pin 3 upwards man- ually or use the central locking button to unlock the sliding door (/ page 50).
# Press button 1. # Open or close the sliding door with the out-
side or inside door handle.
56 Opening and closing
# To connect the sliding door with the elec- tric motor: turn disconnect switch 2 180° counter-clockwise. The "AUTO" position is set.
# Adjust the sliding door (/ page 56). # If it is not possible to rectify the malfunction,
visit a qualified specialist workshop. Resetting the electric sliding door
Sliding door button on the center console Sliding door button on the center console
1 Opens and closes the sliding door on the right side of the vehicle
sill (B-pillar) once, or pull the door handle (/ page 55) to completely open the sliding door. The sliding door is operational.
Rear-end doors Opening and closing the rear-end doors from outside
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rearend door swinging open
When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the
traffic conditions and surroundings per- mit. # Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
Sliding door button on the door sill (B-pillar)
You must reset the sliding door if there has been a malfunction or a voltage supply interruption. # If the sliding door is open: press button 1 on
the center console or sliding door button 3 on the door sill (B-pillar) and hold until the door is closed. or # Close the sliding door with the door handle (/ page 55). # Then briefly press button 1 on the center console or sliding door button 3 on the door
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due to objects obstructing their range of movement
When the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear-
ance when opening the rear-end doors.
Opening and closing 57
Opening the right rear-end door
# Pull handle 1. # Swing the rear-end door to the side until it
engages. Opening the left rear-end door
# Make sure that the right rear-end door is open and engaged.
# Pull release handle 1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Swing the rear-end door to the side until it engages.
Opening the rear-end doors fully # Open the a rear-end door outwards beyond
the first detent (90°). # Open the rear-end door fully.
The rear-end door will stay in the stop posi- tion.
Closing the rear-end doors from outside # Close the left rear-end door firmly from out-
side. # Close the right rear-end door firmly from out-
side.
Opening rear-end doors with door retainer more than 90°
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rearend door swinging open
When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the
traffic conditions and surroundings per- mit. # Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due to objects obstructing their range of movement
When the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear-
ance when opening the rear-end doors.
58 Opening and closing
* NOTE Damage to the rear-end doors due to objects obstructing their range of movement
When the rear-end doors are opened, any objects obstructing the range of movement of the rear-end doors can be damaged as well as the vehicle. # Make sure that there is sufficient clear-
ance when opening the rear-end doors.
# Open the rear-end door to about 45°. # Pull and hold the door retainer in the direc-
tion of the arrow. # Open the rear door more than 90°, so that
the door retainer cannot engage. # Release the door retainer and open the rear-
end door fully.
Opening/closing the rear-end doors from the inside
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the rearend door swinging open
When you open a rear-end door, the following can occur: R You or another person can be injured. R A person may be struck by oncoming traf-
fic.
This is particularly the case if you open the rear-end door more than 90° or if it opens in an uncontrolled manner. Even rear-end doors which are properly closed can swing open when the vehicle parked is on an incline or it is windy. # Only open a rear-end door when the
traffic conditions and surroundings per- mit. # Always make sure that the rear-end doors are properly closed.
The % symbol indicates that the rear-end door is unlocked. # To unlock: slide latch 2 to the left.
The % symbol is visible. # To open: pull opening lever 1 and open the
rear-end door. # Swing the rear-end door to the side until it
engages. # To close: make sure that the left rear-end
door is closed. # Pull the right rear-end door firmly to by the
door handle. # To lock: slide latch 2 to the right
The & symbol is visible.
Partition sliding door Opening and closing the partition sliding door
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the partition sliding door is not engaged
The partition sliding door may move on its own while the vehicle is in motion. This can cause you or other people to become trapped.
# Before every journey, close the partition sliding door and ensure that it is engaged.
Opening and closing 59
Electrical step Function of the electrical step
Partition from the cab
Partition from the cargo compartment # To open: turn the key to the left 3 from the
cab or push the lever to the right 3 from the cargo compartment. The sliding door is unlocked. # Push the sliding door as far as it will go to the right 2 from the cab or to the left 1 from the cargo compartment. # To close: push the sliding door to the left 1 from the cab or to the right 2 from the cargo compartment until it engages. You can lock the sliding door from the cab with the key.
Your vehicle's sliding door may be equipped with an electrical step. Electrical step 1 automatically extends when the sliding door opens, and retracts after the slid- ing door closes. Electrical step 1 is equipped with obstacle detection at the front. If the step meets an obstacle while extending, it stops. Once you have removed the obstacle, you must first close the sliding door then re-open it so that the step extends completely. If the electrical step prevents loading, you can block it via obstacle detection when the sliding door opens. The electrical step then remains retracted and a fork-lift truck or other lifting vehi- cle can move closer to the cargo compartment. % The display shows the Step Not Extended
See Operator's Manual message or the step not extended malfunction message. When the ignition is switched off, a warning tone will sound if obstacle detection is blocked. The tone lasts for two minutes. When the ignition is switched on, the warning tone will sound continuously. Vehicles with an Instrument Display (color display): if the display shows the Step Not Retracted See Operator's Manual message or Step Not Extended See Operator's Manual mes- sage and a warning tone sounds, electrical step 1 is malfunctioning (/ page 306). If electrical step 1 is malfunctioning, the step may not extend or retract, or do so only partially. After a malfunction occurs, you must retract and lock electrical step 1 manually in order to con- tinue your journey (/ page 60). Before passen-
60 Opening and closing gers exit the vehicle, inform them that electrical step 1 may be missing. Releasing the electrical step in an emergency (manual retraction)
# Fold bars 1 into the step's housing. # Slide the step into its housing. % When securing the step for the first time, you
must puncture a foil with the spring cotters.
If the electrical step does not automatically retract, you must manually retract the step and lock it in order to continue driving. # On the underside of step 2 on both bars 1
remove the spring cotters 3 from the pin. # Remove the washers 4 and detach both
bars.
# On both sides, insert spring cotters 1 through the housing's holes and into the step as far as they will go. The step has been secured in its housing.
Side window Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
Opening and closing 61
# If someone is trapped, release the but- ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper- ate the side windows, particularly when unat- tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side win- dows. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# To open manually: press and hold button 1 or 2.
# To close manually: pull and hold button 1 or 2.
The windows in the front doors can also be oper- ated automatically.
# To open completely: briefly press button 1 or 2 beyond the point of resistance. Automatic operation will start.
# To close completely: briefly pull button 1 or 2 beyond the point of resistance. Automatic operation will start.
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press or pull button 1 or 2 again.
% If an object blocks a side window during the automatic closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
% If automatic operation of the side window does not work, there is no anti-entrapment function.
Automatic reversing function of the side win- dows If an object blocks a side window during the clos- ing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten- tiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path R during resetting R when the side window is closed again
manually immediately after automatic reversing
The reversing function cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions. # During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
62 Opening and closing
Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour- ney (convenience opening)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. The "convenience opening" function can only be operated using the key. The key must be in close proximity to the driver's or co-driver door. # Press and hold the % button on the key.
The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked R The side windows are opened # To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button.
Closing the side windows from the outside (convenience closing)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience clos- ing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win- dows. # When the convenience closing feature is
operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the & button on the key. The following functions are performed: R the vehicle is locked R the side windows are closed
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button.
Adjusting the side windows
The side windows must be readjusted after a mal- function or a voltage supply interruption. # Switch on the power supply (/ page 107). # Push both buttons on the power window and
hold for approximately one second after the side window has closed.
Opening and closing 63
Problems with the side windows
Problem A side window cannot be closed and the cause is not obvious.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Check to see if there are any objects in the window guide.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if revers- ing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature will then not be active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the
button again to re-open the side window.
If a side window is obstructed during closing, and reopens again slightly, you can proceed as follows: # Immediately after the window is obstructed, pull the corresponding
button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window is closed with increased force.
The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens slightly, you can pro- ceed as follows: # Repeat the previous step.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # Check the battery with the battery check lamp and replace if neces-
sary (/ page 47).
Anti-theft prevention Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off, and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. If the key is left inside the vehicle, anyone can start the engine. % In the event the engine does not start despite
the vehicle's starter battery having sufficient charge, the immobilizer is defective. Contact a qualified specialist workshop or call 1-800-367-6372 (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function of ATA (Anti-theft Alarm system) If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R a side door is opened R the rear-end door is opened R the hood is opened R the interior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page 65) R the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 64)
64 Opening and closing
ATA is automatically armed after approximately five seconds in the following situation: R after the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey
When the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1 flashes in the overhead control panel. ATA is automatically deactivated in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart-
Key. R After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey inside the vehicle. Arming/disarming ATA (Anti-theft Alarm sys- tem) If the alarm system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R A door is opened. R The hood is opened % The alarm is not deactivated, even if you
immediately close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Arming and disarming
# To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key. Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel goes out.
% The vehicle locks again automatically if you do not open a door within 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle.
Stopping the alarm # Press the % or & button on the key. or # Press the Start/Stop button with the key
inside the vehicle. The alarm stops.
Function of the tow-away alarm
Function of the tow-away alarm A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the incli- nation of the vehicle changes when the tow-away alarm is activated. This can be the case if the vehicle is raised on one side, for example.
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Arming/disarming # Lock the vehicle with the key.
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 40 seconds: # Open the vehicle with the key. The tow-away alarm is deactivated. The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol- lowing components are closed: R the driver's door and the front-passenger door R the side doors R the rear-end doors
# To arm: close all the doors. # Lock the vehicle with the key.
Indicator lamp 1 in the overhead control panel flashes.
Opening and closing 65
Deactivating
# Switch off the power supply (/ page 107). # Press button 1.
When the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for approximately five seconds. # Lock the vehicle with the key. The tow-away alarm is deactivated. The tow-away alarm remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again. Deactivate the tow-away alarm when locking your vehicle in the following situations: R when loading and/or transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car transporter, for example R when parking the vehicle on a movable sur- face, such as a split-level garage This will prevent false alarms. Interior motion sensor Function If the activated the interior motion sensor detects motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous- tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some- one reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor Activating # Close the side windows. # Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or coat hangers) is hanging on the inside rear-
view mirror or on the grab handles on the headliner. This will prevent false alarms. # Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is activated after approximately 30 seconds. The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R the driver's door and the co-driver door R the side doors R the rear-end doors Deactivating # Unlock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor automatically switches off. Deactivating
# Switch off the power supply (/ page 107). # Press button 1.
When the button is released, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up for about five sec- onds. # Lock the vehicle with the key. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until you lock the vehicle again. Deactivate the interior motion sensor when lock- ing your vehicle in the following situations: R if there are people or animals remaining inside R if the side windows remain open R when transporting the vehicle on a ferry or car transporter, for example This will prevent false alarms.
66 Seats and stowage
Notes on the correct driver's seat position & WARNING Risk of accident due to
adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel 3, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 1: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible. R You are sitting in an upright position. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion. R Your legs are not fully extended and you can
easily depress the pedals all the way. R The back of your head is supported at eye
level by the middle part of the head restraint. R You can reach the steering wheel with your
arms in a slightly bent position. R You can move your legs freely. R You can easily see all displays on the instru-
ment display.
R You have a good overview of the traffic condi- tions.
R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoul- der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
Seats Adjusting the front seats mechanically (with- out Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
Seats and stowage 67
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
1 Seat fore-and-aft position 2 Seat height 3 Seat backrest inclination # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift
lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. Ensure that the seat is engaged. # To set the seat height: keep on pressing or pulling lever 2 until the required seat height has been reached. # To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards and back- wards until the desired position has been reached.
68 Seats and stowage
Adjusting the front seats mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat- belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
Seats and stowage 69
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure
that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
# To adjust the seat suspension: take your weight off the seat.
# Using handwheel 6, set the body weight (88 lbs (40 kg) to 265 lbs (120 kg)) so that the seat suspension works optimally. If you set a higher weight, the seat suspension will become firmer. The seat will then not vibrate as much. If the seat vibrates often and signifi- cantly, you can engage it in the lower area.
# To engage vibration limiting: turn lever 7 upwards. The next time the seat vibrates, it will engage.
# To release vibration limiting: turn lever 7 to the right. The seat can vibrate.
Example image of comfort suspension seat 1 Seat cushion length 2 Seat backrest inclination 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion inclination 5 Seat fore-and-aft position 6 Seat suspension 7 Vibration limiting
# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front part of the seat cush- ion forwards or backwards.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 2 forwards and back- wards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat height: pull or push lever 3 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat cushion inclination: rotate handwheel 4 forwards and back- wards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 5 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Ensure that the seat is engaged.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted while the ignition is off.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil- dren in the vehicle".
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
70 Seats and stowage
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can- not provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam- ple. # Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoul- der. * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back. # When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position
Seats and stowage 71
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 71).
Setting 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 Weaker 3 Lower 4 Stronger # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the backrest
curvature individually to your spine. Operating the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the
memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv- er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station- ary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func- tion When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu- larly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi- ately release the memory function posi- tion button. The adjustment process is stopped.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. The memory function can be used when the igni- tion is switched off. Storing seat settings Seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can adjust the seat and the backrest.
# Adjust the seat into the desired position. # Press memory button M together with one of
the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. # To call up: press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front seat is in the stored position.
72 Seats and stowage
Rotating the front seats & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
due to the driver's seat and front passenger seat not being engaged In this situation, the restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. # Engage the driver's seat and front passenger seat in the direction of travel before starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi- cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir- ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas- ten your seat belt.
You can rotate the driver's and front passenger seats by 50° and 180°. The seats engage both in and opposite to the direction of travel as well as at 50° to the exit. # Ensure that the parking brake is applied and
the brake lever is down as far as it will go (/ page 138). # Adjust the steering wheel in such a way that there is sufficient free space to rotate and adjust the driver's seat (/ page 78).
# Slide the front passenger seat forward before rotating it (/ page 66).
# To rotate the seat: push lever 1 towards the door and rotate the seat slightly inwards. The turning device will be unlocked.
# Release lever 1 again. # Rotate the seat outwards or inwards into the
required position. Folding the co-driver bench seat cushion for- wards and backwards
# To fold the seat cushion forwards: lift the seat cushion out of front anchorage 1.
# Pull the seat cushion out of rear anchorage 2 and move it slightly forwards.
# Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion upwards.
% You can stow individual objects in the stow- age space beneath the co-driver bench seat.
# To fold the seat cushion backwards: fold the rear edge of the seat cushion downwards.
# Slide the seat cushion under the seat back- rest into rear anchorage 2.
# Push the front seat cushion downwards until it engages in front anchorage 1.
Folding the folding seat up or down & WARNING Risk of injury when using the
folding seat due to inserted key When the key is in the lock of the partition sliding door, it can come into contact with the person on the folding seat.
Seats and stowage 73
# Always remove the key from the parti- tion sliding door before a person sits on the folding seat.
# Remove key 1 from the partition sliding door.
# Press the push button on catch 2 and fold seat cushion 3 up or down.
# Release push button on catch 2 when seat cushion 3 reaches its end position.
# Move seat cushion 3 until it has locked. The push button on catch 2 must be completely flush with the seat frame.
Installing and removing the rear bench seat & WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrect
installation of the rear bench seat If the rear seat is unsuitable, the seat belts may not perform their intended protective function. # Install the rear seat bench as described
and only in the direction of travel. # Installation of the rear bench seat in a
face-to-face position is not permitted. # Use only rear bench seats approved by
Freightliner Sprinter for your vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench
seat is not locked in place If the rear seat is not stable, it may tip over during a journey. # Before setting off, ensure that the rear
bench seat is engaged. The red indica-
tor tabs must not be visible on the release handle. # If the red indicator tabs are visible on the release handle, re-engage the rear bench seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury when installing and removing the rear bench seat
When you install or remove the rear bench seat, body parts such as feet may become trapped when the rear bench seat is tipped. # When installing and removing the rear
bench seat, ensure that there are no body parts between the rear bench seat and the floor.
* NOTE Damage to the rear bench seat rollers due to misuse
If the rear bench seat is used improperly or removed incorrectly, the rear bench seat roll- ers may be damaged. # If the rear bench seat is in the seat
shell, do not pull it towards the rear-end door. Roll the rear seat only beside the seat shells. # Do not roll or use the rear bench seat as a means of transport when removed.
Installation position of three-person and fourperson rear bench seat with strut The three-person rear bench seat is available with or without a strut. The four-person rear bench seat is available only with a strut. The strut is located on the back of the rear bench seat. Install the three-person rear bench seat with strut only in the third row of seats (above the rear axle). Install the four-person rear bench seat only on the last row of seats.
74 Seats and stowage
Removing the rear bench seat
Vehicles with four rows of seats 1 First row of seats 2 Second row of seats 3 Third row of seats: three-person rear bench
seat with strut 4 Fourth row of seats: four-person rear bench
seat with strut
# Install the three-person rear bench seat on the third row of seats 3.
# Install the four-person rear bench seat on the fourth row of seats 4.
Perform these tasks carefully with the assistance of a second person. # To remove the covers of the seat shells:
push retaining clip 1 in the direction of the arrow and detach cover 2 by pushing it up and back at an angle.
Vehicles with three rows of seats 1 First row of seats 2 Second row of seats 3 Third row of seats: four-person rear bench
seat with strut # Install the four-person rear bench seat on the
third row of seats 3.
# Push release handle 2 for the bench seat all the way down and hold it there. At the same time, tilt the bench seat backwards slightly using the release handle and pull it slightly backwards.
# Let go of the release handle. The locks on the bench seat legs will be unlocked and red indicator tabs 3 on the housing of release handle 2 will be visible.
# Hold the unlocked bench seat by grab han- dles 1 and pull backwards slightly.
Seats and stowage 75
# Tilt bench seat 1 backwards and pull it out of the seat shells.
% If the bench seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, the bench seat may be wedged in the seat anchorage. This can happen if the bench seat is tilted too far backwards.
If the seat cannot be pulled out of the seat shells, proceed as follows: # Tilt the bench seat forwards without engaging
it. # Pull the bench seat backwards again using
release handle 2. # Tilt the bench seat slightly backwards and
pull it out of the seat shells. # To remove or store the bench seat, place it
next to the seat shells and roll it towards the rear-end doors. or # Lift the bench seat out from the side to store it. % It may be necessary for the bench seats in front or behind to be removed.
# To attach the covers of the seat shells: hold cover 3 such that retaining lug 1 is pointing towards rear seat anchorage 2.
# Insert cover 3 into rear seat anchorage 2 by pushing it downwards at an angle and then clip it to the seat shell.
# After removing the rear bench seats, ensure that the rear bench seats stand firmly and cannot tip over when in storage.
Please note that the metallic seat support in the vehicle floor will heat up during a journey if the rear seating has been removed.
Installing the rear bench seat
Warning notice on the rear bench seat
Secure engagement of the rear bench seat is guaranteed only if the seat anchorages are kept clean and free of objects. % In vehicles registered as passenger vehicles,
observe the maximum permitted number of seats.
76 Seats and stowage
# Remove the covers of the seat shells as described under "Removing the rear bench seat".
# Ensure that there are no objects in the seat anchorages and seat shells.
# Position the bench seat behind the installa- tion position.
# Hold the bench seat by the grab handles and tilt it backwards.
# Roll the bench seat forwards on the level plastic carriers.
# Ensure that the rear legs of the bench seat are engaged.
Adjusting the seat backrest of the rear bench seat
% If a partition is installed: the rear bench seat must not come into contact with the partition at any time.
# Move the seat backrest to the desired posi- tion.
# Tilt the bench seat forwards firmly until the locks on the front legs of the bench seat engage audibly. The locks on the front legs of the bench seat will now be locked and the red indicator tabs on the housing of release handle 1 should no longer be visible.
% If the red indicator tabs on the release handle housing are visible, the bench seat is not cor- rectly engaged.
If the bench seat is not correctly engaged, you can rectify this situation as follows: # Unlock the bench seat again and tilt it for-
wards firmly until the locks on the bench seat front legs engage audibly. # Attach the covers of the seat shells as descri- bed under "Removing the rear bench seat".
Head restraints Adjusting the head restraint mechanically
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
Seats and stowage 77
# Always drive with the head restraints installed.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to set the height and inclination of the head restraints to the correct position. Using the head restraint fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the back of the head as possible.
Head restraint (example of luxury head restraint on the driver's seat) # To raise: pull the head restraint upwards into
the desired position and ensure that it engages. % Use the head restraint only when it is engaged. # To lower: press release button 2, slide the head restraint downwards into the desired position and ensure that it engages. % Use the head restraint only when it is engaged. # To move forwards: press release button 1 and pull the head restraint forwards until it engages in the desired position. # To move backwards: press release button 1 and slide the head restraint backwards into the desired position. # To remove: press release button 2 and pull the head restraint up and out.
# To install: press the head restraint with detent into the holes on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel until it engages.
Switching the seat heating on and off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat- edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera- ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over- heating may occur due to objects or docu- ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu-
ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply has been switched on.
78 Seats and stowage
# To switch on: press button 1. All indicator lamps on the button light up.
# To lower the level: press button 1 until the required heating level is reached. Depending on the heating level, one to three indicator lamps light up.
# To switch off: press button 1 until all indi- cator lamps are off.
% The seat heating automatically switches back out of the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.
Adjusting the steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil- dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
1 Lever 2 Steering column height 3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment # To unlock: swing lever 1 down as far as it
will go. The steering wheel is unlocked. # To lock: pull lever 1 up as far as it will go. The steering wheel is locked.
Stowage areas Overview of the front stowage compartments Overview of the front storage compartments Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 206).
1 Lockable compartment above windshield (subject to a maximum load of 4 lb (2 kg))
2 Windshield storage compartment with two cup holders/ashtray storage space
Seats and stowage 79
Storage compartment with cover, depending on specification 3 Center console storage compartment with USB port, charging interface, NFC interface and 12 V socket 4 Storage compartment above windshield (sub- ject to a maximum load of 5 lb (2.5 kg)) 5 Front passenger side storage compartment (subject to a maximum load of 11 lb (5 kg)) 6 Cup holders (/ page 79) 7 Storage compartment in the doors Information about the bottle holder
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
# Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
The cup holders for the driver and co-driver are in the center console. Key holder 1 for vehicles with a reduced antenna detection range (KEYLESS-START) is located in the driver's cup holder.
1 Bottle holder in the front doors (example: front passenger door)
Cup holders Overview of cup holders in the center console
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehi- cle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu- pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Opening the cup holder in the rear passenger compartment
& WARNING Risk of injury when getting out, due to extended cup holder
If the cup holder in the rear passenger com- partment is extended when you are getting out, you may bump into it. # Before getting out, slide the cup holder
back under the rear bench seat.
80 Seats and stowage
# To open: press cup holder 1 or 2. # Fold out the cup holder. # To close: slide cup holder 1 or 2 back in
until it engages.
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on
Ashtray and cigarette lighter Using ashtrays
# To use the ashtray: place the closed ashtray in a cup holder in the windshield storage compartments.
# Check that the ashtray is seated securely. % Do not place the ashtray in the center con-
sole cup holders. It cannot sit securely here.
Using the cigarette lighter in the center con- sole
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out when the heating element is red-hot.
Sockets Using the 12 V sockets Requirements: R Only devices with a maximum power con-
sumption of 180 W (15 A) may be connected. 12 V socket in storage compartment
# Open the lid of the storage compartment in the center console .
# Fold up cover 1 of the socket. # Insert the plug of the device.
Seats and stowage 81
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has additional 12 V sockets: R In the lower control panel in the front center console R In the driver's seat R In the cargo compartment
Using the 115 V socket in the lower control panel
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam- aged connecting cables or sockets
If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the connecting cable or the 115 V socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, you could receive an electric shock. # Only use dry and damage-free connect-
ing cables. # When the ignition is switched off,
ensure that the 115 V socket is dry. # If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets
pulled out of the paneling, immediately have the socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialized workshop. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Open flap 3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket
1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. If you will not be using the 115 V power socket, keep the flap closed.
Charging a mobile phone using the USB socket in the rear
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor- rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock: R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
# Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements: R The devices must be equipped with a suitable
plug which conforms to the standards spe- cific to the country you are in. R Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts are permitted. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Place the mobile phone in stowage compart- ment 1 and connect it to USB port 2 to charge.
82 Seats and stowage
Wirelessly charging the mobile phone and coupling with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they can-
not be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. # Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
Comply with the instructions for loading the vehi- cle (/ page 206).
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage com- partment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac- ing them in the mobile phone storage compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage
devices, ski passes or other objects
sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow- age compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be dam- aged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Observe the following notes on wireless charging: R The charging function is only available when the drive system has been started. R In some cases, it may not be possible to charge small mobile phones at every position of the mobile phone compartment. R It may not be possible to charge large mobile phones that do not rest in the mobile phone receptacle. R The mobile phone can warm up during the charging process. This depends on the appli- cations (apps) currently running. R For more efficient charging, the protective case should be removed from the mobile phone. Protective cases designed for wireless charging are an exception. R When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Charging the mobile phone in the front wire- lessly Requirements: R The mobile phone must be suitable for wire- less charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
# Open the flap of storage compartment 1 above the media display.
# Place the mobile phone as centrally as possi- ble with the display facing upwards on the marked surface of mat 2. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during charging are shown in the multimedia system display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water.
Installing or removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Seats and stowage 83
# To install: press pushbuttons 1 onto hold- ers 2.
# To remove: pull the floor mats off holders 2.
84 Light and vision
Exterior lighting Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad Vehicles with halogen or static LED head- lamps: Changing the headlamps is not neces- sary. The legal requirements will also be fulfilled in countries with left and right-hand traffic. Information about lighting systems and your responsibility The vehicle's various lighting systems are only aids. The vehicle driver is responsible for adjust- ing the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility, statutory conditions and traffic condi- tions. Light switch Operating the light switch
# 1 T Activates or deactivates parking lights and license plate and instrument light- ing.
# 2 Ã Activates or deactivates automatic driving lights/daytime running lights (prefer- red light switch position).
# 3 L Activates or deactivates low beam/ high beam.
# 4 Activates or deactivates fog light. # 5 R Activates or deactivates rear fog
light. # 6 Applies or releases the electric parking
brake(/ page 140) % If you hear a warning tone when exiting the
vehicle, the light may still be on.
% The turn signal light, the high beam and the high-beam flasher are operated with the com- bination switch (/ page 85).
% Leaving the standing lights on for several hours drains the battery. If the battery charge is very low, the standing lights will switch off automatically to enable the next vehicle start.
Automatic driving lights function
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor vis- ibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. Responsibility for vehicle lighting rests with you. Turn the light switch from à to L immedi- ately in the event of fog, snow or spray. Other- wise, the driving light is temporarily interrupted. To switch the automatic driving lights on: R Turn the light switch to the à position.
Switch the power supply on: the parking lamps will automatically switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light. The daytime running lamps are switched on when the engine is running. The parking lamps and the low beam also switch on or off depending on the brightness of the ambient light. When the low beam is switched on, the L indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will also switch on.
Activating/deactivating the fog light
Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion. R The power supply or the engine has been
switched on.
# To switch the fog light on or off: press but- ton 7.
# To switch the rear fog lamp on or off: press button 6.
Light and vision 85
Comply with the country-specific regulations for using the rear fog lamp. Operating the combination light switch
Turn signal lights # To indicate: push the combination switch in
the required direction 2 or 4 until it engages. In the case of larger steering move- ments, the combination switch will automati- cally switch back. # To indicate briefly: tap the combination switch briefly in the required direction 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal lamp will flash three times.
Switching the hazard warning light system on/off
1 High beam 2 Right turn signal light 3 Headlamp flashing 4 Left turn signal light
# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.
Switching on high beam # Switch on the low beam (/ page 84). # Push the combination switch forwards 1.
The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will light up. The combination switch will return to its starting position.
% The high beam switches to the à position only in darkness and when the engine is run- ning.
# To switch off: push combination switch for- wards 1 or briefly pull it in the direction of arrow 3 (the action for headlamp flashing switches high beam off). The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will go out. The combination switch will return to its starting position.
% Vehicles with Highbeam Assist: when Highbeam Assist is active, it controls the activation and deactivation of the high beam (/ page 86).
Headlamp flashing # Briefly pull the combination switch in the
direction of arrow 3.
# Press button 1. If you operate a turn signal indicator while the hazard warning light system is switched on, only the turn signal lamps on the relevant side of the vehicle will light up. % The hazard warning light system will work
even when the vehicle has been switched off. Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the roadway over a wide angle in the turning
86 Light and vision
direction, e.g. enabling better visibility in tight bends. The function is active under the following condi- tions: R The speed is less than 37 mph (60 km/h) and
the indicator has been switched on or the steering wheel is turned. R The speed is between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) and the steering wheel is turned. The cornering light may still light up for a short time but is switched off automatically after a maximum of three minutes. % When reverse gear is engaged, the lighting switches to the opposite side.
Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic con-
ditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following settings: R Low beam R High beam The system detects that vehicle lights are approaching in the opposite direction or driving ahead of the vehicle.
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h), the system will switch to the following setting: R If no other road users are detected, high
beam will switch on automatically.
At speeds lower than 16 mph (25 km/h) or if there is sufficient street lighting, the system will switch to the following setting: R High beam will automatically switch off. System limits Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take the road, weather or traffic conditions into consideration. The detection of obstacles may be restricted if: R visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or
snow. R the sensors are dirty or covered. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for ensuring correct vehicle lighting in accordance with the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Highbeam Assist on/off
Requirements R The light switch is in the à position. # To switch on: switch on high beam using the
combination switch. If high beam is automatically switched on in darkness, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up. # To switch off: switch off high beam using the combination switch.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time
Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set a switch-off delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exte- rior lighting will be activated for the set time.
Light and vision 87
Activating and deactivating the surround lighting
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting # Activate or deactivate the function.
The exterior lighting will remain on for 40 sec- onds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights acti- vated.
Adjusting the interior lighting for body manu- facturer add-on equipment
Adjusting the interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Versions 1 to 4 # 1 p Switches the front-left reading lamp
on/off # 2 To switch off the automatic interior
lighting control: press the | button. The interior lighting will switch on automati- cally if you: R Unlock the vehicle or R Open a door # 3 c Switches the (front) interior lighting on/off. # 4 w Switches the rear/cargo compart- ment lighting on/off. # 5 p Switches the front-right reading lamp on/off
Variants 1 and 2 combined 1 p Switches the front left reading lamp
on/off 2 | Activates/deactivates automatic inte-
rior lighting control 3 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off 4 w Switches the body manufacturer lamps
on/off 5 p Switches the front right reading lamp
on/off
# To switch the front left reading lamp on/ off: press button 1.
# To deactivate automatic interior lighting control: press button 2. Interior lighting control will switch on auto- matically if you do the following, for example: R Unlock the vehicle R Open a door
# To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press button 3.
# To switch body manufacturer lamps on/ off: press button 4. R Your vehicle may be equipped with a func- tional feedback system: w will light up in red if the body manufacturer lamps are switched on.
R If the body manufacturer lamps have been activated manually, they will remain active for an extended period of time after lock- ing.
88 Light and vision
% This period of time is shortened if there is undervoltage in the starter battery.
% The body manufacturer lamps can be switched on only when the battery voltage is stable.
# To switch the front right reading lamp on/ off: press button 5.
Adjusting interior lighting on bus equipment
1 i Activates/deactivates bus function 2 p Switches the front left reading lamp
on/off 3 | Activates/deactivates automatic inte-
rior lighting control 4 c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off 5 w Switches passenger compartment light-
ing on/off 6 p Switches the front right reading lamp
on/off 7 j Switches reading lights in the
passenger compartment on/off # To activate the bus function: press button
1. The LED lights up. The bus function is in one of the following modes: R Stop mode
If the vehicle comes to a halt at a bus stop, for example, and the passenger door opens, the passenger compartment will be illuminated and undimmed. R Driving mode
If all doors are closed and the vehicle is traveling faster than walking pace, the passenger compartment will be illumina- ted but dimmed. R Automatic off mode If automatic interior lighting control 3 is deactivated, and thereby automatic off mode is active, the passenger compart- ment will be continuously illuminated (dimmed).
When the bus function is activated, the passenger compartment lighting on/off modes can be selected using button 5. Passenger com- partment lighting is then deactivated completely. When button 5 is pressed again to switch passenger compartment lighting on/off, the bus function is again in one of the modes. R If automatic interior lighting control 3 was
previously activated, automatic off mode will be inactive again. R If automatic off mode was not previously acti- vated, either driving or stop mode is active.
% The bus function can be used to switch passenger compartment lighting on/off with- out using button 5. The passenger compart- ment lighting must not be switched on beforehand.
# To deactivate the bus function: press but- ton 1. The LED does not light up.
# To switch the front left reading lamp on or off: press button 2.
# To deactivate the automatic interior light- ing: press button 3. The interior lighting control will switch on automatically, for example, if you: R Unlock the vehicle R Open a door
# To switch front interior lighting on or off: press button 4.
# To switch passenger compartment light- ing on or off: press button 5.
# To switch the front right reading lamp on or off: press button 6.
# To switch reading lights on in the passenger compartment: press button 7. The LED lights up. Passengers can switch the reading lamps on and off.
Light and vision 89
# To switch reading lights off in the passenger compartment: press button 7. The LED does not light up. Passengers can no longer operate the reading lamps.
The motion detector is located in the cargo com- partment behind the partition, in the middle of the roof.
Switching the reading lamp above the passenger seat on and off (bus equipment) # Press the p button above the passenger
seat.
Rear interior lighting
# 1 Switches rear compartment/cargo com- partment lamp on or off
Motion detector & WARNING Risk of injury by laser beam
from motion detector The motion detector transmits invisible radia- tion from LEDs (light-emitting diodes). These LEDs are classified under the 1M laser class and can cause retina damage in the fol- lowing situations: R If you look directly into the unfiltered
laser beam from the motion detector for an extended period R If you look directly into the laser beam of the motion detector with optical instru- ments such as eyeglasses or a magnifying glass. # Never look directly into the laser beam.
1 Position of motion detector
If the vehicle is equipped with a motion detector, the cargo compartment lighting is also activated via the motion detector. If the motion detector detects movement in the cargo compartment while the vehicle is station- ary, the cargo compartment lighting will switch on for approximately two minutes. The cargo compartment lighting can be switched on via the motion detector if: R The vehicle is stationary, the parking brake is
applied and you are not depressing the brake pedal. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position j and you are not depressing the brake pedal. R The vehicle has not been locked from the out- side using the key.
If no change to the vehicle, such as a door open- ing, is detected over several hours, the motion detector will automatically switch off. This pre- vents the battery from discharging.
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.
If the function is active, the interior lighting will remain lit up for a short time when the seat belt buckle is released.
90 Light and vision
Changing bulbs Instructions for replacing light sources
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your- self on these component parts. # Allow the component parts to cool
down before replacing the bulbs.
When you are replacing the light bulb, observe the following: R Do not use any light bulb that has been drop-
ped or has scratches on its glass tube. Other- wise, the light bulb may explode. R The bulb may explode if it is hot or if you touch, drop or scratch it. R Stains on the glass tube will reduce the service life of the light bulb. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube with alcohol or spirits while it is cold state and wipe it down with a lint-free cloth. R Protect light bulbs from humidity and do not bring them into contact with liquids. R Before changing the bulbs, switch off the vehicle's lighting system. This will prevent a short circuit. R Use bulbs only in enclosed lamps that have been designed for them. R Use only spare bulbs of the same type and with the correct voltage. Always ensure the bulbs are firmly secured. If your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps, you can check this as follows: the light cone will move from top to bottom and back again when the vehicle starts. For this to work, low beam needs to have been switched on before the vehicle is started. Bulbs and lamps are major elements in vehicle safety. Therefore, ensure that they are always working. Have the headlamp setting checked reg- ularly. If the new light bulb also does not light up, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing front light bulbs (vehicles with hal- ogen headlamps) Overview of front light source types You can replace the following light sources.
Halogen headlamps 1 High beam/daytime running lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W 2 Low beam/perimeter light: H7 55 W/W 5 W 3 Turn signal light: 3457 NAK 28 W Replacing halogen headlamps Requirements: R Low beam: bulb type H7 55 W R High beam/daytime running lamps: bulb
type H15 55 W/15 W R Perimeter lights: bulb type W 5 W R Turn signal lights: bulb type 3457 NAK
28 W
Light and vision 91
Additional turn signal light Requirements: R Additional turn signal light (all-wheel
drive vehicles): bulb type P 21 W
1 Low beam/perimeter light housing cover 2 High beam/daytime running lamps housing
cover 3 Turn signal light socket
# Switch off the lighting system. # Low beam/perimeter light: remove housing
cover 1 towards the rear. # Pull out the socket towards the rear. # Remove the bulb from the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket such that
the base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket. # Align and insert the socket. # Attach housing cover 1. # High beam/daytime running lamps: remove housing cover 2 towards the rear. # Turn the socket counter-clockwise and pull it out. # Remove the bulb from the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket such that the base of the bulb rests fully against the base of the socket. # Insert the socket and turn it clockwise. # Attach housing cover 2. # Turn signal light: # Turn socket 3 counter-clockwise and remove it. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and take it out of the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise. # Insert socket 3 and turn it clockwise.
# Switching off the lighting system. # Unscrew screws1 and remove lens 2. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and
take it out of the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise. # Place lens2 in position and tighten the
screws1.
Replacing rear light bulbs (Cargo Van and Passenger Van) Overview of rear bulb types (Cargo Van and Passenger Van) You can replace the following bulbs.
92 Light and vision
Vehicles with standard tail lamps 1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light: P 21 W 2 Backing up light: P 21 W 3 License plate lamp: W 5 W 4 Rear fog light: P 21 W You can replace the following bulbs.
1 Brake light/tail light/perimeter light 2 Backing up light 3 Rear fog light
# Switch off the lighting system. # Open the rear-end door.
Vehicles with partial LED tail lamps 1 Backing up light: P 21 W 2 License plate lamp: W 5 W 3 Rear fog light: P 21 W
Changing the tail lamps (Cargo Van and Passenger Van)
Requirements: R Brake lights/tail lights/perimeter lights:
bulb type P 21 W R Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W R Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W
Light and vision 93
# To remove: loosen screws 1 and pull out the tail lamp in the direction of the arrow.
# Remove the plug from bulb mount 3. # Loosen screws 2 and remove bulb mount
3 from the tail lamp. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and
take it out of the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise. # To install: set bulb mount 3 on the tail lamp
and screw in screws 2. # Press the plug into bulb mount 3. # Insert the tail lamp and screw in screws 1. License plate lamp Requirements: R License plate lamp: light bulb type W 5 W
# Switch off the lighting system. # Place a screwdriver, for example, at opening
2 between lamp 3 and panel 1 and care- fully pry off lamp 3. # Remove lamp 3 from panel 1. # Rotate the bulb holder by around 45° and detach it from the lamp. # Remove the light bulb. # Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. # Insert the bulb holder into the lamp and rotate it by around 45°. # Insert the lamp into the panel opening until it engages.
Vehicles with standard tail lamps 1 Clearance lamp: R 5 W 2 Tail light: R 5 W 3 Brake light: P 21 W 4 Turn signal lights: PY 21 W 5 Backing up light: P 21 W 6 Rear fog light (driver's side): P 21 W 7 License plate lamp: R 5 W
Replacing the tail lamps on the chassis
Requirements: R Rear fog lights: bulb type P 21 W R License plate lighting: bulb type R 5 W R Backing up lights: bulb type P 21 W R Turn signal lights: bulb type PY 21 W R Clearance lamps: bulb type R 5 W R Brake lights: bulb type P 21 W R Tail lights: bulb type R 5 W
Replacing rear light bulbs (chassis) Overview of rear light source types (chassis) You can replace the following light sources.
94 Light and vision
1 Light lens 2 Screws 3 Rear fog light 4 License plate lamp 5 Backing up light 6 Turn signal light 7 Clearance lamp 8 Brake light 9 Tail light
# Switch off the lighting system. # Unscrew screws 2 and remove light lens
1. # Remove the plug from the bulb mount. # Gently turn the bulb counter-clockwise and
take it out of the socket. # Insert the new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise. # Position light lens 1 and tighten screws 2.
# Switch off the interior lighting. # Press in catch spring of lens 1 with a suita-
ble object e.g. a screwdriver, and then lever off the lens with the lamp housing. # To pull back lens from the lamp housing: press the lugs of lens 2 inwards. # Remove light bulb 3 from the lamp housing. # Insert the new light bulb. # Insert the lens in the lamp housing until it engages. # Place the lens with the lamp housing in posi- tion and engage it.
Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on and off
Replacing interior light bulbs Replacing rear interior lamps
Requirements: % For the standard bulb failure indicator func-
tion to work correctly, only lights bulbs must be used that are the same type and power as those installed during production.
1 î Single wipe/wiping with washer fluid 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
Light and vision 95
Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent Vehicles with rain sensors: automatic wiping, frequent 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast # Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position 1 5. # Single wipe/washing: press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer fluid
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
% If the wiper blades are worn out, they will not wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall.
1 ô Single wipe/wash 2 è Intermittent wiping
# To wipe once : press button 1 to the point of resistance.
# To wipe with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of resistance.
# To switch intermittent wiping on or off: press button 2. If the rear window wiper is switched on, the è symbol will appear on the Instrument Display.
# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield. # Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade
away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go. # Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. # Fold back the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. # Remove wiper blade 1 from wiper arm.
96 Light and vision
# Insert new washer blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.
When doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades: R Driver's side: long wiper blade R Front-passenger side: short wiper blade
# Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades (WET WIPER SYSTEM)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
% If the wiper blades are worn out, they will not wipe the windshield properly. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in spring and fall.
# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the windshield. # Hold wiper arm 3 and turn the wiper blade
away from wiper arm 3 in the direction of the arrow as far as it will go. # Slide catch 2 upwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. # Remove wiper blade 1 from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4. # Carefully remove hose 5 from the wiper blade. # Attach hose 5 to the new wiper blade. # Insert new washer blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.
When doing so, take into account the different lengths of the wiper blades: R Driver's side: long wiper blade R front-passenger side: short wiper blade
# Slide catch 2 downwards until it engages. # Fold back the wiper blade onto the wiper arm. # Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the windshield.
Light and vision 97
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
# Fold wiper arm 3 away from the rear win- dow.
# Press both retaining clips 2 together in the direction of the arrow and swivel the wiper blade away from the wiper arm.
# Pull wiper blade 1 upwards out of the holder on wiper arm 3.
# Insert new wiper blade 1 in the holder on wiper arm 3.
# Push new wiper blade 1 onto wiper arm 3 until the retaining clips engage.
# Fold wiper arm 3 back onto the rear win- dow.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis- judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
Adjusting the outside mirrors manually # Adjust the outside mirrors to the correct posi-
tion manually. # To engage an outside mirror that has
been pushed out of position: push the out- side mirror into position manually.
Adjusting the outside mirrors electrically
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: In particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.
Example image
* NOTE Damage to the electric outside mirrors
If you fold the electric outside mirrors in or out manually, you may damage the outside mirrors and they will not lock in place prop- erly. If the outside mirrors are not folded in when washing the vehicle in a car wash, the washer brushes may fold them in forcibly and dam- age them. # The outside mirrors must only be folded
in and out electrically.
98 Light and vision # Fold the outside mirrors in before wash- ing the vehicle in a car wash.
# Before driving off, switch on the power supply or the ignition.
# To fold in or out: briefly press button 2. # To adjust: use button 1 or 3 to select the
outside mirror to be adjusted. # Set the position of the mirror glass using but-
ton 4. # To engage an outside mirror that has
been pushed out of position: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi- bly engage in position. The outside mirror is set in the correct position. Heating the outside mirrors # Vehicles without a rear window heater: at low temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the engine has been started. # Vehicles with a rear window heater: at low temperatures, the mirror heater will switch on automatically once the engine has been star- ted. The mirror heater can also be switched on together with the rear window heater using the rear window heater button. Dimming the inside rearview mirror
# Fold anti-glare lever 1 in the direction of the arrow.
Overview of climate control systems Heating system overview
Climate control 99
1 Adjusts the temperature 2 / Switches the rear-compartment heating
on/off 3 ¤ Switches the rear window heater
on/off (/ page 103) 4 O Switches footwell air distribution
on/off 5 ¬ Switches windshield defrosting on/off
(/ page 102) 6 Vehicles with stationary heater or heater
booster: & switches the stationary heater or heater booster on/off (/ page 105) 7 Sets the airflow % The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activa- ted.
100 Climate control Overview of dual-zone or 3-zone automatic climate control
1 w Sets the temperature 2 Display 3 K Sets the airflow 4 Î Vehicles with windshield heating:
switches the windshield heating on/off (/ page 103) 5 Vehicles with stationary heaters or heater boosters: & switches the stationary heater or heater booster on/off (/ page 105) 6 Vehicles with a rear window heating: ¤ switches the rear window heating on/off (/ page 103) 7 h Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 102) 8 ¬ Switches windshield defrosting on/off (/ page 102) 9 _ Sets the air distribution (/ page 102) A ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 101) B Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode, front (/ page 101) and rear (/ page 101) C 0 Activates/deactivates synchronization (/ page 102) D / Vehicles with dual-zone climate control systems: adjusts the rear-compartment cli- mate control/heating (indicator lamp flashes) (/ page 101) % The indicator lamps on the buttons signal that the function in question has been activa- ted.
Operating climate control systems Switching the climate control system on/off
# To switch on: set the airflow to 1 or higher on the front-compartment menu.
# To switch off: set the airflow to 0 or OFF on the front-compartment menu. OFF will appear on the climate control system display.
% When the climate control system is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch the climate control system off only briefly.
% If the front-compartment system has already been switched on and the rear-compartment system has been switched off, you can switch it on by turning up the blower on the rear-compartment menu. If the front-com- partment system is switched on, the rearcompartment system will automatically switch on as well.
Climate control 101
Setting the rear-compartment climate control
Requirements: R The climate control system has been
switched on (/ page 100).
Setting the temperature and airflow with dual-zone and 3-zone automatic climate con- trol: # Press the / button.
The indicator lamp on the / button and the / symbol on the climate control sys- tem display will flash. The display will switch to the temperature and the blower on the rear menu. # Use the w and K rocker switches to set the required temperature and airflow on the rear-compartment menu. % If there are significant differences between the temperature settings of the front and rear systems, these cannot be regulated accu- rately. % If the rear-compartment climate control has been switched off, you can switch it on auto- matically by pressing the 0 button. Depending on the vehicle equipment, climate control will switch on the roof-mounted air condi- tioning system or rear-compartment heating as required: R Vehicles with a roof-mounted air condi- tioning system: the rear compartment can only be cooled. R Vehicles with rear-compartment heating: the rear compartment can only be heated.
Switching off rear-compartment climate con- trol via dual-zone and 3-zone automatic cli- mate control: # Press the / button. # If the indicator lamp on the / button and
the / symbol on the climate control sys- tem display flash, set the airflow to 0 on the rear-compartment menu. % Indicator lamp on: rear-compartment climate control has been switched on. Indicator lamp off: rear-compartment climate control has been switched off. Indicator lamp flashes: the setting mode of the rear-compartment climate control is active.
Switching the A/C function on/off
Requirements: R The climate control system has been
switched on (/ page 100). The A/C function controls the climate and dries the air inside the vehicle. # Press the ¿ button. % Switch off the A/C function only briefly. Oth-
erwise, the windows could fog up more quickly. % Condensation may leak from the underside of the vehicle in cooling mode. This is not a sign of a malfunction.
Automatically regulating climate control
Requirements: R The climate control system has been
switched on (/ page 100). Switching on automatic climate control In automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant. # Press the à button.
The display will show the temperature. The airflow and air distribution will disappear from the display. If the rear-compartment climate control has been switched on, the setting for the rear compartment will be carried over. Switching off automatic climate control # Use the K rocker switch to change the air- flow setting and air distribution (/ page 102) . The other setting will remain unaffected by the change.
Automatically controlling climate control in the rear compartment
Requirements: R Rear-compartment climate control has been
switched on (/ page 101). In automatic mode, the temperature, airflow and air distribution are regulated and kept constant. # Press the / button. # Press the à button.
102 Climate control
% Even if the front-compartment system is in automatic mode, the rear-compartment sys- tem can exit automatic mode if you adjust the blower on the rear-compartment menu.
% If the air is cooled and the driver's, front passenger or sliding door is opened, the rear air conditioning system blower will be turned down after around 15 minutes. When all doors have been closed again, the blower will be reset to the previous setting after around one minute.
Information on the air distribution settings The symbols on the display indicate the vents through which the air is being directed. Dual-zone automatic climate control R b Defroster and center air vents R _ All vents R P Center air vents R S Center and footwell vents 3-zone automatic climate control R ¯ Defroster vents R b Defroster and center air vents R _ All vents R a Defroster and footwell vents R P Center air vents R S Center and footwell vents R O Footwell vents
Setting the air distribution
Requirements: R The climate control system is switched on. # Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired air distribution appears in the air con- ditioning system display.
Switching the synchronization function on/off
Requirements: R The climate control system has been
switched on (/ page 100). The synchronization function controls the climate control function centrally. The settings for the temperature and airflow in the front zone are automatically adopted for the rear zone.
# Press the 0 button. % If the rear compartment climate control has
been switched off, you can switch it on auto- matically by pressing the 0 button.
Defrosting the windows
Condensation on the inside of windows # Press the ¬ button.
When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjus- ted. # In vehicles with a heating system and a man- ual air-conditioning system, also close the side and center air vent (/ page 103) as well as the air vents for the rear compartment (/ page 104). # Vehicles with dual-zone or 3-zone auto- matic climate control: press the ¿ but- ton and, if necessary, use the _ button to direct the air onto the windshield ¯. # Increase the airflow as necessary and close all air vents (/ page 103). # If the windows remain fogged up: press the ¬ button. When windshield defrosting is switched on, the temperature and airflow cannot be adjus- ted. ¬ or no symbol will appear on the climate control system display. # Vehicles with a windshield heater: press the Î button. # Close the center air vent (/ page 103) and air vents for the headroom (/ page 104) and rear compartment (/ page 104). Condensation on the outside of windows # Switch on the windshield wipers (/ page 94).
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press the h button.
The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will switch off automati- cally. % When air-recirculation mode is switched on,
the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Climate control 103
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch on in the following cases: R At high outside temperatures R While the vehicle is driving through a tunnel
(vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con- trol only) R When the windshield wipers are switched on (/ page 94)
The indicator lamp on the h button will not light up in this case. After a maximum of 30 minutes, outside air will automatically be introduced again.
Switching the windshield heater on and off
% In the event of high outside temperatures, the windshield heater may not switch on.
# Press the Î button. If the indicator lamp on the button lights up, the windshield heater has switched on.
% The windshield heater switches off automati- cally after a few minutes.
% If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible to switch the windshield heater on. If the battery voltage becomes too low while the windshield heater is in operation, the windshield heater will switch off automati- cally.
# To open or close: hold center 2 of air vent 1 and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
# To set the air direction: hold center 2 of air vent 1 and swivel it upwards, down- wards, to the left or to the right.
Switching the rear window heater on or off # Press the ¤ button.
If the indicator lamp lights up, the rear win- dow heater is switched on.
Operating air vents Adjusting the front-compartment air vents
& WARNING Danger of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
# To open or close: turn the adjustment wheels 1 on the high-power air vents to the left or right as far as they will go.
% Cooled air will flow out of the high-power air vents. Heating will not be possible. Open the high-power air vents only in summer during cooling mode and keep them closed in win- ter.
104 Climate control Adjusting air vents in the roof air duct
In vehicles with a rear compartment air condition- ing system, adjustable air vents have been inte- grated in the roof air duct. # To adjust the airflow: if necessary, open or
close the air flaps in air vents 1. # To adjust the air distribution: turn air vents
1 to the required position.
Information about air vents in the rear com- partment
& WARNING Danger of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents. # If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there will be an air duct or a heater with additional air vents in the rear compartment footwell on the left-hand side 1. No objects may be placed there. Occu- pants must maintain a sufficient distance due to the warm air flow and air intake.
Auxiliary heating Notes about auxiliary heating
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example. # Always switch the stationary heater off
in enclosed spaces without an air extraction systems, e.g. in garages. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup- ply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station- ary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # When the stationary heater is switched
on, make sure that:
Climate control 105
R Hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
R The exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
R The exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.
* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating If the auxiliary heating is not used for a long time, it may be damaged. # Switch on the auxiliary heating at least
once a month for about ten minutes.
* NOTE Damage to the auxiliary heating due to overheating
If the flow of hot air is blocked, the auxiliary heating may overheat and switch off. # Do not block the flow of hot air.
% Vehicles with modified fuel displays: if an externally operated consumer is connected via the cable for the auxiliary heating, this is not taken into consideration on the "remain- ing range" display of the on-board computer. In this case, observe the fuel display. The fuel display reflects the actual fill level.
If you are transporting hazardous materials, com- ply with the relevant safety regulations. Place objects a sufficient distance from the auxiliary heating outlet opening. Auxiliary heating works independently of the engine and complements the climate control sys- tem in the vehicle. Auxiliary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature.
Hot-water auxiliary heater Function of the hot-water auxiliary heater The hot-water auxiliary heater complements your vehicle's climate control system, and has a heater booster, auxiliary heating and auxiliary ventilation function. In addition, the auxiliary heating system heats the engine coolant to pro- tect the engine and save fuel during the warmingup phase. The auxiliary heating heats the air inside the vehicle to the set temperature. It is not dependent on the heat output of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must have been filled above the reserve fuel
level so that the auxiliary heating can work. The auxiliary heating automatically adapts its operat- ing mode to the outside temperature and weather. It is therefore possible that the auxiliary heating may switch from ventilation to heating mode or from heating to ventilation mode. When the engine is running, auxiliary ventilation is not active. Auxiliary heating automatically switches itself off after a maximum of 50 minutes. You cannot use the "auxiliary ventilation" operating mode to cool the air inside the vehicle to below the outside temperature. Auxiliary heating helps to heat up the vehicle while the engine is running and at low outside temperatures. Operating the hot-water auxiliary heater draws power from the vehicle battery. Therefore, drive a reasonably long distance after heating or ventilat- ing the vehicle twice in succession at most. Auxiliary heating can be activated only at temper- atures below 40 °F (4.5 °C).
Switching the hot-water auxiliary heater on/off with the button
Requirements: R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level.
# To switch the auxiliary heating on and off: press the & button.
# To activate the specified temperature: switch on the ignition and press the & button.
# To deactivate the specified temperature: press the & button.
# Set the temperature using the w button and press the & button.
Colors of the indicator lamp: R Blue: stationary ventilation has been
switched on. R Red: the stationary heater has been switched
on. R Yellow: a departure time has been preselec-
ted.
The stationary heater or ventilation switches off after a maximum of 50 minutes. # To activate heater booster mode: switch on
the ignition and press the & button. # To switch off heater booster mode: press
the & button. Heater booster mode will be switched on as necessary when the outside temperature is lower than 32°F (0°C).
106 Climate control
Setting the hot-water auxiliary heater using the on-board computer
Requirements: R The fuel tank is filled above the reserve level. R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: 4 Settings 5 Heating
Setting the switch-on time # Select Settings. # Select the desired departure time.
Activating the departure time # Activate the departure time by ticking the
box. % Ensure that A, B and C each correspond to a
programmed departure time. % The programmed time remains set only until
the next time the engine is started.
Selecting a programmed time # Set the required programmed time A, B or C.
% The required programmed time A, B or C will appear only if the box to activate the depar- ture time is ticked.
# Select the required programmed time by swiping left or right, e.g. A, B or C.
# To switch on and extract: press switch 1 at the top. The roof ventilator removes used air from the cargo compartment.
# To switch on and admit fresh air: press switch 2 at the bottom. The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the cargo compartment.
# To switch off: set the switch to the center position.
Operating cargo compartment ventilation
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator, you can admit fresh air to the cargo compart- ment, or extract air from it as well. # Switch on the ignition.
Driving Switching on power supply or ignition with the start/stop button
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are
no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Driving and parking 107 Requirements: R The key is in detection range of the antenna
(/ page 46) and the key battery is not dis- charged. R In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: the key is located in the key holder provided in the driv- er's cup holder (/ page 79).
# To switch on the power supply: press but- ton 1 once. You can switch on the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again when one of the following conditions is met: R The driver's door is open. R You press button 1 twice. # To switch on the ignition: press button 1
twice. The indicator lamps appear in the instrument cluster. The ignition is switched off again when one of the following conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes. R You press button 1 once.
108 Driving and parking
Starting the engine
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but- ton
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unatten- ded in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press but- tons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat-
tended.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car- rier.
Requirements R The key is in detection range of the antenna
(/ page 46) and the key battery is not dis- charged. R In addition, the following applies for vehicles with a reduced detection range: the key is located in the key holder provided in the driv- er's cup holder (/ page 79).
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j or i.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle does not start: switch off unnec- essary consumers and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the dis- play messagePlace Key in Marked Space See Operator's Manual also appears in the multi- function display: start the vehicle in emer- gency operation mode.
Driving and parking 109
Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. If the vehicle does not start and the display mes- sage Place Key in Marked Space See Operator's Manual appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
# Remove key 1 from your key ring. # Insert key 1 into the slot.
The vehicle is started after a brief time.
# Leave the key inserted during the entire jour- ney. If you pull key 1 out of the slot, the engine continues to run.
# Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Leave key 1 in the marked space. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the vehicle with the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
Breaking-in notes
Protect the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km) by: R Driving at varying road and engine speeds. R Shifting to the next gear up when or before
the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area. R Avoiding stress on the vehicle such as driving at full throttle. R Not shifting manually to a lower gear to brake. R After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), gradually increasing the engine speed and accelerating the vehicle up to full speed. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: not depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
This also applies if the engine or parts of the driv- etrain have been replaced. Also observe the following breaking-in notes: R After the vehicle has been delivered or after
repairs, the sensor system of the ESP® driv- ing safety system adjusts itself automatically after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R New and replaced brakepads, brake disks and tires only reach their optimal braking effect and traction after approximately 100 miles. Until then, compensate for the reduced brak- ing effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal.
110 Driving and parking
Driving tips Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects securely in the vehicle
so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. # When using floor mats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. # Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers # Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv-
ing.
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi- cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco- hol and drugs while driving
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury from operating mobile communications equipment
If you operate mobile communication equip- ment when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The probability of a serious or even fatal acci- dent increases greatly if you operate mobile communication equipment when driving. # Only operate mobile communication
equipment when the vehicle is station- ary.
For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment:
Driving and parking 111
R Observe the legal requirements for the coun- try in which you are driving.
R While driving, only operate mobile communi- cations equipment when the traffic conditions permit it. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions and cause an acci- dent, injuring yourself and others.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to over- heated brake system
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal during while driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not press the brake pedal and accel-
erator pedal simultaneously while driv- ing.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehi- cle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- ously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi- ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata- lytic converter.
# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Exhaust emission monitoring Specific engine systems are designed to keep poisonous components of exhaust gases within legal limits. These systems only work optimally if they are maintained exactly according to manufacturer's specifications. It is for this reason that all work on the engine should only be performed by quali- fied and authorized Freightliner Sprinter service center technicians. Under no circumstances should engine settings be changed. In addition, all specific maintenance work must be performed at regular intervals and in compliance with the service regulations of the dealer named in the imprint. Refer to the Mainte- nance Booklet for details. Notes on short-distance trips If the vehicle is predominantly used for short-dis- tance driving, fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and cause engine damage. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 minutes every 480 km (300 miles). This facili- tates the regeneration of the diesel particulate fil- ter. Notes on the limit speed
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
As the driver, you must find out about the maxi- mum permissible speed for the tires (tire and tire pressure). Observe the legal requirements for tires for the country in which you are staying.
112 Driving and parking
% Vehicles with tachograph: due to the differ- ent certification requirements for the tacho- graph and instrument cluster, the displayed speeds may differ. Please keep to the speed display in the instrument cluster.
You can permanently limit the speed of your vehi- cle. Freightliner Sprinter recommends a qualified spe- cialist workshop for programming the limit speed. Note that you cannot exceed a programmed limit speed when overtaking. On downhill gradients, the limit speed may be exceeded. Apply the brakes if necessary. Display messages indicate that you are approach- ing the limit speed. % For buses, the speed is limited to 60 mph
(100 km/h) at the factory. When overtaking, bear in mind that the limit speed cannot be exceeded.
Information about driving abroad
Service An extensive Freightliner Sprinter service is also available abroad. Nevertheless, please remember that service facilities or spare parts may not be available immediately. The relevant workshop directories are available from a Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Fuel In some countries, only fuels with an increased sulfur content are available. Mercedes-Benz recommends installing a fuel fil- ter with a water separator for countries with an increased water content in diesel. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor- mation about fuel can be found in the "Fuel" sec- tion (/ page 273).
Information about transport by rail Transporting your vehicle by rail may be subject to certain restrictions or require special meas- ures to be taken in some countries due to varying tunnel heights and loading standards. You can obtain information about this from any Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Information on brakes
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- ously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
Downhill gradients On long and steep downhill gradients you should observe the following instructions: R in vehicles with an automatic transmission,
shift down to shift ranges 2 or 1 in good time so that the engine is running at a medium to high engine speed (/ page 122). % Change the shift range in good time when cruise control is activated. Observe the driv- ing tips (/ page 110). You thereby make use of the braking effect of the engine and do not have to brake as often to main- tain the speed. This relieves the load on the service brake and prevents the brakes from over- heating and wearing too quickly. Heavy and light loads If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
Driving and parking 113
on for a short while. The brakes cool down more quickly in the airflow. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. The brakes will grip better as a result.
Wet road surfaces If you have been driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed response when you first apply the brakes. This may also occur after driving through a car wash or deep water. You must depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. While paying attention to the traffic conditions, you should brake the vehicle firmly after driving on a wet road surface or through a car wash. This heats the brake discs so that they dry more quickly, which protects them against corrosion. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: R a layer of salt on the brake discs or brakepads
can increase braking distances considerably, or braking may happen on only one side R maintain an especially large safe distance to the vehicle in front
To remove the layer of salt: R apply the brakes from time to time, paying
attention to traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of a journey and after the start of a new jour- ney
Checking the brakepad thickness In addition to monitoring using the brakepad wear sensor, regularly monitor and check all of the brakepads by performing a visual inspection to look for material wear on the pads. If you are unable to check the brakepad wear on the inside of the wheels, remove the wheels if you possess the required skills, or visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the brakepad material thickness is less than 0.12 in (3 mm), have the brakepads checked and replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, if necessary. Do not solely rely on the brakepad wear sensor. It is also strongly recommended that you have the brakepads checked at a qualified specialist workshop, not only at every service displayed by the maintenance interval display, but also prior to
long journeys and whenever the wheels are removed. Check the brakepads in the following cases: R At every service according to the mainte-
nance interval R Before long journeys R At every tire change R Regular visual inspection for your own safety
New brake discs and brakepads New brakepads and brake discs only reach their optimal braking effect after a few hundred miles (a few hundred kilometers). Until then, compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you only have brakepads and brake discs which are approved by Freightliner Sprinter installed on your vehicle. Other brake discs or brakepads may compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake discs and brakepads on an axle at the same time. Always install new brakepads when replacing brake discs.
Parking brake
& WARNING Risk of skidding or an acci- dent by braking with the parking brake
If you have to brake your vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is consid- erably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or acci- dent. # Only brake the vehicle with the parking
brake if the service brake has failed. # In this case, do not apply the parking
brake with too much force. # If the wheels lock, immediately release
the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again.
Vehicles with a manual parking brake When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered surfa- ces, road salt or dirt may get into the parking brake. This causes corrosion and a reduction of braking force. In order to prevent this, drive with the parking brake lightly applied from time to time.
114 Driving and parking
When doing so, drive for a distance of approx- imately 300 ft at a maximum speed of 13 mph (20 km/h). The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Information about driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning because tire tread is too low
Depending on the depth of the water on the roadway, aquaplaning can occur despite suffi- cient tire tread depth and low speed. # Avoid tire ruts and brake carefully.
Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in which hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows: R Reduce your speed R Avoid tire ruts R Brake carefully Driving on flooded roads Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible depth of water to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. Otherwise, you can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind the fol- lowing: R The water level of standing water may not be
above the lower edge of the front bumper. R You may drive no faster than walking pace.
Observe the notes on fording while off-road for all-wheel drive vehicles (/ page 115). Information about driving in winter
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi- sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila- tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi- cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater are run- ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi- cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur-
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions may roll in neutral position i for only a short time. Allowing the wheels to roll for longer, e.g. when towing, causes transmission damage. If the vehicle threatens to skid, or cannot be stop- ped when traveling at a low speed, you can stabi- lize the vehicle using the following measures: R Shift the automatic transmission to neutral
position i. R Try to maintain control of the vehicle using
corrective steering.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Have your vehicle winterized at a qualified spe- cialist workshop in good time at the onset of win- ter. Observe the notes on snow chains (/ page 241). Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow or ice when traveling in wintry conditions. An accumulation of snow and ice, particularly when frozen, in the area around the air intake, moving parts, the axles, and the wheel wells may cause the following problems: R Obstruction of the air intake R Damage to vehicle parts R Malfunctions due to restriction of the mobility
intended by the design (e.g. reduced steering movement)
If there is any damage, inform a qualified special- ist workshop.
Driving and parking 115
Information about driving off-road
& WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines
If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll- over. # Always drive on inclines in the line of fall
(straight up or down) and do not turn.
& WARNING Risk of injury from accelera- tion forces during off-road driving
You could be thrown from your seat, for example. # Always wear your seat belt even when
driving off-road.
& WARNING Risk of injury to hands when driving over obstacles
If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steering wheel may recoil. # Always keep the steering wheel firmly
gripped with both hands. # When driving over obstacles, expect
increased steering forces for a short time.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust sys- tem
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under- side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam- mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle after driving off-road
Foreign bodies, such as stones and branches, could become trapped on the vehicle under- side or on wheels and tires while you are driv- ing and cause damage to the vehicle.
Foreign bodies could cause the following damage: R Damage the suspension, the fuel tank or
the brake system R Cause imbalances and thus vibrations
# Regularly remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches.
# After driving off-road, check carefully whether there is any damage to the vehicle.
# If there is damage, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.
When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the vehicle underside, wheels and tires regularly at regular intervals. In particular, remove any trapped foreign bodies, e.g. stones and branches. Observe the following notes regarding foreign bodies of this kind: R They may damage the suspension, the fuel
tank or the brake system. R They may disturb the balance and cause
vibrations. R They may be flung out from the vehicle when
you continue driving.
If there is any damage, inform a qualified special- ist workshop. When driving off-road on steep inclines, you must make sure that the DEF tank is sufficiently filled. Therefore, ensure a level of at least ten liters before off-road driving. When driving off-road and on construction sites, sand, mud and water, also mixed with oil, can get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure, also as a result of increased wear. The braking characteris- tics will vary depending on the material that has got into the system. Clean the brakes after driv- ing off-road. If you then notice a reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Adjust your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. Driving off-road or on construction sites increa- ses the possibility of vehicle damage which may in turn lead to the failure of certain major assem- blies and systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Have
116 Driving and parking
any vehicle damage rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible. When driving on rough cross-country terrain, do not shift the transmission to neutral and do not disengage the clutch. You could lose control when attempting to brake the vehicle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannot manage an uphill incline, drive back down in reverse gear. When loading your vehicle for off-road driving or on a construction site, keep the vehicle's center of gravity as low as possible.
Checklist before off-road driving R Check the fuel and DEF levels (/ page 172)
and refill if necessary (/ page 130). R Engine: check the oil level and add oil if nec-
essary (/ page 213). Before driving up or down extreme inclines or slopes, fill the oil to the maximum level.
% If you drive up or down extreme inclines or slopes, the 4 symbol may appear in the multifunction display. The engine operating safety is not put at risk if you have filled the engine oil to the maximum level before the journey.
R Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is work- ing (/ page 259).
R Make sure that a lug wrench (/ page 259), a wooden underlay for the jack, a sturdy tow rope, a folding spade and a wheel chock (depending on equipment) are carried in the vehicle.
R Tires and wheels: check the tire tread depth (/ page 240) and the tire pressure (/ page 248).
Rules for off-road driving Always be aware of the ground clearance of the vehicle and avoid obstacles such as deep tire ruts. Obstacles can damage the following parts of the vehicle, for example: R Suspension R Drivetrain R Fuel and operating fluid reservoirs
Therefore, always drive slowly when off-road. If you must drive over obstacles, have the co-driver instruct you. % Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you
additionally carry a shovel and a recovery rope with a shackle in the vehicle.
R Make sure that loads and items of luggage are securely stored or lashed down (/ page 206).
R Before driving off-road, stop the vehicle and engage a low gear.
R Vehicles with DSR: activate DSR when you are driving downhill (/ page 149).
R All-wheel drive vehicles: activate the allwheel drive (/ page 124) and, if necessary, activate the LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 125).
R If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away (/ page 144).
R Only drive off-road with the engine running and a gear engaged.
R Drive slowly and smoothly. It may often be necessary to drive at walking pace.
R Avoid spinning the driven wheels. R Ensure that the wheels remain in contact with
the ground. R As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to take
a look at the route to be taken first. Exercise the utmost caution when driving across unfa- miliar, unpredictable terrain. R Look out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes, tree stumps and tire ruts). R Avoid edges where the surface could crumble or break away.
Rules for fording off-road (all-wheel drive vehicles) R Observe the safety notes and general notes
on driving off-road. R Check the depth and characteristics of the
body of water before fording. The water must not be deeper than 23.6 in (60 cm). R The climate control system is switched off (/ page 100). R The stationary heater is switched off (/ page 105). R Activate all-wheel drive (/ page 124) and activate it on vehicles with the LOW RANGE transmission ratio (/ page 125). R Restrict the shift range to 1 or 2. R Avoid high engine speeds. R Drive slowly and smoothly at no more than a walking pace. R Ensure that no bow wave forms while driving. R After fording, dry the brakes.
Driving and parking 117
After driving through a body of water deeper than 19.7 in (50 cm) check all vehicle fluids for any signs of water penetration.
Checklist after driving off-road Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than normal road opera- tion. Check your vehicle after driving on rough terrain. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident for yourself and other road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughly before driving on public roads. If you find damage to the vehicle after off-road driving, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the following points after driving offroad, on construction sites and before driving on public roads: R Vehicles with DSR: deactivate DSR
(/ page 149). R All-wheel drive vehicles: deactivate the all-
wheel drive (/ page 124). R Activate ESP® (/ page 144). R Clean the exterior lighting, particularly the
headlamps and tail lamps, and check them for damage. R Clean the front and rear license plate. R Clean the windshield, windows and outside mirrors. R Clean the steps, entrances and grab handles. This increases the safety of your footing. R Clean the wheels and tires, wheel wells and the underbody of the vehicle with a water jet. This increases road adhesion, especially on wet roadways. R Check the wheels and tires and wheel wells for trapped foreign objects and remove them. Trapped foreign objects can damage the wheels and tires or may be flung out from the vehicle when continuing the journey. R Check the underbody for trapped branches or other parts of plants and remove them. R Clean the brake discs, brakepads and axle joints, particularly after operation in sand, mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirty conditions. R Check the entire floor assembly, the tires, wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering, suspension and exhaust system for any dam- age.
R Check the service brake for operating safety, e.g. carry out a brake test.
R If you notice strong vibrations after driving off-road, check the wheels and drivetrain for foreign objects again. Remove any foreign objects which can lead to imbalances and thus cause vibrations. In the event of damage to the wheels and the drive train, visit a quali- fied specialist workshop immediately.
Function of the ECO display The ECO display summarizes your driving charac- teristics from the start of the journey to its com- pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco- nomical driving style. An economical driving style means that the ECO display will feature a star or a shine effect. You can influence consumption as follows: R Anticipate road and traffic conditions. R Observe the gearshift recommendations.
Instrument display with color display The segment's lettering lights up brightly, the outer edge lights up and the segment is filled when the vehicle is driven with the following char- acteristics: R 1 ACCELERATION: moderate acceleration R 2 CONSTANT: consistent speed R 3 COASTING: gentle deceleration and roll-
ing The segment's lettering is gray, the outer edge is dark and the segment is emptied when the vehi- cle is driven with the following characteristics: R 1 ACCELERATION: sporty acceleration R 2 CONSTANT: speed fluctuations R 3 COASTING: heavy braking
118 Driving and parking
You have driven in an economical manner if: R The three segments have been completely fil-
led simultaneously. R The edge of all three segments lights up.
enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain fields.
Instrument display with black and white display
The bars will fill up when the vehicle is driven with the following characteristics: R 1 Moderate acceleration R 2 Consistent speed R 3 Gentle deceleration and rolling
The bars will empty when the vehicle is driven with the following characteristics: R 1 Sporty acceleration R 2 Speed fluctuations R 3 Heavy braking The display will also show additional range 4 Bonus XXX mi From Start or XXX mi From Start that you have achieved with your driving style compared with a driver with a very sporty driving style. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.
Diesel particulate filter Notes on regeneration % The regeneration of the diesel particulate fil-
ter is special equipment and not installed as standard.
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
* NOTE Damage due to hot exhaust gases
Very hot exhaust gases are emitted from the tailpipe during regeneration. # During regeneration, maintain a mini-
mum distance of 7 ft (2 m) to other objects, e.g. parked vehicles. # Carry out regeneration only on concrete or asphalt surfaces. # Do not carry out regeneration in the immediate vicinity of people. # Carry out regeneration in the open air and not in closed halls or rooms. # Make sure that there are no flammable materials or objects in the area of the exhaust system.
Regeneration without interruption takes approx. 2025 minutes. If the vehicle is predominantly used for short dis- tance driving or extended non-operational times, this could lead to a malfunction in the automatic cleaning function for the diesel particulate filter. As a result, permanent blocking of the diesel par- ticulate filter may occur. and fuel may also accu- mulate in the engine oil and cause engine failure. If you mainly drive short distances, you should drive on a freeway or go for a country drive for 20 minutes every 500 km (300 miles). This facili- tates the diesel particulate filter's burn-off proc- ess.
Starting and canceling regeneration
Requirements: R All system conditions are fulfilled. R The load condition of the diesel particulate fil-
ter is at least 100%.
Driving and parking 119
R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is running. R If the vehicle has a transmission-mounted
power take-off, the latter is deactivated. R If the vehicle has a parameterizable special
module, the rpm request is deactivated.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Particle Filter # To request regeneration: select OK. # To observe the vehicle surroundings: Make
sure that no injuries or damage due to the hot exhaust gases can occur in the vehicle sur- roundings. Confirm for three seconds with OK. Regeneration starts. The engine speed increa- ses and the message Regeneration Active appears.
% The duration of regeneration depends on the load condition of the diesel particulate filter (approx. 2025 minutes). After successful regeneration, the engine speed is reduced again.
# To cancel regeneration: switch off the engine or depress the clutch (for manual transmission) or brake (for automatic trans- mission). Regeneration is canceled.
Regeneration cannot be requested again until the load condition of the diesel particulate filter is at least 100%.
Displaying the load On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Consumption Info The load of the diesel particulate filter is dis- played.
Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board com-
puter(/ page 173)
Battery main switch Notes on the battery main switch
* NOTE Damage to the electrical system If you remove the battery main switch, it could lead to the electrical system becoming damaged. # Make sure that the ignition is switched
off and that at least 20 minutes have passed before removing the battery main switch. Otherwise, electrical sys- tem components could be damaged.
You can use the battery main switch to discon- nect the current to all your vehicle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrolled battery discharge caused by quiescent current consumers. If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary bat- tery in the engine compartment or in the base of the co-driver seat, you must disconnect both bat- teries. Only then is the electrical system fully dis- connected from the power supply. % Only disconnect the vehicle from the power
supply using the battery main switch in the following situations: R The vehicle is stationary for a long time R It is absolutely necessary to disconnect
the vehicle from the power supply After switching on the power supply, you will need to reset the side windows (/ page 60) and the electric sliding door (/ page 56).
Load display at 75% load # To exit the display: press the back button on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
120 Driving and parking
Switching the power supply on/off Switching off the power supply
Battery main switch % Note the remaining time before the next
service due date (/ page 210)and oil change (/ page 213). The time recording is also disrupted if the power supply is discon- nected. # Switch off the ignition and wait at least 15 minutes. # Remove cover 1. To do this, take hold of the cover at the upper edge, move it outwards in the direction of the driver's door and lift it off. # Press and hold button 3. # Pull plug 2 out of the earth pin. # Push plug 2 as far as possible in the direc- tion of the arrow so that it cannot make con- tact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are disconnec- ted from the power supply. Switching on the power supply # Press plug 2 onto the earth pin until you feel it engage and plug 2 is in full contact with the earth pin. All starter battery consumers are reconnec- ted to the power supply. # Fasten cover 1. To do this, place the cover on from above. # Press the cover into the neighboring switch- ing console on the right hand side.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf-
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi- tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand- still, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
You use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position appears in the multifunction display (/ page 174). The shifting characteristics of the automatic transmission is designed for comfortable and economical driving. For this reason, the multi-
function display shows, in addition to the trans- mission position display, the A for Comfort.
Driving and parking 121 # Before parking the vehicle, apply the
parking brake.
j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position Engaging reverse gear R
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. Transmission position display k is shown in the multifunction display.
Selecting neutral N & WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when neutral position is engaged If you park the vehicle with the transmission in neutral position i and the parking brake is not engaged, the vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of accident and injury.
# Press the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards or downwards to the first point of resistance. Transmission position display i is shown in the multifunction display.
Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, for example, to push it or tow it.
If the automatic transmission should also stay in neutral i when the ignition is switched off, carry out the following: # Start the vehicle. # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch off the ignition. % if you then leave the vehicle and the key is
still in the vehicle, the automatic transmis- sion will stay in neutral i from then on.
122 Driving and parking Engaging park position P
The automatic transmission shifts through the individual gears automatically when it is in trans- mission position h. This is determined by the following factors: R position of the accelerator pedal R driving speed
Restricting the shift range Requirements: R Transmission position h is engaged
(/ page 122).
# Press button 1. Transmission position display j is shown in the multifunction display.
Park position j is engaged automatically when one of the following conditions is met: R you switch off the engine in transmission
position h or k. R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary or when driving at a very low speed and in transmission position h or k. Engaging drive position D
# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever downwards past the first point of resistance. Transmission position display h is shown in the multifunction display.
# To restrict the shift range: briefly pull steer- ing wheel gearshift paddle 1. The automatic transmission shifts to the next lower gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. The shift range is also restricted. The shift range selected is shown in the multi- function display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear.
# Pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. The automatic transmission will change to a shift range which allows easy acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission shifts down one or more gears and restricts the shift range. The shift range selected is shown in the multi- function display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear.
% The automatic transmission does not shift down if you pull steering wheel gearshift pad- dle 1 whilst traveling at too high a speed.
Driving and parking 123
For vehicle with engine OM642, OM651: the automatic transmission does not shift up if the shift range is restricted and the maxi- mum engine speed of the restricted shift range has been reached. For vehicles with engine M274: if the maxi- mum engine speed for the restricted shift range is reached and you continue to depress the accelerator pedal, the automatic trans- mission will shift up automatically. # To de-restrict the shift range: briefly pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. The automatic transmission shifts to the next gear up, depending on the gear currently engaged. This de-restricts the shift range at the same time. The shift range selected is shown in the multi- function display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. # To de-restrict the shift range: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. or # Engage transmission position h again (/ page 122). The automatic transmission shifts up one or more gears depending on the gear currently engaged. Simultaneously, the shift range restriction is deactivated and the transmis- sion position appears in the multifunction dis- play h. Recommended shift ranges for the following driv- ing conditions: 3 Use the engine's braking effect. 2 Use the engine's braking effect on downhill gradients and when driving on steep roads, in mountainous areas as well as under ardu- ous operating conditions. 1 Use the engine's braking effect on extremely steep downhill gradients and on long down- hill stretches.
Using kickdown
# For maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
# Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.
All-wheel drive Notes on all-wheel drive
All-wheel drive ensures permanent drive for all four wheels, and together with ESP® it improves the traction of the vehicle. The traction control of the all-wheel drive also takes place via the brake system. Therefore, the brake system can overheat during extreme offroad use. In this case, ease off the accelerator pedal or stop to allow the brake system to cool down. If a driven wheel spins due to insufficient trac- tion, observe the following notes: R When pulling away, make use of the traction
control integrated in ESP®. Depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. R Take your foot off the accelerator pedal, slowly, while the vehicle is in motion.
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and, if necessary, snow chains (/ page 241). Only in this way can the maximum effect of all-wheel drive be achieved. Use DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) when driv- ing downhill off-road (/ page 149). If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the all-wheel drive system can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. The all-wheel drive system can- not take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. The all-wheel drive system is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
* NOTE Risk of damage to the drivetrain and the brake system
If you operate vehicles with all-wheel drive on a one-axle test stand, you may damage the drivetrain or the brake system. # A function or performance test should
only be carried out on a two-axle test stand. # If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a test stand, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance.
124 Driving and parking
* NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case
If you tow the vehicle with a raised axle, the transfer case can get damaged. Such damage is not covered by Freightliner Sprinter Limited Warranty. # Never tow the vehicle with a raised axle. # Only tow the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground or fully raised. # Note the instructions on towing the
vehicle with full contact with the ground for all wheels.
# Do not step on the accelerator pedal when the indicator lamp in the switch for the all-wheel drive is flashing.
Engaging all-wheel drive
Conditions for engaging/disengaging You can engage and deactivate the all-wheel drive when stationary or while driving slowly. When stationary, the following must be observed: R The engine is running. R The steering wheel in the straight-ahead posi-
tion. If the all-wheel drive cannot be engaged when stationary: # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the selector lever from i to h from h to i from i to k and back to i. Engaging and disengaging the all-wheel drive can be made easier in this way. Observe the following when driving slowly: R The engine is running. R The vehicle is not traveling faster than 6.2 mph (10 km/h). R The vehicle is not being driven around a bend. If it is not possible to engage all-wheel drive when the vehicle is rolling: # Vehicles with automatic transmission: briefly move the selector lever to i.
Engaging/disengaging all-wheel drive
* NOTE Risk of damage to the transfer case
If you step on the accelerator pedal while the all-wheel drive is engaged or disengaged, the transfer case may be damaged.
# To engage/disengage: press the upper sec- tion of switch 1. The indicator lamp in switch 1 flashes while the all-wheel drive is engaged or disengaged. The ÷ and : warning lamps light up in the instrument display. ESP® and ASR are deactivated for the duration of the shift oper- ation. If the shift operation is successful, the ÷ and : warning lamps in the instru- ment display go out and ESP® and ASR are reactivated.
As long as the indicator lamp in switch 1 is flashing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing switch 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the indicator lamp in switch 1 briefly flashes three times. One of the shift conditions was not met. If the indicator lamp in switch 1 lights up, allwheel drive is engaged. A relevant message appears in the display of the on-board computer. % If the LOW RANGE gear reduction is engaged,
the all-wheel drive cannot be disengaged.
Function of the LOW RANGE gear reduction The LOW RANGE gear reduction enables very slow driving in the respective gears. If you engage LOW RANGE, the engine's performance charac- teristics and the automatic transmission's shift- ing characteristics are adjusted accordingly. The transmission ratio from the engine to the wheels is around 40% lower than in the road position. The drive torque is increased correspondingly.
Driving and parking 125
Conditions for engaging/disengaging The following shifting conditions must be met in order to engage or disengage LOW RANGE: R All-wheel drive is engaged (/ page 124). R The engine is running. R The vehicle is stationary. R You depress the brake pedal. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
selector lever is in position j or i. Engaging and disengaging LOW range
1 Engaging and disengaging LOW range % On vehicles with DSR (Downhill Speed Regu-
lation), switch 1 is replaced with the switch for DSR. # To engage and disengage: press the upper section of switch 1. The + indicator lamp flashes in the instru- ment display for the duration of the shift operation. R When the shift operation takes place and
LOW RANGE is engaged, the + indica- tor lamp lights up. R When the shift operation takes place and LOW RANGE is disengaged, the + indi- cator lamp goes out. As long as the indicator lamp + is flashing, you can cancel the shift operation by pressing button 1 again. If the shift operation fails, the indicator lamp + briefly flashes three times. One of the shift conditions was not met.
Electronic level control Function of ENR (electronic level control)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi- cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tires or underneath the vehicle. # Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to tipping over of the jack
When you park a vehicle with air suspension, the air suspension can remain activated for up to one hour even if the ignition is switched off. If you then lift the vehicle with the jack, the air suspension tries to compensate for the vehicle level. The jack can tip over. # Before lifting the vehicle, press the
Service button on the air suspension remote control. This prevents automatic adjustment of the vehicle level and manual raising or lowering.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to low- ered or raised chassis frame
If the chassis frame is adjusted, the braking and driving characteristics can be severely impaired. You could also exceed the permissi- ble vehicle height. # Adjust the driving level before driving
off.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a mal- function of electronic level control
The vehicle level may be too high, too low or asymmetrical. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehicle may be noticeably different. # Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
126 Driving and parking
# Stop, paying attention to road and traf- fic conditions.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Risk of damage to the chassis from lowered vehicle level
If electronic level control is malfunctioning or readjusts while you are driving, the vehicle level may be lowered. # Pay attention to the road conditions and
ensure there is sufficient ground clear- ance. # Drive carefully.
The level of the vehicle depends on vehicle load and the load distribution. Electronic level control adjusts the level of the rear axle automatically on vehicles with an air-sprung rear axle. The vehicle level is thereby always maintained at the driving level, regardless of vehicle load. Driving dynamics remain unaffected. The height difference between the sides of the vehicle may be up to 0.4 in (1 cm). Electronic level control is not engine-dependent and is only operational when the ignition is switched on. The electronic level control com- pressor works audibly. % If the compressor works constantly or starts
up several times per minute, electronic level control is malfunctioning. Depending on the vehicle equipment, electronic level control switches between manual and auto- matic mode depending on either the vehicle speed or the position of the parking brake. If electronic level control switches depending on vehicle speed, manual operation is automatically activated when the vehicle is stationary. You may raise or lower the vehicle level. If you subse- quently drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), man- ual mode is automatically deactivated and auto- matic mode sets the vehicle level. If electronic level control switches depending on the parking brake position, manual mode is auto- matically activated when the parking brake is applied. You may raise or lower the vehicle level to load and unload. If you release the parking brake, manual mode is automatically deactivated and automatic mode sets the driving level. When working on the vehicle or changing a wheel, you can deactivate electronic level control (/ page 126).
If electronic level control is malfunctioning or the vehicle level is too high or too low, an audible sig- nal sounds. The driving and steering characteristics of the vehicle will be noticeably different. Electronic level control adjusts the vehicle level to the nor- mal level as soon as possible. Continue driving carefully until the audible signal stops. Only then is the vehicle at normal level. Automatic mode and electronic level control automatically switch on again to restore the vehi- cle level, depending on the option selected: R When the parking brake is released R From speeds of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) If the electronic level control compressor threat- ens to overheat, e.g. due to repeated raising or lowering within a short period, electronic level control is deactivated. You can raise or lower the vehicle level again after a few minutes.
Raising and lowering the vehicle level
Certain special equipment enables other operation options: R Ambulance: raising the vehicle level above
the driving level (center position) is not possi- ble. Only the lowest position and the driving level can be set. R Speed signal: in order to operate electronic level control, the parking brake must not be applied. Electronic level control can be oper- ated manually up to 6.2 mph (10 km/h). If this speed is exceeded, driving level will be set automatically. R 30-minute run-on module: electronic level control can be operated up to 30 minutes after switching off the ignition. Using the remote control The remote control is located in a holder on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Remove the remote control from the holder before use.
Driving and parking 127
Electronic level control starts automatically if the ignition is switched on. Operation is only possible after the parking brake has been applied. Electronic level control performs a self-check reg- ularly when it is activated and while in use. Indi- cator lamp 7 on the remote control lights up for about one second when you switch on the igni- tion. There is a malfunction if indicator lamp 7 behaves in the following ways: R The indicator lamp does not light up when you
switch on the ignition or R The indicator lamp then lights up again or flashes
In addition, a warning tone is emitted from the remote control for approximately 30 seconds. The malfunction that has been detected can be shown using the indicator lamps (signaling of malfunction codes). # Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched
on. # Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press
and hold button 4 or 5 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. The indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 4 or 5 lights up. # To lower automatically: briefly press button 5. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position
The indicator lamp on button 5 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed.
When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 5 lights up.
% By pressing button 4 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To raise automatically: briefly press button 4. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position
The indicator lamp on button 4 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indi- cator lamp on button 4 lights up.
% By pressing button 5 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To raise or lower automatically to driving level (center position): press and hold but- ton 6. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to driving level.
# To save the set vehicle level: set the required vehicle level.
# Press and hold button 1 or 2 until you hear a tone. The vehicle level set has been saved on corre- sponding button 1 or 2.
# To call up the saved vehicle level: briefly press button 1 or 2. Electronic level control automatically raises or lowers the vehicle to the saved driving level. The indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 flashes as long as the vehicle level is being changed. When the vehicle level has been set, the indicator lamp on button 1 or 2 lights up.
% Service mode may only be activated or deac- tivated at a qualified specialist workshop by trained personnel. In service mode, the air suspension system is deactivated for mainte- nance or error detection.
# To activate service mode: press button 3. Service mode is active and the indicator lamp in button 3 lights up continuously.
# To deactivate service mode: press button 3. Service mode is deactivated and the indicator lamp in button 3 goes out.
128 Driving and parking
# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.
Using the button in the switch panel
Using the button in the rear compartment
# Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched on.
# Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press
and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. # To lower automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position
% By pressing button 1 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To raise automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position
% By pressing button 2 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.
# Park the vehicle, leaving the ignition switched on.
# Apply the parking brake. # To raise or lower the vehicle level: press
and hold button 1 or 2 until the vehicle level reaches the required height. # To lower automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 2. Electronic level control automatically lowers the vehicle to the next lower position: R From the highest position to driving level R From driving level to the lowest position
% By pressing button 1 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To raise automatically: briefly press the lower section of switch 1. Electronic level control automatically raises the vehicle to the next higher position: R From the lowest position to driving level R From driving level to the highest position
% By pressing button 2 during the movement, the original position will be reset.
# To switch on automatic mode: drive at over 6.2 mph (10 km/h) or release the parking brake. Electronic level control controls the vehicle level automatically.
Driving and parking 129
Using electronic level control for charging with air in an emergency
* NOTE Damage due to pressure being too high
If the pressure in the air suspension bellows is too high, the compressed-air lines or the air suspension bellows may be damaged. # Ensure you observe the maximum per-
missible operating pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi).
Only for vehicles with valves for electronic level control emergency charging. If electronic level control is malfunctioning and the vehicle is lean- ing, you can raise or lower the vehicle by con- necting an external compressed-air source to one of the emergency valves (similarly as with tire valve). If electronic level control is not opera- tional, you can drive on carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the mal- function remedied.
# Disconnect the external compressed-air source.
# Tighten the valve cap on the valve (1 L = left, 2 R = right).
# Drive on carefully to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
# Apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j. # Switch off the engine. # Turn the valve cap of the corresponding valve
(1 L = left, 2 R = right). # Stand to the side of the vehicle when con-
necting the external compressed-air source. # Raise or lower the vehicle level by charging or
releasing compressed air until the driving level has been reached and the vehicle is in a horizontal position. While doing so, ensure you observe the maximum permissible oper- ating pressure of 900 kPa (9 bar/130 psi).
130 Driving and parking
Problems with the electronic level control
Problem You cannot raise or lower the vehicle level when stationary.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The compressor is in danger of overheating. After repeatedly raising and lowering the vehicle, electronic level control (play protection) is deactiva- ted. # Try to set the vehicle level manually again after approximately
one minute.
Electric level control has been deactivated due to undervoltage. The bat- tery may not be charging. Handling and ride comfort may suffer. # Start the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Refueling Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture Vehicles with a diesel engine: While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning. # Never refuel using gasoline. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Driving and parking 131
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
* NOTE Do not use gasoline to refuel vehi- cles with a diesel engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise,
fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
* NOTE Damage to painted surfaces due to fuel
# Do not spill any fuel on painted surfa- ces.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper handling of fuel If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a danger to persons and the environment. # Do not allow fuels to run into the sew-
age system, the surface waters, the ground water or into the ground.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked R The auxiliary heating is deactivated
R The ignition is switched off R The front left-hand door is open % Do not get back into the vehicle during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap % The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-hand
door when viewed in the direction of travel. The position of the fuel filler cap æ is also shown in the Instrument Display. The arrow on the filling pump specifies the side of the vehicle. # Open fuel filler flap 1. # Turn fuel filler cap 2 counter-clockwise and remove it. # Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vapors from entering the vehicle interior. # Completely slide the filler neck of the pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. # Fill the fuel tank only until the pump nozzle switches off. # Replace fuel filler cap 2 and turn it clock- wise. You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully. # Open the front left-hand door. # Close fuel filler flap 1.
132 Driving and parking
% Vehicles with a diesel engine and incor- rect fueling protector against refueling with gasoline: the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps for passenger vehicles.
% Vehicles with a diesel engine without an incorrect fueling protector: refueling pre- ferred at diesel filling pumps for passenger vehicles. However, you can also refuel at a diesel filling pump for trucks.
% If the fuel tank has been run completely dry, add at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of fuel.
% Vehicles that can use a mixture of fuels can be recognized by the sticker "Ethanol up to E85!" on the fuel filler flap.
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.
The engine does not start.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. # Apply the parking brake. # Switch off the engine. # Remove the key from the ignition lock. Or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO: # Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics are in position g. This corresponds to the "key removed". # Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel tank has been run completely dry. # Refuel the vehicle with at least 1.3 gal (5 l) of fuel. # Switch the ignition on for approximately ten seconds. # Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start: # Switch the ignition on for approximately ten seconds. # Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it
runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving and parking 133
DEF
Notes on DEF
* NOTE Irritation to skin, eyes and respira- tory tract due to DEF
DEF can cause irritation if inhaled or inges- ted, or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin. When the tank is open, ammonia vapor can escape. # Do not inhale or ingest DEF. # Make sure DEF does not come into con-
tact with your skin, eyes or clothing. # Keep DEF away from children. # Only fill the DEF tank in well-ventilated
areas. If a person comes into contact with DEF, observe the following: R If you have ingested DEF, drink plenty of
water and seek medical attention immedi- ately. R If DEF has come into contact with your eyes, rinse them for 15 minutes, also beneath the eyelids. R Immediately rinse DEF off your skin with soap and water.
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused by impurities in DEF
Impurities in DEF result in the following: R Higher emission values R Damage to the catalytic converter R Engine damage R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas
aftertreatment system
# Avoid impurities in DEF.
* NOTE Soiling due to crystallized DEF res- idue
DEF residue crystallizes after some time. # When refilling DEF, immediately rinse
any surfaces that it comes into contact with and remove all DEF residue. # DEF can also be removed with a damp cloth and cold water. # If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Soiling with
DEF
DEF residue crystallizes after some time and stain the affected surfaces. # Immediately rinse surfaces that come in
contact with DEF when filling with water or remove DEF with a damp cloth and cold water.
If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water.
DEF is a liquid urea solution used for exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. DEF has the following properties: R Non-toxic R Colorless and odorless R Non-flammable
DEF availability: R You can have DEF refilled by fast service at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g a Freight- liner Sprinter service center R DEF is available at numerous gas stations via DEF filling pumps. R Alternatively, DEF is available at qualified spe- cialist workshops, e.g. a Freightliner Sprinter service center, and at numerous gas stations as a DEF refill canister or DEF refill bottle
% DEF freezes at a temperature of approx- imately 12.2 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is equip- ped with a DEF preheating system at the fac- tory. This means that winter operation is also ensured for temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C). If you refill DEF at temperatures below 12.2 °F (-11 °C), the DEF level in the instrument cluster may not be displayed cor- rectly. If the DEF is frozen, drive for at least 20 minutes and then park the vehicle for a minimum of 30 seconds, so that the level is correctly displayed. In extreme winter condi- tions, the time needed to detect the amount topped up may be considerably longer. Park the vehicle in a warm garage to speed up this process.
% Ensure the connection between the refill con- tainer and vehicle filler neck does not drip.
134 Driving and parking
Calling up the DEF level gauge On-board computer: 4 Service # Select DEF and confirm.
The DEF level and the DEF range appear.
Instrument Display with color display 1 DEF level
Instrument Display with black and white dis- play 1 DEF level Refilling DEF * NOTE Engine damage due to DEF being
in the fuel # DEF must not be used to fill the fuel
tank. # Only use DEF to fill the DEF tank. # Do not overfill the DEF tank. * NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte-
rior due to DEF leakage # After adding, carefully close the DEF
refill container. # Avoid carrying DEF refill containers per-
manently in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.
The following messages that appear in succes- sion in the multifunction display indicate that you need to refill the DEF tank:
R Refill Additive See Operator's Manual The DEF level has fallen below the first warn- ing threshold.
R Refill Additive (DEF) Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Manual The DEF level has fallen into the reserve range. After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx- imately 1,200 mi (1,900 km) and you can start the engine a further 16 times. The num- ber of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the engine is started.
R Refill Additive Emer. Op.: Max. XXX mph See Operator's Manual You can only drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Refill quantity:
With a prompt in the display
at least 8 l
Without a prompt in the display at least 2 l
You can also have the DEF level displayed (/ page 134). Opening the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable
# Open the hood.
Driving and parking 135
# Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
Opening the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps
Preparing the DEF refill canister
Variant 1
# Open the hood. # Take tool 4 for unlocking DEF filler cap 1
from the vehicle tool kit. # Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up, turn
90° and release it. # Insert tool 4 in holes 2 of DEF filler cap
1. # Turn DEF filler cap 1 counter-clockwise and
remove it.
Variant 2
# Unscrew the cap on DEF refill canister 1. # Screw disposable hose 2 onto the opening
of DEF refill canister 1 until hand-tight.
136 Driving and parking Refilling DEF
DEF refill bottle Only screw the DEF refill bottle hand-tight onto the filler opening in the engine compartment. It may otherwise be damaged.
Variant 1
DEF refill bottles 1 can be obtained at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill bottles without a threaded cap offer no overfill protection. DEF may leak out as a result of overfilling. Mercedes-Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded cap. These are available at any Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Variant 2
# Screw on hand-tight (variant 1) or insert (var- iant 2) disposable hose 2 into the filler neck of the vehicle.
# Lift up and tip DEF refill canister 1. The filling process stops when the DEF tank is completely full. DEF refill canister 1 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.
# Unscrew disposable hose 2 and close DEF and refill canister 1 in reverse order.
# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. # Start the vehicle. % Avoid storing DEF containers permanently in
the vehicle.
# Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle 1.
# Place DEF refill bottle 1 as shown on filler opening 2 and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.
# Press DEF refill bottle 1 towards filler open- ing 2. The DEF tank is filled. This could take up to one minute.
Driving and parking 137
% When the DEF refill bottle is no longer pressed down, filling stops. The bottle can be removed when it has been only partially emp- tied.
# Let go of DEF refill bottle 1. # Turn DEF refill bottle 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it. # Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot-
tle 1 again.
Filling procedure with the pump nozzle of an DEF filling pump # Insert the pump nozzle into the filler neck and
add DEF. When doing so, do not overfill the DEF tank. You can also use a DEF filling pump for trucks.
Closing the DEF filler cap on filler caps that are not lockable
Closing the DEF filler cap on lockable filler caps
# After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise.
# Turn the DEF filler cap until the lettering is legible and horizontal. The filler neck is only locked correctly when this is the case.
# Close the hood.
# After filling the DEF tank, place DEF filler cap 1 on the filler neck and tighten it clockwise.
# Remove tool 4 from DEF filler cap 1 and store it in the vehicle tool kit.
# Pull cover 3 on DEF filler cap 1 up over holes 2 of DEF filler cap 1, turn and release.
# Turn DEF filler cap 1. If DEF filler cap 1 turns freely, the DEF tank is closed.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass- land or harvested grain fields.
138 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the drive- train due to rolling away
# Always park your vehicle safely and according to legal requirements.
# Always properly secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Observe the following points to ensure that the vehicle is properly secured against rolling away unintentionally. # Always apply the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
engage transmission position j. # On uphill or downhill inclines: secure the
rear axle with a chock or an object without sharp edges. % You can operate the side windows for five minutes after you have switched off the vehi- cle.
Manual parking brake Applying/releasing the handbrake lever
& WARNING Risk of skidding or an acci- dent by braking with the parking brake
If you have to brake your vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is consid- erably longer and the wheels may lock. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or acci- dent. # Only brake the vehicle with the parking
brake if the service brake has failed. # In this case, do not apply the parking
brake with too much force. # If the wheels lock, immediately release
the parking brake as much as required for the wheels to turn again.
& WARNING Risk of fire and an accident if the parking brake is not released
If the parking brake is not fully released when driving, the following situations can occur: R The parking brake can overheat and cause
a fire R The parking brake can lose its holding
function # Completely release the parking brake
before driving off.
The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake.
Generally, you may only apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stationary.
Driving and parking 139
# To apply the parking brake: pull handbrake lever 1 up as far as the last possible detent. When the engine is running, the F and ! indicator lamps in the Instrument Display light up. If the vehicle is in motion, a warning tone sounds.
% In vehicles with a folding handbrake lever, you can then press handbrake lever 1 down as far as it will go.
# To release the parking brake: on vehicles with a folding handbrake lever, first pull hand- brake lever 1 up as far as it will go.
# Guide handbrake lever 1 down to as far as it will go. The F and ! indicator lamps in the Instrument Display go out.
Folding the handbrake lever up or down (only in vehicles with a folding handbrake lever) Requirements: R The handbrake lever is applied. # To fold down the handbrake lever: push the
handbrake lever down as far as it will go. # To raise the handbrake lever: pull the hand-
brake lever up as far as it will go. Performing emergency braking with the hand- brake lever
If, in exceptional cases, the service brake fails, you may use the parking brake to perform emer- gency braking. # Emergency braking: press and hold release
button 2 and carefully pull brake lever 1.
Electric parking brake
Information on the electric parking brake
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children.
For the automatic functions to work correctly, the driver must be seated in the correct seat position (/ page 66). The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board electrical system volt- age. If the on-board electrical system voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the electric parking brake and the yellow ! indicator lamp lights up. In this case, park the vehicle in the following way: R Park the vehicle on level ground and secure it
to prevent it from rolling away. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j.
% The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red F and ! indica- tor lamps light up continuously.
It may not be possible to release a parking brake if the on-board electrical system voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Inform a qualified specialist workshop.
140 Driving and parking
When the engine is switched off, the electric parking brake carries out a function test at regu- lar intervals. Noises are normal in this process. Automatically applying the electric parking brake Vehicles with automatic transmission: The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position j. In addition, at least one of the following condi- tions must be fulfilled: R the engine is switched off R the driver is not sitting in the driver's seat R the belt buckle is undone
To prevent the electric parking brake from apply- ing automatically, pull switch 1. The electric parking brake is also automatically applied if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has brought the vehicle to a standstill. In addition, at least one of the following condi- tions must be fulfilled: R the engine is switched off R the driver is not sitting in the driver's seat R the belt buckle is undone R there is a system malfunction R the power supply is insufficient R the vehicle is stationary for a long time The red F and ! indicator lamps in the Instrument Display light up. The electric parking brake is only actually applied when the red F and ! indicator lamps light up continuously. Releasing the electric parking brake automat- ically Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released when all of the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver is sitting in the driver's seat. R The driver is belted. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator. or You switch from transmission position j to position h or k. You must also depress the accelerator if traveling on steep uphill gradi- ents. R If the transmission is in position k, the rearend doors must be closed.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children and animals left unatten- ded in the vehicle
If you leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake R Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position j. R Starting the engine
They could also operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. # Never leave children and animals unat-
tended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
# To apply: press the ! switch when the vehicle is stationary. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F and ! indicator lamps in the instrument display light up. The electric park- ing brake is only actually applied when the red F and ! indicator lamps light up continuously. It is also possible to apply the electric parking brake when the ignition is switched off.
# To release: pull the ! switch. The red F and ! indicator lamps in the instrument display go out.
Driving and parking 141
You may only release the electric parking brake if the ignition is switched on with the start/stop button.
Emergency braking
In the event of an emergency, you can brake the vehicle while it is in motion with the electric park- ing brake. # While driving, press the ! switch of the
electric parking brake. The vehicle is braked as long as you keep the ! switch of the electric parking brake depressed. The vehicle's brake lights light up. The longer the ! switch of the electric parking brake is depressed, the greater the braking force. During the braking procedure, you will receive the following feedback from the vehicle: R A warning tone sounds. R The Release Parking Brake message appears in the multifunction display. R The red F and ! indicator lamps flash in the multifunction display.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied.
Parking the vehicle for an extended period
* NOTE Starter battery damage due to leaving the vehicle standing idle for extended periods of time
If the vehicle is not moved for a prolonged period, quiescent current can lead to exces- sive discharge of the starter battery and cause battery damage. # Charge the starter battery if the voltage
is below 12.2 V, for example by driving a considerable distance. # Charge the starter battery every six months, even if it has been disconnec- ted or is in standby mode. # Check the charge level every four weeks if no trickle charger is being used. # If possible, connect a trickle charger to the jump-start connection point. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery or if you have any questions.
Parking the vehicle for over four weeks # Method 1: connect the batteries to a trickle
charger via the jump-start connection. # Method 2: interrupt the power supply by acti-
vating standby mode (/ page 141). # Method 3: disconnect all batteries. For this,
please contact a qualified specialist work- shop.
Standby mode
Activating or deactivating standby mode
Requirements: R The engine is switched off.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-opera- tion. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup-
ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is unavaila-
ble. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away
alarm functions are not available.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience, for example it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. Charge the starter battery first in the following situations: R In order to extend the vehicle's non-opera-
tional time. R If the "Battery charge insufficient for standby
mode" message appears in the media display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
142 Driving and parking
On-board computer: 4 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Ruhezustand (Standby) # To activate/deactivate: selectYes or No. % If the options are grayed out, the charge level
of the battery is not sufficient for standby mode.
Driving and driving safety systems Notes on driving systems and your responsi- bility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu- vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. These cannot replace your attention to the surroundings and do not release you from your responsibility under road traffic law. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in lane. Always pay attention to the traffic and intervene if necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these sys- tems. If you fail to adapt your driving style, the driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. The road and weather conditions as well as the traffic situation cannot always be taken into account.
Information about sensors
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grill. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush (/ page 220). The sen- sors must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or stickers. After a colli- sion, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop as damage (both visible or non-visible) may have occurred to the bumper or radiator trim.
Function of driving systems and driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety sys- tems: R ABS (Anti-lock braking system)
(/ page 142) R ASR (acceleration skid control) (/ page 143) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 143) R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 143) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 145) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 145) R Cruise control (/ page 147) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 150) R Hill start assist (/ page 153) R HOLD function (/ page 153) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 154) R Rear view camera (/ page 155) R Surround view camera (/ page 157) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 159) R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 161) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 164)
Functions of ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Observe the important safety guidelines for the driving safety system.
Certain driving and driving safety systems use sensors 1 to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment).
Driving and parking 143
ABS controls the brake pressure in critical situa- tions: R The wheels are prevented from locking when
braking, e.g. during maximum full-stop brak- ing or when there is insufficient tire traction R The steerability of the vehicle in terms of physical possibilities is ensured when braking R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). On a slippery road surface, ABS intervenes even if you only brake gently.
System limits If there is a malfunction and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously in the instru- ment display after starting the engine, ABS may be impaired or inoperative. If ABS intervenes, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal may be an indication of hazardous road conditions and func- tions as a reminder to take extra care while driv- ing. If ABS intervenes: keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the braking situation has passed. To carry out maximum full-stop braking: depress the brake pedal with full force.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys- tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. # Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supports you with additional braking force in an emergency braking situation. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the braking force of
the brakes R BAS can shorten the braking distance R ABS prevents the wheels from locking
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function as usual again. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics if the driver does not pay attention when pulling away or accelerat- ing. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather con- ditions. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deactivated for the duration of the activation/deactivation process. Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASR is malfunctioning, the ÷ indicator lamp lights up while the engine is running and the engine output may be reduced (/ page 26). ASR improves traction, i.e. the transfer of power from the tires to the road surface, for a sustained period and thereby, also improves the driving sta- bility of the vehicle. If the drive wheels start to spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and lim- its the engine torque. ASR thus significantly assists you when pulling away and accelerating, especially on wet or slippery roads. If traction on the road surface is not sufficient, even ASR will not allow you to pull away without difficulty. The type of tires and total weight of the vehicle as well as the gradient of the road also play a crucial role. If ASR intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp in the Instrument Display flashes.
Functions of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
144 Driving and parking
If the surface requires, temporarily deactivate ESP® when pulling away (/ page 144). Do not operate the vehicle on a roller dynamome- ter (e.g. for a performance test). If you have to operate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop beforehand. If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drive in a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be deactiva- ted for the duration of the activation/deactiva- tion process. If ESP® is malfunctioning or deactivated, the ÷ warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the engine output may be reduced (/ page 26). % Only use wheels with the recommended tire
size. Only then will ESP® function properly. ESP® can, within physical limits, monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the fol- lowing situations: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road
surfaces R When braking R If you are driving faster than 49.7 mph
(80 km/h) in strong crosswinds
If the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehi- cle by performing the following actions: R One or more wheels are braked R The drive system performance is adapted
depending on the situation
When ESP® is deactivated, the ÷ warning lamp in the Instrument Display lights up continu- ously: R Vehicle stabilization may be delayed R Crosswind Assist is still active R The drive wheels may start to spin R ASR traction control is no longer active
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® will still support you when braking. If the ÷ warning lamp in the Instrument Dis- play flashes, one or more tires have reached their tire traction limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
stances
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta- bility Program)
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 ESP % ESP® can only be activated and deactivated
via quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. Other- wise, you can find ESP® in the Assistance menu. # Select ESP. A prompt appears. # Select On or å Off.
If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up con- stantly in the instrument cluster, ESP® is deacti- vated. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may appear in the instru- ment cluster.
Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist
Crosswind Assist does not react under the follow- ing conditions: R The vehicle is subjected to severe jolts and
vibrations, e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes. R The vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or ice or when hydroplaning. R The driver is performing sudden and large steering movements.
Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon as the driving conditions return to normal. Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind gusts that can impair ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. Crosswind Assist intervenes depending on the direction and strength of the crosswind. A stabilizing brake application helps you to keep the vehicle on track. Information is shown in the instrument cluster in the event of a clearly discernible intervention by Crosswind Assist. Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight or slightly cornering.
Driving and parking 145
Function of ESP® trailer stabilization
& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilization cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. # Always adapt your driving style to suit
the current road and weather condi- tions.
ESP® trailer stabilization counteracts critical driv- ing situations in good time and thereby provides considerable assistance when driving with a trailer. Trailer stabilization is part of ESP®. If the sensor system and evaluation logic detect trailer swinging movements, ESP® trailer stabili- zation initially brakes individual vehicle wheels in a targeted manner. It thus counteracts swinging movements. If the swinging movements do not stop, the vehicle is braked until the vehicle/ trailer combination is stabilized. If necessary, the vehicle's engine output is limited. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combi- nation) starts to swerve, you are able to stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination only by braking. ESP® trailer stabilization helps you to stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination in this situation. ESP® trailer stabilization is active at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). If ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction, trailer stabilization will not function.
Function of EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) EBD has the following characteristics: R monitoring and controlling the braking force
on the rear wheels R improving driving stabilization when braking,
especially on bends
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func- tions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli- sion, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn- ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti- cal situations. If there are pedestrians and cyclists crossing: in especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the visual and acoustic warning occurs simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa- tion, or apply the brakes during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi- mum full-stop braking if necessary. Situationdependent braking assistance only intervenes when the brakes are applied firmly; otherwise, it remains within the autonomous braking process.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. Due to the nature of the system, complex driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene or not intervene without reason. In such cases, and in the event of Active Brake Assist malfunctioning, the brake system will continue to be available with full brake boost and BAS. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for keeping a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
146 Driving and parking
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec- essary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: Distance warning function The distance warning function warns you at speeds greater than approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the · distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi- ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warn- ing tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles travel- Stationary vehi- Crossing vehi-
ing in front
cles
cles
Crossing pedes- Stationary trians/cyclists pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h)
Up to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h)
No reaction
Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h)
No reaction
Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles travel- Stationary vehi- Crossing vehi-
ing in front
cles
cles
Crossing pedes- Stationary trians/cyclists pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h)
Up to approx. 124 mph (200 km/h)
No reaction
Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h)
No reaction
Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles travel- Stationary vehi- Crossing vehi-
ing in front
cles
cles
Crossing pedes- Stationary trians/cyclists pedestrians
Up to approx. 155 mph (250 km/h)
Up to approx. 50 mph (80 km/h)
No reaction
Up to approx. 37 mph (60 km/h)
No reaction
Driving and parking 147
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with
kickdown. R Fully releasing the brake pedal (only during
situation-dependent braking assistance).
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica- tion when one of the following conditions is fulfil- led: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors are affected by snow, rain, fog or
heavy spray. R The sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered. R The sensors are affected by interference from
other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflec- tions in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. R Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off.
The system may not react correctly in the follow- ing situations: R In complex traffic situations, objects may not
always be clearly detected. R Pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the
detection range of the sensors. R Pedestrians are obscured by other objects. R In bends with a narrow radius.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist The following settings are available: R Early R Medium R Late R Off
% It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is always left activated.
# Select a setting.
The last active setting is selected automatically every time the engine is started. Exception: if the last setting was Off, the Medium setting will be automatically activated the next time the engine is started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that Active Brake Assist is
always left activated. # Select Off.
The distance warning function and autono- mous braking function are deactivated.
The next time the engine is started, the Medium setting is automatically activated. % When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the status area of the multifunction display.
Cruise control
Function of cruise control Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehicle automatically in order to maintain a previously stored speed. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond- ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed above 15 mph (20 km/h). If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
148 Driving and parking
override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Displays in the multifunction display The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display.
Operating cruise control
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but may not intervene. R The driving speed is at least 15 mph
(20 km/h).
Display in the Instrument Display (color display) 1 Cruise control is selected 2 Set speed gray: speed is stored, cruise con-
trol is deactivated 3 Set speed green: speed is stored, cruise con-
trol is activated
System limitations Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. On long and steep downhill gradients, you should change down to a lower gear in good time. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehi- cle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa- tions: R In traffic situations where frequent speed
changes are required, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.
# To activate cruise control: push rocker switch 1 up.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is then saved and main- tained by the vehicle.
# Push rocker switch 1 up. # To increase/reduce speed: push rocker
switch 2 up or down. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Press rocker switch 2 up or down and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. or # Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or
Driving and parking 149
# Push rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Push rocker switch 2 up. If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this appears in the instrument display: # To adopt the detected speed: push rocker
switch 3 up. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle main- tains this speed. # To deactivate cruise control: push rocker switch 3 (CNCL) down. If cruise control is deactivated, it can be reactiva- ted as follows: R rocker switch 2 (SET+) or (SET-) stores the current speed and the vehicle maintains this speed R rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the last speed stored and the vehicle maintains this speed
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter- venes, cruise control is deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared.
DSR automatically controls in the following situa- tions: R If the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is less
than 2 mph (4 km/h) , the speed is set to 2 mph (4 km/h) or it is set to the minimum speed for the respective gear range. R If you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) offroad, DSR switches to standby mode. DSR remains activated, but does not brake auto- matically. R If you drive downhill slower than 11 mph (18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ- ously set speed. R If you drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h), DSR switches off automatically.
Activating/deactivating DSR
Activating DSR
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Notes on DSR If you fail to adapt your driving style or you are inattentive, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weather and traffic conditions into account. DSR is only an aid. You are respon- sible especially for a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. DSR supports you when driving downhill. DSR maintains a set speed for you on downhill gradi- ents by applying the brakes as required. Main- taining the speed is dependent on the road sur- face conditions and the downhill gradient and cannot therefore be guaranteed in all situations. You can set the speed depending on the gear range to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelerator pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.
You can activate DSR when the vehicle is station- ary or moving. # Press the upper section of switch 1. # Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed between 2 mph (4 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). # Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored. When stationary, 2 mph (4 km/h) or the minimum possible speed for each gear range is stored. DSR maintains the stored speed on the downhill gradient and brakes automatically.
When DSR is activated and the vehicle pulls away, accelerates or brakes on an incline, the speed set corresponds to the speed at which the accelerator or brake pedal is released or the rocker switch is pressed during DSR regulation.
150 Driving and parking
This is only the case if you are not driving faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). DSR status display in the on-board computer R DSR is activated:
- DSR and the set speed appear in the sta- tus area of the on-board computer.
R DSR is activated, but is not intervening: - You are driving between 11 mph (18 km/h) and 28 mph (45 km/h). - DSR and the speed 11 mph (18 km/h) appear in the status area of the on-board computer. DSR is in standby mode.
R DSR is inactive: - You are exceeding a speed of 28 mph (45 km/h). - DSR appears in the status area of the onboard computer. In addition, the DSR Off message appears. - DSR - - - appears in the status area of the on-board computer.
Setting the speed while driving downhill You can set the speed to between 2 mph (4 km/h) and, depending on the gear range, up to 11 mph (18 km/h) using the brake and accelera- tor pedals or the rocker switch on the steering wheel.
# Press rocker switch 1 up or down during a DSR regulation. The last saved speed is increased or reduced.
# Release rocker switch 1. The current speed is stored.
or # Press rocker switch 1 up or down until
desired speed is reached. # Release rocker switch 1.
The current speed is stored. % It may be a moment before the vehicle starts
to brake to the set speed. Take this delay into account when setting the speed with rocker switch 1.
Deactivating DSR
# Brake or accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed on the downhill gradient.
# Release the brake or accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored.
or
# Press the upper section of switch 1. or # Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph
(45 km/h). DSR deactivates automatically in the following situations: R You drive faster than 28 mph (45 km/h). R There is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS
system.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. Speed and distance are set and stored on the
Driving and parking 151
steering wheel. The speed can be set in the range between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 99 mph (160 km/h) or between 15 mph (20 km/h) and the vehicle's maximum speed. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Depending on the preselected distance,
DISTRONIC intervenes either dynamically (short distance) or to save fuel (long dis- tance). R Depending on the vehicle mass detected, the dynamics of the DISTRONIC intervention are reduced. R Rapid acceleration to the stored speed is initi- ated if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R The radar sensors are affected by snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, glare, direct sunlight or greatly varying ambient light. R The radar sensors may malfunction in parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R On icy or slippery roads, braking or accelerat- ing can cause the drive wheels to lose trac- tion and the vehicle could then skid. R Stationary objects are not detected if these were not previously detected as moving. R On bends, target vehicles may be lost or not recognized correctly. As a result, a target vehicle is not used to regulate the speed which may lead to unwanted acceleration.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler- ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel- erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is con-
siderably faster or slower than the cur- rently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con- ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.
152 Driving and parking
# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles and vehicles driving on a different line. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The vehicle has been started. R The parking brake has been released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R The driver's and the co-driver door are closed. R The seat occupancy recognition on the driv-
er's seat has detected that the driver has fas- tened the seat belt. R The check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# Press button 1. # To activate without a stored speed: press
rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-). The current speed is then saved and main- tained by the vehicle. or # To activate with a stored speed: press rocker switch 4 up (RES). % If rocker switch 4 is pressed up twice, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa- ted with the speed restriction displayed in the instrument cluster.
Adopting the displayed limit speed when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active # Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The limit speed displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away again with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press rocker switch 4 up (RES). or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly with
force. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi- cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.
# Press rocker switch 4 down (CNCL). # Depress the brake pedal.
Increasing or reducing the speed # Push rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Press and hold rocker switch 3 up (SET+)/ down (SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. or # Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or
Driving and parking 153
# Push rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point and hold. The stored speed is increased or reduced in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
Increasing or reducing the specified distance from the vehicle in front # To increase the specified distance: press
rocker switch 2 down (Ò). # To reduce the specified distance: press
rocker switch 2 up (Ñ).
Information on Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions: R The parking brake has been released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function HOLD function Requirements: R The seat occupancy recognition on the driv-
er's seat has detected that the driver has fas- tened the seat belt. The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand- still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes or when waiting in traffic. When you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away, the braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function is deactiva- ted. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil- ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is running or it has been automati-
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop func- tion. R The driver is seated and belted. R The electric parking brake is released. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the selector lever is in position h, k or i. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva- ted.
Activating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle can roll away in the following situations: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function are activated, the vehicle brakes autonomously in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: # During towing # In a car wash
154 Driving and parking
# Make sure that the activation conditions are met.
# Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis- play appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.
% If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations: # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
depress the accelerator pedal when the auto- matic transmission is in position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal again with sufficient pressure until the ë display in the multi- function display goes out. # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. % Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission of your vehicle shifts to j after some time. This relieves the load on the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the auto- matic transmission automatically shifts to j in the following situations: R The driver leaves the driver's seat. R The driver's door is opened. R The engine is switched off without the ECO start/stop function.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park- ing assistance system with ultrasound. It moni- tors the area around your vehicle using six sen- sors on the front bumper and six sensors on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indi- cates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur- roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver- ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) to an obstacle. A continuous tone
sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m). You can set the warning tone in the mul- timedia system so that it will sound earlier at a greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) (/ page 155). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system is not active and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC appears in the multimedia system at speeds up to approx- imately 6 mph (10 km/h). System limitations Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-
sons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth- erwise be damaged.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select PARKTRONIC On.
The function is activated or deactivated depending on the previous setting.
Driving and parking 155
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when starting the vehicle.
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking 5 Set Warning Tones
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Adjust the value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch.
Adjust the value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta- cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Activating or deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives a warn- ing tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Rear view camera Function of the rear view camera
If you have activated the function in the multime- dia system, the image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The image from rear view camera 1 appears in the multimedia system when the following condi- tions are fulfilled: R The ignition is switched on. R Reverse gear has not been engaged. R The rear-end doors are opened.
This means that the area behind the vehicle can be monitored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off after approximately ten seconds. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and park- ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu- vering area while maneuvering and parking. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera cannot display all objects which are very near to or under the rear bumper. It will not warn you of a collision, people or objects. You can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mir- ror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
System limitations The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. R The area is lit by fluorescent light (the display
may flicker). R If there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- ter. R The ambient temperature is very high.
156 Driving and parking
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 220).
R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam- aged. In this event, have the camera, its posi- tion and its setting checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. a loading tailgate). % The display contrast may be impaired due to
incident sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. % Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are. This includes, for example: R The bumper of a vehicle parked behind. R The drawbar of a trailer. R The ball neck of a trailer coupling. R The rear end of a truck. R Slanted posts.
Only use the guide lines of the camera image for orientation. Do not travel further than the lowest horizontal guide line when approach- ing objects. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object.
Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely)
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width with outside mirror
Wide-angle view
View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving and parking 157
Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely) 4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width with outside mirror 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis- tance away (between approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)) 7 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
% If the distance to the obstacle is less than approx. 1.3 ft (0.4 m), the warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be red.
% If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows: R The rear segments are shown in red when backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv- ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.
Wide-angle view
View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Surround view camera Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil- ity. The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu- vering area while maneuvering and parking. The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360° Camera You can select from different views:
158 Driving and parking Top view
View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed)
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur- face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Marking at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) (the rear-end doors can still be opened completely)
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 8 in (0.2 m) from the rear area, vehicle width with outside mirror
6 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.3 ft (0.4 m) or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray. % If the entire system fails, the segments of the
warning display are shown in red. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows: R The rear segments are shown in red when
backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv-
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out.
Guide lines % The guide lines in the multimedia system dis-
play show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.
View of trailer (if trailer hitch is installed) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position
2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
3 Your vehicle from above 4 Marker of the wheel contact points 5 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions
with outside mirrors folded out If the distance to the object lessens, the color of warning display 2 changes. System failure If there is no operational readiness, the following message appears in the multimedia system:
Driving and parking 159
System limitations
The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The front doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. R The area is lit by fluorescent light (the display
may flicker). R If there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- ter. R The ambient temperature is very high. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed, are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum- stances. You could otherwise injure others or col- lide with objects when parking the vehicle. On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the cam- era system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. loading tailgate). % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
The image from the 360° Camera appears auto- matically in the multimedia system when the fol- lowing conditions are fulfilled: R The ignition is switched on. R The rear-end doors are opened.
This means that the area behind the vehicle can be monitored. When the rear-end doors are closed, the image from the rear view camera is switched off after approximately ten seconds. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (/ page 220).
Selecting a view for the surround view cam- era
Requirements: R The Auto. Rear View Cam. is activated in the
multimedia system .
# Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
tem.
Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis- tance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Activate or deactivate Maneuvering Assis-
tance. % When maneuvering assistance is activated,
the following functions are active: R Drive Away Assist (/ page 162) R Rear Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 163)
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST can assist you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increased lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect drowsiness or increased lapses in concentration in good time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you to rest properly.
160 Driving and parking
You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by the system (Attention Level) is adapted accordingly. If fatigue or increased lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTEN- TION ASSIST continues to detect increased lap- ses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
Instrument Display (color display) You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The journey length since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - The fuller the circle is, the higher the
detected attention level is - The circle in the center of the display
empties from the outside inwards as attentiveness decreases
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the Assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The journey length since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: - The fuller the bar is, the higher the detec-
ted attention level is - The bar empties as attentiveness decrea-
ses
If ATTENTION ASSIST cannot calculate the atten- tion level and cannot issue a warning, the Attention Level message appears. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restric- ted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all, in the following situations: R The journey lasts less than approximately
30 minutes R The road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
face or potholes) R The vehicle is subjected to a strong crosswind R You have a sporty driving style (high corner-
ing speeds or high rates of acceleration) R The time is set incorrectly R You change lanes and vary your speed fre-
quently in active driving situations
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con- tinuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine R You unfasten your seat belt and open the driv-
er's door (e.g. change drivers or take a break)
Instrument Display (black and white display)
Driving and parking 161
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Blind Spot Assist Function of Blind Spot Assist with exit warn- ing Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area directly next to and on the side behind the vehicle. % USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to either sta- tionary objects or vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf-
fic situation and maintain a safe dis- tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side from other road users and obstacles. If a vehicle is detected above speeds of approx- imately 7.5 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle sub- sequently enters the detection range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. % When a trailer is connected, the radar sen-
sor's field of vision may be impaired, thereby making limited monitoring possible. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation
and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral detection range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indi- cator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and warns vehicle occupants when leaving the vehicle about any approaching vehi- cles.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear- ance.
% An exit warning is not issued for sliding doors and rear-end doors.
Overview When the vehicle is stationary, an object is detected from behind in the detec- tion range.
Red warning lamp in the outside mirror
When the vehicle is stationary, a door on the relevant side of the vehicle is opened. An object which is close to your vehicle is detected in the detection range.
Collision warning
162 Driving and parking
% This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maximum of three minutes after the drive system has been switched off. The end of the availability of the exit warning function is indi- cated by a series of flashes in the outside mirror.
The exit warning function is only an aid and is no substitute for the attentiveness of the vehicle occupants. Responsibility lies with the vehicle occupants when opening doors and leaving the vehicle.
System limits Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning function may be limited in the following situations: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured R if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray R if narrow vehicles are within the detection
range, e.g. bicycles R on very wide lanes R on very narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
% Stationary or slowly moving objects are not displayed.
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor- ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. The exit warning function may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensor is blocked by adjacent vehi-
cles in narrow parking spaces R when people are approaching
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.
Drive Away Assist
Function of Drive Away Assist % Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi-
cles with automatic transmission. Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec- ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a sym- bol appears on the camera image of the multime- dia system.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and traffic situations. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: R Warn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed. R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
speed.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec- essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva- sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi- tute for your attention to the surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the path of your vehicle. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit- uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected.
The Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Driving and parking 163
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx- imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
R If the maneuvering assistance function is acti- vated in the multimedia system.
System limits Drive Away Assist is unavailable on inclines and when driving with a trailer.
Lane Keeping Assist and Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Lane Keeping Assist
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Function of Rear Cross Traffic Alert The radar sensors in the bumper are used for the system. This way the area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are obscured by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. % Also read the notes on Blind Spot Assist
(/ page 161). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when back- ing up out of a parking space. If a vehicle is detected, the warning lamp in the outside mirror on the corresponding side lights up red. If it detects a critical situation, a warning tone also sounds. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when backing up out of a parking space. If a critical situation is detected, a warning symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. In this case, a warning tone sounds. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions: R Blind Spot Assist is activated. R Reverse gear is engaged or the vehicle is
backing up at walking pace. R If the maneuvering assistance function is acti-
vated in the multimedia system.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is unavaila- ble when driving with a trailer.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unintentionally leav- ing your lane. You may also be warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering wheel or by a warning tone and by the status symbol flashing in the Instrument Display. The function is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). The warning is issued when the following condi- tions are met at the same time: R If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings. R If a front wheel drives over lane markings.
% You may also be warned by a noticeable vibration in the steering wheel (4x2 model) or by a warning tone (4x4 model) and by the status symbol flashing in the Instrument Dis- play.
You can activate and deactivate the Lane Keeping Assist warning. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep- ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid and is not intended to keep the vehicle in the lane without the driver's cooperation. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
164 Driving and parking
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or spray. R Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R No or several unclear lane markings are pres- ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area. R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R The road is very narrow and winding.
Functions of Active Lane Keeping Assist
The warning is issued when the following condi- tions are met at the same time: R The driving system detects lane markings. R A front wheel passes over the lane markings.
A lane-correcting brake application occurs when the following conditions are met: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both sides of the vehicle. R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark-
ing.
A relevant message appears in the instrument display. The brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h). You can either deactivate the Active Lane Keep- ing Assist warning or switch off the system com- pletely. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It can- not take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The driving system is an aid for when you unintentionally leave or cross the lane and not a system for automatically keeping to the lane. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin- tentionally leaving your lane. You may also be warned by a vibrating message from the steering wheel and by the status symbol flashing in the instrument display. In addition, you may be gui- ded back into your lane by a lane-correcting brake application. A relevant message appears in the instrument display.
If a lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs, display 1 appears in the multifunction display.
System limits No lane-correcting brake application from Active Lane Keeping Assist occurs in the following situa- tions: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate. R You switch on the turn signal.
Driving and parking 165
R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration.
R ESP® has been switched off. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con-
nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed.
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R Glare from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured. R No or several unclear lane markings are pres- ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area. R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too small, and therefore the lane markings cannot be detected. R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R The roadway is very narrow and winding.
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Select Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist. # Activate or deactivate the function. # To activate or deactivate the warning: acti-
vate or deactivate theWarning.
% After a cold start, the idle speed of the engine is increased automatically. If the pre- set working speed is lower than the increased idle speed, the working speed is only reached once the engine has completed the warm-up phase. It is only possible to activate ADR with the vehicle stationary and the parking brake applied. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position j.
Activating/deactivating ADR
# To activate: while the engine is running, press switch 1. The Working Speed Governor Active message appears in the multifunction display.
# To deactivate: while the engine is running, press switch 2.
ADR goes out automatically in the following situa- tions: R You release the parking brake. R You depress the brake pedal. R The vehicle moves. R The control unit detects a malfunction.
Work mode ADR (working speed control)
Function of ADR (working speed control) When activated, ADR automatically increases the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed you have set.
166 Driving and parking
Adjusting ADR
# Engage power take-off or activate ADR. # To increase: press switch 1. # To reduce: press switch 2. Trailer operation Notes on trailer operation & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if
the tongue weight is exceeded The carrier system may detach from the vehi- cle, thereby endangering other road users. # Always comply with the permissible
tongue weight when using a carrier. & WARNING Swerving of the vehicle/
trailer combination due to increased speed You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination. The vehicle/trailer combination may even tip over. # Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the vehicle/trailer combi- nation by increasing the speed. # Reduce your speed and do not counter- steer. # If necessary, apply the brakes. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable ball neck
If you install an unsuitable ball neck, the trailer hitch and the rear axle may be overloa- ded. This can significantly impair the driving char- acteristics and the trailer may become loose. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Only install a ball neck that complies
with the permissible dimensions and is designed for the requirements of trailer operation. # Do not modify the ball neck or the trailer hitch.
You can find specifications regarding the ball neck on the trailer's identification plate. You can find specifications regarding the trailer on the towing vehicle's identification plate and in the technical data (/ page 280).
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to an incorrectly installed ball cou- pling
If the ball coupling is not installed and engaged correctly, it may become detached during travel and endanger other road users. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Install and secure the ball coupling as
described in the ball coupling manufac- turer's installation instructions. # When the ball coupling has been instal- led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly installed and secured ball coupling
If the ball coupling has not been correctly installed and secured, the trailer can become detached.
Driving and parking 167
# Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling manufac- turer's installation instructions.
# When the ball coupling has been instal- led, ensure that it is correctly secured before every trip.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal continu- ously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
Be sure to comply with the operating instructions of the manufacturer of the trailer coupling and the ball neck. Place your vehicle/trailer combination on surfa- ces that are as even as possible and secure it against rolling away (/ page 137). Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. When backing up the towing vehicle, ensure that there is no-one between the vehicle and the trailer. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehi- cle correctly, the trailer may become detached. Once it has been coupled and is roadworthy, the trailer must be in a horizontal position behind the towing vehicle. Note the following regarding the tongue weight: R Make full use of the maximum tongue weight,
where possible. R Never fall below a legally prescribed minimum
tongue weight; the tongue weight must always be positive. R Do not exceed or fall below the permissible tongue weights this must be observed dur- ing loading and unloading of the trailer.
Do not exceed the following values: R Permitted braked or unbraked towing capa-
city The maximum permissible towing capacity for unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg). R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi- cle R Permissible gross weight of the towing vehi- cle R Permissible gross weight of the trailer
R Permissible gross combination weight R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer
The relevant permitted values, which must not be exceeded, can be found in the following places: R In your vehicle documents R On the identification plate of the trailer hitch R On the trailer's identification plate R On the vehicle identification plate
If there are discrepancies between the values, the lowest one shall apply. Before driving off, ensure the following: R The tire pressure on the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle has been set for the maximum load. R The headlamps have been set correctly.
Values approved by the manufacturer can be found on the identification plates and in the sec- tion for the towing vehicle (/ page 243). Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer relative to without a trailer: R The vehicle/trailer combination will be heav-
ier. R The vehicle/trailer combination will be
restricted in its acceleration and gradeability. R The vehicle/trailer combination will have an
increased braking distance. R The vehicle/trailer combination will be more
susceptible to crosswind gusts. R The vehicle/trailer combination will require
more sensitive steering. R The vehicle/trailer combination will have a
larger turning radius.
This may impair the vehicle's driving characteris- tics. When driving with a vehicle/trailer combination, always adapt your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Drive carefully. Keep a suffi- cient safe distance. Comply with the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or 62 mph (100 km/h), even in countries in which higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/trailer combinations. Attach only an approved trailer hitch to your vehi- cle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved for your vehicle. Further information about availa- bility and installation, including that of the trailer
168 Driving and parking
electrics, is available from any qualified specialist workshop. The trailer hitch is one of the most important vehicle parts for road safety. Comply with the instructions on operation, maintenance and serv- icing in the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions. % Your vehicle's bumpers are not suitable for
installing detachable trailer hitches. Do not attach any rented trailer hitches or any other detachable trailer hitches to the bumpers. % During trailer operation, remember that
PARKTRONIC is available only to a limited extent, if at all. % The height of the ball head will change depending on the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw- bar.
Driving notes The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before setting off, consult the trailer's vehicle documents to find out the maximum per- missible speed. Your vehicle will behave differently with a trailer relative to without a trailer, and will consume more fuel. On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time. % This also applies if cruise control is switched
on. You will thereby make use of the engine's braking effect and will not have to brake as often to con- trol the speed. This will take some of the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal inter- mittently rather than continuously. Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilization (/ page 145).
Driving tips If the trailer sways, remember the following points: R Do not accelerate under any circumstances. R Do not countersteer. R If necessary, apply the brakes.
% You can reduce the risk of the trailer swaying and rocking by retrofitting stabilizer bars or trailer stability programs. Further information
is available from a Freightliner Sprinter service center. When you are driving with a trailer, observe the following points: R Maintain a greater distance than when driving without a trailer. R Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen- tly first of all so that the trailer closes up behind your vehicle. Then, increase the brak- ing force rapidly. R The values given for start-off gradeability refer to sea level. When driving in mountain- ous areas, note that engine output, and there- fore start-off gradeability, will decrease with increasing elevation.
Coupling/uncoupling a trailer
Coupling a trailer
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle battery due to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the vehicle battery. # Do not use the vehicle's power supply
to charge the trailer battery.
# Shift the selector lever to position j. # Apply the vehicle's parking brake. # Close all the doors. # Position the trailer on a level surface behind
the vehicle. % The ball head height changes depending on
the vehicle's load. In this case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable trailer drawbar. # Couple up the trailer. # Establish all electrical and other connections to the trailer. # Remove objects or devices which prevent the trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks. # Release the trailer's parking brake. % The vehicle harness has a cable connection to the brake light indicator lamp. Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimen- sions (width and length).
Driving and parking 169
Most US states and all Canadian provinces pre- scribe the following points, and you are urgently recommended to comply with these: R Safety chains between the towing vehicle and
the trailer. The chains should be routed in a criss-cross pattern under the trailer drawbar. They must be connected to the trailer tow hitch and not to the bumper or to the vehicle axle. Leave sufficient slack in the chains. This allows for even sharp cornering. R A separate brake system is required for cer- tain trailers. R A safety feature is required for braked trailers. Determine the specific requirements accord- ing to the relevant laws. If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- ing vehicle, the safety feature triggers the trailer brakes and can thus reduce the danger.
Uncoupling a trailer
& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. # Do not uncouple trailers with an
engaged overrun brake.
Do not uncouple a trailer with an overrun brake in a state of overrun. Otherwise, the rebound of the overrun brake can damage your vehicle. # Shift the selector lever to position j. # Apply the vehicle's parking brake. # Close all the doors. # Apply the trailer's parking brake. # Secure the trailer against rolling away with a
wheel chock or similar object. # Remove the trailer cables and safety chains. # Uncouple the trailer.
Information about towing a trailer
Operating a trailer is subject to many statutory regulations such as speed restrictions. Many states also require an auxiliary separate functional braking system when towing a weight that exceeds a certain limit. For your safety, it is
recommended to use a separate functional brak- ing system on any towed vehicle. Make sure that your trailer combination meets local regulations. This not only applies to your place of residence, but also to your destination. Information on this can be obtained from the police and local authorities. Comply with the following when driving with a trailer: R Practice cornering, stopping and backing up
in a traffic-free location. In this way, you will gain driving experience and become accus- tomed to the new handling characteristics. R Before driving, check the following: - that the trailer tow hitch and ball coupling
are secure - that the safety switch for braked trailers is
functioning correctly - that the safety chains are secure and
undamaged - that the electrical connections are secure - that the lights are functioning correctly - the wheels for damage and correct tire
pressure (/ page 240) R Adjust the outside mirrors so that you have a
clear view of the rear section of the trailer. R If the trailer is equipped with an individual
braking system, check before each journey whether the brakes are functioning correctly. R If the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully with the vehicle/ trailer combination. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes are functioning correctly. R Secure the load on the trailer in line with the requirements and rules for load-securing methods. R When driving with a trailer, check at regular intervals that the load is secure and that the lights and brakes are functioning correctly. R Bear in mind that the handling characteristics are more unstable when towing a trailer than when driving without a trailer. Avoid sudden steering movements. R The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a reduced climbing ability and an increased braking dis- tance. It is more susceptible to side winds and requires careful steering.
170 Driving and parking
R If possible, do not brake suddenly, but rather moderately at first so that the trailer can acti- vate its brakes. Then increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
R If the automatic transmission shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, restrict the shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2 or 1. A lower gear and reduced speed decrease the risk of engine damage.
R When driving on a downhill gradient, shift to a lower gear to use the engine's braking effect. Avoid constant braking, as this could cause the vehicle brakes and possibly also the trailer brakes to overheat.
R If the coolant temperature increases signifi- cantly when the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch the air-conditioning sys- tem off. Coolant heat can also be dissipated by switching the airflow and the temperature of the heater or air conditioning to the maximum level. Open the windows if necessary.
R When overtaking, pay particular attention to the increased overtaking distance of your vehicle/trailer combination. Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer com- bination you will require a longer stretch of road before switching back to the original lane.
Permissible trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights
Weight information
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unbraked trailer with excessively high gross weight
If you tow a trailer without a separate func- tional braking system and a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1635 lbs (750 kg), then the vehicle brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Always use a trailer with a separate
functional braking system when towing a trailer with a gross trailer weight (GTW) of more than 1635 lbs (750 kg).
* NOTE Damage to the drive train, trans- mission or trailer tow hitch due to excess gross combination weight
The permissible gross combination weight is exceeded. The drive train, the transmission or the trailer tow hitch may be damaged. # Comply with the permissible gross com-
bination weight.
For vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible gross combination weight is less than the sum of the permissible gross vehicle weight plus the per- missible trailer load. If either the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the permitted gross vehicle weight or the permitted trailer load values are reduced accordingly. In this case, you may only partially load the trailer or the vehicle. The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment. If the trailer is equipped with a separate braking system, then the maxi- mum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs (2268 kg) or 7500 lbs (3402 kg). The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose- weight on the ball head is 500 lbs (227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). However, the actual trailer drawbar noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identifica- tion plates. Where the values differ, the lowest value always applies. The permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer combinations (GCWR) is calculated by adding the gross weight of the trailer to the gross vehicle weight including a driver's weight of approx- imately 150 lbs (68 kg). The maximum permissi- ble gross combination weight is vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent. When driving with a trailer, you should not exceed the maximum per- mitted permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer combinations (GCWR). The permissible values, which must not be excee- ded, can be found in your vehicle documents and on the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, the trailer and the vehicle. The values approved by the manufacturer can also be found in the "Technical data" section. Where the values differ, the lowest value always applies.
Loading the trailer Use a drawbar noseweight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible nose-
Driving and parking 171
weight. Do not undershoot the minimum permis- sible noseweight. Otherwise, the trailer may become detached. R Distribute the load over the vehicle and the
trailer so as not to exceed either the maxi- mum permissible values for the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) and gross trailer weight (GTW), the permissible gross weight for vehi- cle-trailer combinations (GCWR), nor the max- imum permissible gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and trailer drawbar noseweight (TWR) of your vehicle. R Add the rear axle load to the trailer drawbar noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball head (TWR). This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross axle weight rat- ing (GAWR). R Add the vehicle load to the trailer drawbar noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball head (TWR). This will ensure that you do not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight R Make sure that the weights of the towing
vehicle and the trailer comply with the maxi- mum permissible values. Have the car/trailer combination weighed on a calibrated weigh- ing machine. The car/trailer combination comprises the towing vehicle including driver, passengers and load as well as the laden trailer. R Check the maximum permissible gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the permissible gross weight for vehicle-trailer combinations (GCWR) and the trailer drawbar noseweight rating (TWR).
adapter for the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped with a permanent power supply at the factory. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. Note that the trailer's permanent power supply is not switched off when the vehicle's on-board electrical system voltage is low. This could com- pletely discharge your vehicle's starter battery. Further information on the electrical equipment currently installed on your vehicle and on instal- ling the trailer electrics can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Trailer power supply
Incorrect cabling of the connector plug may inter- fere with other electronic systems in the vehicle. Freightliner Sprinter therefore recommends that you have the cabling of the connector plug car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. You can connect accessories up to a maximum of 240 W to the permanent power supply. Do not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. Your vehicle may be equipped with a range of electrical equipment for trailer operation. Depending on your trailer, you may need an
172 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Overview of Instrument Display & WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction If the Instrument Display has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions applying to safety relevant sys- tems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop. If you are uncertain regarding the operational safety of your vehicle, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Inform a qualified specialist workshop. Instrument Display
Example: Instrument Display with color display 1 Speedometer 2 Multifunction display 3 Tachometer 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator In normal driving mode, coolant temperature dis- play 4 is permitted to rise to the red marking.
Example: Instrument Display with black and white display 1 Speedometer 2 Indicator lamps display 3 Tachometer 4 Multifunction display
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
When the red marking in tachometer 3 is reached (overspeed range), the fuel supply will be interrupted in order to protect the engine.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine com- partment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com-
partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 173
Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel
6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call 6 ò Main menu button (multimedia system) 7 Touch Control, right (multimedia system) 8 % Back button, right (multimedia system)
Variant 1 1 % Back button, left (on-board computer) 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer) 3 Button group for cruise control or Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Button group:
£ Voice-operated control f Displays favorites (multimedia system)
VOL: using the 8 control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound 6 Makes/accepts a call ~ Rejects/ends a call 5 ò Main menu button (multimedia system) 6 Touch Control, right (multimedia system) 7 % Back button, right (multimedia system)
Operating the on-board computer
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. Operating the on-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) % The displays of the on-board computer
appear on the multifunction display (/ page 174). When the function is switched on, different signal tones will provide feedback while the on-board computer is being operated. These include a sig- nal tone when the end of a list is reached or when a list is being scrolled through.
Variant 2 1 % Back button, left (on-board computer) 2 Touch Control, left (on-board computer) 3 Main menu button (on-board computer) 4 Button group for cruise control or Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC 5 Button group:
£ Voice-operated control f Displays favorites (multimedia system)
VOL: using the 8 control, increases/ reduces the volume or switches off the sound
174 Instrument Display and on-board computer
The on-board computer is operated via left-hand Touch Control 2 and back button on the left 1.
# To call up the main menu: press back but- ton on the left 1 repeatedly, or press and hold it.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: you can call up the main menu of the on-board computer with the ò but- ton.
# To browse through the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on left-hand Touch Control 2.
# To call up a menu or confirm a selection: press left-hand Touch Control 2.
# To browse through displays or lists in the menu: swipe upwards or downwards on lefthand Touch Control 2.
# To call up a submenu or confirm a selec- tion: press left-hand Touch Control 2.
# To exit a submenu: press back button on the left 1.
If you are in a submenu and press and hold back button on the left 1, the main menu will appear.
Overview of what is shown on the multi- function display
The on-board computer is operated using the fol- lowing buttons: R Back button on the left 1 R Left-hand Touch Control 2 R Main menu button on the left 3
The following menus are available depending on the equipment: R Service R Assistance R Trip R Radio R Media R Phone R Settings
Instrument Display with color display 1 Outside temperature 2 Transmission position 3 Time 4 Display section
Instrument Display and on-board computer 175 Setting the instrument lighting
Instrument Display with black and white dis- play 1 Outside temperature 2 Display section 3 Time 4 Transmission position
Further displays on the multifunction display:
Z
Gearshift recommendation
é
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC switched off
¯ Cruise control (/ page 147)
ç
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 150)
z DSR (/ page 149)
ë HOLD function (/ page 153)
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 86)
Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched off
1 A door is not fully closed.
è
Rear window wiper switched on (/ page 95)
+ LOW RANGE active (/ page 124)
SOS NOT READY
Emergency call system not active
h
Active Lane Keeping Assist switched off (/ page 164)
æ
Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 145)
e
Blind Spot Assist switched off (/ page 161)
# Turn brightness control 1 upwards or down- wards. The lighting on the instrument display and the control elements in the vehicle interior will be adjusted.
% In vehicles without brightness control 1, the instrument lighting can be adjusted via the on-board computer (/ page 179).
Menus and submenus Calling up functions on the service menu
On-board computer: 4 Service # Select and confirm the required function. The following functions are available on the service menu: R Announcements: message memory
(/ page 286) R DEF: display the DEF fill level (/ page 134) R Tires:
- Check the tire pressure with the tire pres- sure monitoring system (/ page 248)
- Restart the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem (/ page 248)
R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date (/ page 210)
R Engine Oil Level: measure the engine oil level
176 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Calling up the assistant display On-board computer: 4 Assistance # Select the desired display and confirm.
Instrument Display with color display The following displays are available on the assis- tant display: R Assistant display R Attention level (/ page 159) # Switch between the displays and confirm the
selected display. The following status displays are available on the assistant display: R Û ATTENTION ASSIST switched off R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC specified
distance (/ page 150)
R Lane markings dotted: Lane Keeping Assist off
R Û ATTENTION ASSIST off R d Blind Spot Assist on and ready to issue
warnings (lines of the radio waves solid) R c Blind Spot Assist on and not ready to
issue warnings (lines of the radio waves bro- ken) R e Blind Spot Assist off
Calling up displays on the trip menu
On-board computer: 4 Trip # Select the desired display and confirm. The following displays are available on the trip menu: R Standard display R Range and current fuel consumption
With certain engines, a recuperation display is also shown. If only a small amount of fuel is left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled will appear instead of the approximate range. R ECO display (/ page 117) R Trip computer: - From Start - From Reset R Digital speedometer
Instrument Display with black and white display
The following status displays are available on the assistant display: R Lane markings solid and thick: Lane Keeping
Assist on and ready to issue warnings R Lane markings solid and thin: Lane Keeping
Assist on and not ready to issue warnings
Instrument Display with color display Standard display (example)
1 Trip distance 2 Total distance
Instrument Display and on-board computer 177
Instrument Display with black and white display Standard display (example)
1 Trip distance 2 Total distance Instrument Display with color display
Trip computer (example) 1 Distance covered (from start/from reset) 2 Driving time (from start/from reset) 3 Average speed (from start/from reset) 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from
reset)
Resetting values on the on-board computer trip menu
On-board computer: 4 Trip % The spelling of the displayed main menu may
differ. Therefore, pay attention to the menu overview for the Instrument Display (/ page 173). You can reset the values of the following func- tions: R Trip Odometer: - Reset Trip Odometer? R Trip computer: - From Start - From Reset R ECO display
# Select the function that is to be reset and confirm this selection.
# Confirm the Reset Values? prompt with Yes.
Selecting a radio station
On-board computer: 4 Trip
Instrument Display with black and white display Trip computer (example)
1 Distance covered (from start/from reset) 2 Driving time (from start/from reset) 3 Average speed (from start/from reset) 4 Average fuel consumption (from start/from
reset)
1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of the track 4 Artist's name
The following displays are available: R Frequency range R Station list
# Select the radio station's frequency or a radio station from the station list.
# Confirm the selection.
When you select a station in the station memory, the storage location appears beside the station
178 Instrument Display and on-board computer
name. When you select a saved station in the fre- quency range, a star appears beside the station name. Operating media playback with the on-board computer On-board computer: 4 Media
1 Media source 2 Current track and track number 3 Artist's name 4 Name of the album The following displays are available on the media menu: R Media source selection list R Current playback # Select and confirm the media source. # Select and confirm the required playback. % This is how to select a station when TV is the
media source. Dialing a telephone number using the onboard computer & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When using the phone, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.
Requirements: R The mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system.
On-board computer: 4 Phone Select one of the following options: R Previous calls R Phone book R Call status
Vehicles with MBUX multimedia system: the most recent telephone calls (dialed numbers, accepted and missed calls) are displayed on the Phone menu. # Select and confirm a telephone number.
If only one telephone number has been saved for the entry: the telephone number is dialed. # If several telephone numbers have been saved for the entry: select and confirm a telephone number. The telephone number is dialed. Instead of the selected telephone numbers, the following displays may appear: R Please Wait: The application is currently start- ing. If no Bluetooth® connection to the mobile phone is established, the menu for authoriz- ing and connecting a mobile phone will be displayed in the multimedia system (/ page 193). R Updating Data...: The call list is being upda- ted. R Importing Contacts: The mobile phone's con- tacts, or a memory medium's contacts are being imported.
Accepting/rejecting a call When you are called, the Incoming Call message appears on the display. # Press 6 to accept the call or ~ to
reject it.
You can also accept or reject the call using the 6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 179
Calling up settings on the on-board computer
On-board computer: 4 Settings The following entries can be set on the Settings menu: R Light
- Setting Instr. Clust. Light. R Vehicle
- Switching Rain Sensor on and off R Setting Heating R Display and Operation
- Switching permanent Display additive (DEF) Level on and off
# Select an entry and confirm the selection. # Make the necessary changes.
180 Mercedes PRO
Information about Mercedes PRO (Mercedes me) Freightliner Sprinter vehicles support the follow- ing telematics solutions depending on what is selected: R Mercedes PRO R Mercedes me
When you have registered and logged in with a user account to the Mercedes PRO Portal or Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Daimler VANS will be available to you. Availability of Mercedes PRO is country-depend- ent. You can check the availability of Mercedes PRO in your country in the Mercedes PRO Portal: http://www.mercedes.pro Availability of Mercedes me is country-depend- ent. You can check the availability of Mercedes me in your country in the Mercedes me Portal: http://www.mercedes.me For more information on Mercedes PRO or Mercedes me contact an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center or visit the Mercedes PRO Portal or Mercedes me Portal.
Information about Mercedes PRO connect (Mercedes me connect) Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me connect is the connectivity product from Mercedes-Benz that intelligently connects your vehicle with your smartphone, your tablet or your PC. You can then call up diverse information about your vehicle at any time, for example, or control specific vehicle functions remotely. Amongst others, Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me connect provide the following serv- ices: R Breakdown Management (breakdown assis-
tance call button) In the event of a breakdown, you can use the breakdown assistance call button in the over- head control panel to make a call to the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center (/ page 181). You can also select a menu entry in the multi- media system (/ page 180). R Emergency call system (SOS button) Use the G button (SOS button) in the overhead control panel to make a call to the
Freightliner Sprinter emergency call center (/ page 181). R Accident Recovery Accident Recovery is available for you as a supplement to the emergency call system. If desired, at the conclusion of an emergency call, your call is forwarded to the Freightliner Sprinter Customer center, so you can have your vehicle towed away to an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center, for example (/ page 181).
The Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center and the Freightliner Sprinter emergency call center are available for you around the clock for the use of the services. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are staying. To use the services in your vehicle, the following conditions must be met: R Your vehicle is in an area with sufficient GSM
network coverage. R The ignition is switched on.
For more information about Mercedes PRO and Mercedes PRO connect and the range of services offered, please visit: https://www.mercedes.pro For more information about Mercedes me and Mercedes me connect and the range of services offered, please visit: https://mercedes.me
Calling the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center using the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Call Mercedes PRO connect or Mercedes me
connect.
Then, you can select a service in the voice selec- tion menu and be connected to a specialist at the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center. You can find information on the following topics: R Vehicle breakdown or accident R Activation of Mercedes PRO connect or
Mercedes me connect or questions about the connectivity product R Questions about the vehicle or about opera- tion of the vehicle R Nearest authorized Freightliner SprinterCen- ter R Other products and services from MercedesBenz
Mercedes PRO 181
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Giving permission for data transfer
Requirements: R There is an active breakdown assistance call
(/ page 181). A query appears asking if vehicle data and the vehicle position can be transferred to the Freight- liner Sprinter Customer Center so as to process your inquiry more efficiently. # Select Yes.
Relevant identification data is transmitted automatically.
1 Breakdown assistance call button 2 The cover for the G button (SOS button) 3 G button (SOS button) Making a breakdown assistance call # Press button 1. Making an emergency call # Briefly press the cover on G button 2 to
open it. # Press and hold G button 3 for at least
one second. An emergency call can still be triggered when a breakdown assistance call is active. This has pri- ority over all other active calls.
Information on the breakdown assistance call via the overhead control panel A call to the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Cen- ter using the breakdown assistance button has been initiated via the overhead control panel: In the event of a breakdown, you will get support: R A qualified technician carries out repairs on
site and/or the vehicle will be towed to the nearest authorized Freightliner Sprinter Cen- ter You may be charged for these services. Data is transmitted during the connection to the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center (/ page 181).
Transmitted data during a service call In certain countries you must confirm the data transfer. The following requirements must be met for data transmission: R The ignition is switched on. R The necessary data transmission technology
is supported by the mobile network provider. R A sufficient mobile phone connection quality
is provided.
The data transferred when calling depends on the services activated and the type of call made: R General information about the vehicle R Accident and breakdown assistance R Service appointment agreement
The following data is transmitted if the data pro- tection query has been confirmed in the multime- dia system or in the instrument cluster: R Vehicle identification number R Reason for the initiation of the call R Set language for the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt
182 Mercedes PRO
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data may be transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If accident and breakdown assistance is called via the voice control system, and the data protec- tion query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Freightliner Sprinter Customer Center: R Current vehicle location The following data is transmitted if the data pro- tection query has been declined in the multime- dia system or in the instrument cluster: R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt
Overview and operation Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system 183 % If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the media display. Home screen overview
1 Touch Control and multimedia system control panel
2 Media display with touch functionality Opens/closes the center console storage compartment above the display
3 Operating strip, calls up applications
In the center console storage compartment you can find the following ports and interfaces: R Two USB ports or one USB port
The USB port with the ç symbol facilitates the connection of the mobile phone with the multimedia system using a suitable cable. This will enable you to use the functions of the mobile phone via Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto. R Stowage space with charging interface and NFC interface (if available)
Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center.
1 On the home screen: displays the first three applications In other displays: calls up the home screen
2 Displays, for example network display, bat- tery status of the mobile phone connected, signal strength of the mobile phone network, time y Quickly switches driving systems on or off
3 Number of applications and currently selec- ted display area
4 Calls up FAVORITES 5 Calls up an application using the symbol 6 Name of the application, beneath the current
selection or current display 7 Quick-access (in the example: shows calls
lists and searches for a contact)
Notes on the media display
Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 221). Automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature: if the temperature is too high, the bright- ness is initially reduced automatically. The media display may then switch off completely for a while.
184 Multimedia system
Touch Control Operating Touch Control (multimedia system)
Switching acoustic operating feedback for the Touch Control on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls
The function is supported by the selection in a list. # Select Acoustic Feedback. # Set Normal, Loud or Off.
If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.
1 © button Calls up the home screen
2 Touch Control 3 Back button
Returns to the previous display 4 Control panel for multimedia system
Press the f rocker switch down: shows favorites Turn the controller: adjusts the volume Press the controller: switches sound off Press the 6 rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call Press the ~ rocker switch down: ends or declines a call
# To call up the home screen: press button 1.
or # Press and hold button 3. # To open a menu or list: press Touch Control
2. # To close a menu or list: press button 3. # To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on Touch Control 2. # Press Touch Control 2.
Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls 5 Touch Control Sensitivity
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
Touchscreen
Operating the touchscreen
Requirements: R For the map functions: an iPhone® is con-
nected via Apple CarPlay® or a mobile phone is connected via Android Auto with the multi- media system. R A navigation application is available on the mobile phone.
Tapping # To select a menu item or entry: tap on a
symbol or an entry. # To increase the map scale: tap twice
quickly with one finger. # To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin-
gers. # To enter characters with the keyboard: tap
on a button.
Single-finger swipe # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right.
Touching, holding and moving # To set the volume on a scale: touch the
touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.
Touching and holding # To call up a global menu in the applica-
tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the OPTIONS menu appears.
Multimedia system 185
Setting acoustic operation feedback for the touchscreen Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls The function is supported by the selection in a list. # Select Acoustic Feedback. # Set Normal, Loud or Off.
If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Applications Calling up applications Using buttons on the operating strip
1 % button Calls up the telephone
2 Volume rocker switch Adjusts the volume(/ page 186)
3 %/© button Press briefly: returns to the previous display Press and hold: calls up the home screen
4 8/Ü button Press briefly: switches sound off Press and hold: activates or deactivates the multimedia system
5 Quick-access button for media Calls up the control menu of the last active media source
6 Vehicle button Sets vehicle functions
7 | button Pressing repeatedly calls up the desired audio source
8 ß button
Calls up navigation Requirement: the mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via the USB port ç using a suitable cable. Via Apple Car- Play® or Android Auto the navigation applica- tion of the mobile phone can be used.
# To access stations and music tracks quickly: press button 5. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.
# Swipe to the left or right. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or the next music track is selected.
# To hide the control menu: press button 5.
Using the home screen The home screen is shown in the media display when you start the vehicle. # Select the application by swiping and tapping. or # In any display: press the © button on the
Touch Control. or # Tap on the © symbol on the touchscreen.
The applications are displayed. # Select the application by swiping and tapping.
Changing the arrangement of applications on the home screen # Call up the home screen # Touch and hold an application on the
touchscreen until symbols appear. # Tap on = or ; and move the applica-
tion in the menu. # Tap on ø.
186 Multimedia system
Switching the sound on/off On the multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting the volume On the multifunction steering wheel
# To mute: press volume control 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the multimedia system display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.
# To switch on: turn volume control 1 or change the media source.
On the multimedia system
# To switch off: briefly press button 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the multimedia system display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted.
# To switch on: briefly press button 1 or change the media source.
# Turn volume control 1. The volume of the current radio or media source is set. The volume of other audio sour- ces can be adjusted separately.
Adjust the volume in the following situations: R during a traffic announcement R during a navigation announcement
The volume of the current media source changes in accordance with the volume of the navigation announcement. The function is possible in the following cases: - An iPhone® is connected via Apple Car-
PlayTM or a mobile phone is connected via Android Auto with the multimedia system. - A navigation application is available on the mobile phone. R during a telephone call
On the multimedia system
# To raise/reduce the volume in steps: briefly press rocker switch 1 up or down.
Multimedia system 187
# To raise/reduce the volume continuously: press rocker switch 1 up or down until the desired volume is set.
Favorites
Overview of favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favorites in total. You can select favorites from categories or you add favorites directly from an application.
Calling up favorites
In the media display # Tap on ©.
The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown.
Using the steering wheel # Press the f rocker switch on the steering
wheel down.
Adding favorites
Selecting favorites from categories # Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Select W Create Favorite.
The categories are displayed. # Select the category.
The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite.
The favorite is stored at the next available position. # All positions in the favorites are taken: confirm the message shown with OK. A list shows all the favorites. # Select a favorite which should be overwritten.
Adding a favorite from an application Examples of adding from an application are: R Saving a contact. R Storing a radio station. R Adding a media source.
# To save a contact as a global favorite: select a contact (/ page 196). The details are displayed.
# Press on a phone number until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
# Select Save as Favorite. The contact is added as a favorite.
# To store a radio station as a global favor- ite: set a radio station (/ page 204).
# Press on the radio station until the OPTIONS menu is shown.
# Select Save as Favorite. The radio station is added as a favorite.
Renaming favorites # Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is
shown. # Select Rename. # Enter the name. # Select OK.
Moving favorites
Moving favorites in the favorites menu # Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is
shown. # Select Move. # Move the favorite to the new position. # Tap on ø.
Deleting favorites # Tap on © in the media display.
The home screen is shown. # Swipe up until FAVORITES is shown. # Press on a favorite until the OPTIONS menu is
shown. # Select Delete. # Select Yes.
188 Multimedia system
Entering characters
Using the character input function
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Character entry can be carried out with these control elements: R Touch Control R Touchscreen (media display)
Character entry takes place by cursor control when using the Touch Control. Character input can be started with a control ele- ment and resumed with another. # When the keyboard is shown, enter the char-
acters on the control element by swiping and pressing or by tapping (touchscreen). or # Write the character on the touchscreen. Examples of character entry: R Renaming a favorite R Entering a telephone number
Entering characters on the touchscreen Using the keyboard
1 Input line 2 Shows suggestions during entry (if available) 3 Deletes an entry 4 Deleting
Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 5 Accepts an entry 6 Enters a space 7 Changes the keyboard language 8 Switches to digits and special characters (level 2) ABC switches to letters (level 1) 9 Pressing briefly switches between upper-case and lower-case letters Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently In level 2 with #+= switches to additional special characters (level 3) # Call up the character entry to rename a favor- ite, for example (/ page 187). The keyboard is shown. # Press briefly on a character key. The character is entered in input line 1. Sug- gestions are shown in 2. # To select a suggestion: select one of the entries. # If available, display additional suggestions with q or r. # Resume character input.
Multimedia system 189
# To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character.
# Select the character. # To end character input: press the G but-
ton. % The available editing functions depend on the
editing task, the language set and the charac- ter level.
Setting the keyboard for character entry Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Controls 5 Keyboards and Handwriting # Confirm Select Keyboards.
Select the keyboard language in the list.
System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
Display brightness # Select Display Brightness. # Select a brightness value.
Switching the display off/on # Off: select Display Off. # On: press a button, %, for example.
Switching the temperature display on/off # Select Temperature Display. # Select Outside Temp. or Coolant Tempera-
ture. The selected temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Time and date Setting the time and date automatically Multimedia system: 4 © 5 System 5 Time and Date # Deactivate ª Manual Time Adjustment.
The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone and summer time option.
% The correct time is required for the following functions: R Route guidance with time-dependent traf- fic guidance. R Calculation of expected time of arrival.
Setting the time zone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and Date
Setting the time zone manually # Select Time Zone:.
The list of countries is displayed. % If there are several time zones available in a
country, these will be shown after the coun- try is selected. # Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time Zone:.
Setting the time zone automatically # Activate Automatic Time Zone.
Setting the time and date format Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and Date 5 Set Format # Set the date and time format #.
Setting the time and date manually
Requirements: R The Manual Time Adjustment function is
switched on. R For setting the date manually: no GPS is
installed in the vehicle.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and Date
Setting the time (without time zone) # Select Set Time. # Set a time.
Setting the time (with time zone) # Select Set Time.
If a time zone is set the time is set automatically using the time zone. The time can be adjusted by a maximum of plus or minus 60 minutes.
190 Multimedia system
# Adjust the time using the slide control.
Setting the date # Select Set Date. # Set the date. % In vehicles with GPS, a date cannot be set
even with active manual time adjustments. The date is then set automatically through the selected time zone.
Connectivity Switching transmission of the vehicle posi- tion on/off
Requirements: R A Mercedes PRO account is available. R At least one service is activated in the
Mercedes PRO Portal that can access the transmitted position data. % The function is country-dependent. For more information, consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # Select Transmit Vehicle Position. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Bluetooth®
Information about Bluetooth® Bluetooth® technology is a standard for shortrange wireless data transfer up to approximately 32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth® to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the fol- lowing functions, for example: R Hands-free system with access to the follow-
ing options: - Call lists (/ page 196) R Internet connection R Transferring business cards (vCards) into the vehicle
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. % Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # To switch on Bluetooth®: select Connect
via Bluetooth. # Activate Bluetooth. # To switch off Bluetooth®: select Settings. # Deactivate Bluetooth.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview The Wi-Fi network in your vehicle serves only for the use of Apple® CarPlay. You can only connect with the network using this application. Further information about Apple® CarPlay (/ page 197).
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth # Switch Wi-Fi on or off.
If Wi-Fi is deactivated, communication via WiFi to all devices is interrupted.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul-
timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system to an external hotspot via Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ depend-
ing on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Multimedia system 191
# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.
Connecting using a security key # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys- tem. # Confirm the entry with ¡.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eightdigit PIN. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
Connecting using a button # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected (see the manu- facturer's operating instructions). # Press the WPS button on the device to be connected. # Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again.
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the
device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Press the push button on the device to be
connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). # Hold the device to be connected at the vehi-
cle's NFC interface. # Select Finished.
The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the newly created security key. # To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
192 Multimedia system
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab- lished, the new security key must be entered.
System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays. The selected lan- guage affects the characters available for entry. Setting the system language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language # Set the language.
Setting the distance unit Multimedia system: 4 © 5 System 5 Units # Select km or mi. # In the multifunction display of the instrument
display, switch the Additional Speedometer display on.
Resetting the multimedia system (reset func- tion) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset Personal data is deleted, for example: R Station presets R Connected mobile phones A query appears again asking if the system should really be reset. # Select Yes.
If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac- tory settings during a reset. # Select variant 1: Yes. # Enter the current PIN.
The PIN is reset. # Variant 2: select No.
The current PIN stays the same after reset- ting. % If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center can deactivate the PIN protection for you.
A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. # Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. Resetting using a button # Press both the % and \ buttons at the same time until the multimedia system restarts (at least 15 seconds). The multimedia system is restarted. No data is deleted during this process.
Vehicle information Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed. % The values for engine output and engine tor-
que may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for exam- ple: R Engine speed R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption.
A display with current and average consump- tion figures is displayed.
Multimedia system 193
Telephone Telephony Telephone menu overview
1 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the connected mobile phone
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 4 Options 5 Device manager 6 Numerical pad 7 Call list 8 Contact search Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone: with the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, con- tacts are shown automatically in the multimedia system. Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper-
ating integrated communication equip- ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from oper- ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com-
munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R there is insufficient network coverage in the
area R you move from one transmission/reception
station to another and no communication channels are free R the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require- ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice®. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 190).
194 Multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect New Device.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization using Secure Simple Pairing) # Select a mobile phone. # A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone. # If the codes match: confirm the code on the
mobile phone. % For older mobile phone models, enter a one
to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorization. % Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized on the multimedia system. Authorized mobile phones are reconnected automatically. % The connected mobile phone can also be used as Bluetooth® audio equipment (/ page 202).
Replacing a mobile phone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select í. # No authorized mobile phone available:
select Connect New Device. # Select a mobile phone. # Newly authorized mobile phone: confirm
the number code on the mobile phone.
Switching mobile phones # Select an authorized mobile phone.
The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. % For iPhone®: you can switch between the Apple CarPlay® and Bluetooth® equipment connection variants.
De-authorizing a mobile phone Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select í. # Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone. # Select Deauthorize.
Information on Near Field Communication (NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the mul- timedia system. Further information can be obtained at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com- munication (NFC) Requirements: R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions)
# Open the flap of storage compartment 1 above the media display.
# To connect a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on mat 2 or place the mobile phone on it.
# Follow the additional prompts on the media system display to connect the mobile phone (/ page 193).
# To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on mat 2 or place the mobile phone on it.
# Follow the additional prompts on the media system display to replace the mobile phone.
# If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operat- ing instructions).
If you want to charge a mobile phone without connecting it to the multimedia system, lay it on the mat without beforehand unblocking the screen. Further information can be found at: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Multimedia system 195
Setting the reception and transmission vol- ume
Requirements: R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 193).
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone This function ensures optimal language quality. # Select í. # Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone. # Select Reception Volume and Transmission
Volume. # Set the volume.
Further information on the recommended recep- tion and transmission volume: https:// www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog- nition
Requirements: R The mobile phone in the foreground is con-
nected with the multimedia system (/ page 193).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition # Press and hold the £ button on the multi-
function steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition # Briefly press the ~ button on the multi-
function steering wheel. % If a mobile phone is connected via Smart-
phone Integration, the voice recognition of this mobile phone is started or stopped.
Calls
Telephone operation Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Making a call by entering the numbers # Select _. # Enter a number. # Select R.
The call is made.
Accepting a call # Select R Accept.
Rejecting a call # Select k Reject.
Ending a call # Select k.
Activating functions during a call The following functions are available during a call: k End Call m Microphone Off _ Numeric Keypad (show to send DTMF
tones) h Transfer to Phone (an active call in hands-
free mode is transferred over to the tele- phone)
# Select a function.
Putting an active call on hold # Tap on the contact or the call.
The call will be put on hold. % The call on hold can be ended any time or re-
activated by tapping again.
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 195). R Another call is being made.
Switching between calls # Select the contact.
The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.
Activating a call on hold # Select the contact of the call on hold.
Ending an active call # Select k End Call. % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting/rejecting a waiting call
Requirements: R There is an active call (/ page 195).
If you receive a call while already in a call, a mes- sage is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and mobile net- work operator you will hear a call-waiting sound. # Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active.
196 Multimedia system
The previous call is on hold. # Select k Reject. % This function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper- ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone. You can store up to 3000 contacts. From the contacts menu you can use telephone functions such as call a contact, for example (/ page 196). If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 193) and automatic calling up (/ page 196) is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book.
Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z # Select Contacts & Recent Calls.
Automatically # Activate Synchronize Contacts Automatically
D.
Manually # Deactivate E Synchronize Contacts Auto-
matically. # Select Synchronize Contacts.
Calling up contacts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g The following options can be used to search for contacts: R Searching by initials R Searching by name R Searching by phone number
# Enter characters into the search field. # Select the contact.
Details for the contact are shown.
Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z # Select Name Format. The following options are available: R Last Name, First Name R Last Name First Name R First Name Last Name
# Select an option.
Calling a contact Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 g # Select ª Search for Contacts. # Enter characters into the search field. # Select the contact. # Select the telephone number.
The number is dialed.
Deleting contacts
Requirements: R The Synchronize Contacts Automatically func-
tion is switched off (/ page 196).
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Deleting all contacts # Select Z. # Select Delete Contacts.
Call list
Overview of the call list Depending on whether your mobile phone sup- ports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is supported, the effects are as follows: R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis-
played in the multimedia system. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
Multimedia system 197
If the PBAP Bluetooth® profile is not supported, the effects are as follows: R The multimedia system generates a call list
independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle. R The call list is not synchronized with the call lists in the mobile phone. Making a call from the call list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # Select an entry. The call is made. Calling up additional options in the call list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone # Select + Recent Calls. # For previously stored contacts: select r in the line of an entry. The search results are displayed.
Apple CarPlay®
Overview of Apple CarPlay®
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone® functions can be used via the multime- dia system using Apple CarPlay®. They are oper- ated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri® voice control. You can activate voice control by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Apple CarPlay® to the multimedia system. The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli- cation and the services and content connected to it. Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.
Information on Apple CarPlay® When Apple CarPlay® is being used, the iPod® media source is not available for the respective iPhone®.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay® (with cable)
Requirements: R The multimedia system is equipped with the
function. R The current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is only available with an Internet connection.
# Connect the iPhone® to the ç USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable (/ page 202).
# If no other device is connected with the sys- tem via Bluetooth®: confirm the data protec- tion provisions.
# If another device is connected via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) with the system: tap on the Tap here to start Apple CarPlay for: <Mobile phone> message.
or # Select the iPhone® in the í device list
under the application. The previous connection via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) is disconnected. The device newly connected via cable is active.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection pro- visions A message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start.
198 Multimedia system
Exiting Apple CarPlay® # Press the ò button. % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed full-
screen before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® in the main menu.
Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay® (wireless)
Requirements: R The multimedia system is equipped with the
function. R The current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The device is "visible" for other devices. R There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Apple CarPlay®.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select í. # Select Connect New Device.
The available iPhone® is shown.
Connecting a mobile phone # Select the iPhone®. # Select Start Apple CarPlay. % It is possible at any time to switch between
connection via Bluetooth® or via Apple Car- Play® (wireless) in the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection pro- visions A message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start. % When the Apple CarPlay® connection is
active, you can switch Start Automatically on or off.
Exiting Apple CarPlay® # Press the ò button. % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the applica-
tion starts in the background when reconnec- ted. You can call up Apple CarPlay® in the main menu. Calling up Apple CarPlay® sound settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Smartphone 5 Apple CarPlay 5Z # Select sound settings. Ending Apple CarPlay® # To end the connection of Apple CarPlay® (cable): disconnect the connection via the connecting cable between the iPhone® and multimedia system. # To end the connection of Apple CarPlay® (wireless): de-authorize the iPhone® in the í device list under the application. % Regardless of whether the connection is via cable or wireless, Freightliner Sprinter rec- ommends disconnection only when the vehi- cle is stationary.
Android Auto Android Auto overview
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor- mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica- tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating system on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or voice control. You can activate the voice control by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Multimedia system 199
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec- ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli- cation and the services and content connected to it.
Information on Android Auto While using Android Auto, various functions of the multimedia system, for example the media source Bluetooth® audio, are not available.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wired)
Requirements: R The multimedia system is equipped with the
function. R The current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R There is an Internet connection for the full range of functions for Android Auto.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5 Start Android Auto # Connect the mobile phone to the USB port on
the multimedia system using a suitable cable (/ page 202). # If no other device is connected with the sys- tem via Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wire- less): confirm the data protection provisions. # If another device is connected via Bluetooth®, Android Auto (wireless) or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) with the system: tap on the Tap here to start Android Auto for:<Mobile phone> message. or # Select the device in the í device list under the application. All existing device connections via USB, Blue- tooth®, Android Auto (wireless) or Apple Car- Play® (wireless) are disconnected. The device newly connected via cable is active. % If an Android Auto application is active, you can call up this active application using the z or % application buttons.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection pro- visions % The first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. For the initial start of the application: a message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start.
Returning to the main menu # Press the ò button. % If you use both the wired as well as wireless
Android Auto function, observe that a wire- less connection may be established when the device is next connected using Bluetooth® or after starting the multimedia system. If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore- ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto (wireless)
Requirements: R The multimedia system is equipped with the
function. R The current version of your device's operating
system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The device supports the Android Auto wire- less function. R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The device is "visible" for other devices. R The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 í
Connecting a mobile phone # Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth®
(/ page 193).
Starting Android Auto # Select Start Android Auto.
200 Multimedia system
% Depending on the configuration of the device, after connecting the mobile phone via Bluetooth®, the prompt may appear in the media display asking if Android Auto should be started. The query must in that case be answered with Yes.
% It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection pro- visions A message with the data protection provisions appears. # Select Accept & Start.
Returning to the main menu # Press the ò button. % If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore-
ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Smartphone 5 Android Auto 5Z # Select sound settings.
Ending Android Auto # Disconnect the connecting cable between the
mobile phone and multimedia system. Freightliner Sprinter recommends disconnect- ing the connecting cable only when the vehi- cle is stationary.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay®
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®, cer- tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to optimize com- munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly gener- ated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica- tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi- media system is reset (/ page 192). The following vehicle status data is transmitted: R The transmission position engaged R The distinction between parked, standstill,
rolling and driving R The day/night mode of the instrument cluster
The transfer of this data is used to alter how con- tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit- uation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Media Information about media mode
Information about supported formats and data storage media
& WARNING Risk of distraction when han- dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
The multimedia system supports the follow- ing formats and data media:
Permissible file systems
FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible data carriers
USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio equipment
Supported formats:
Audio: MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV
Multimedia system 201
R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files.
R Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32bit address space).
% Observe the following notes: R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. R MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
Information on copyright protection and trademarks Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copy- right regulations and that you comply with these.
marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Tru- Volume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Overview of the media menu
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laborato- ries. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trade-
1 Previous track or fast rewind 2 Next track or fast forward 3 Album cover 4 Active media source 5 Track and artist 6 Current track number/track in playback list
and active data storage medium 7 Repeat 8 Settings 9 Device manager A Controls playback B Timeline C Categories D Random playback
202 Multimedia system
Connecting the data storage media to the multimedia system Connecting USB devices
* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera- tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices. # Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5 ª
Authorizing a new Bluetooth® audio device # Select Connect New Device.
Detected equipment is displayed in the device list. # Select an audio device. Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. # Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.
Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth® audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the
list. The connection is established.
The multimedia connection unit is located at the top center of the stowage compartment and has two type C USB ports. # Connect the USB device to the USB port. % USB hubs are not supported by the multime-
dia system. % When connecting several Apple® devices
simultaneously, pay attention to the order in which the devices are connected. The multi- media system only connects with the device that is connected first. Additional Apple® devices that are connected at the same time are only supplied with power.
Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth® audio device
Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment. R The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth®
audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
Starting media playback
A data storage medium is connected to the multi- media system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media # Select USB or Bluetooth as the media source.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media # To pause playback: select Ë. # To continue playback: select Ì. # To repeat a track: select :.
For the repeat function there are the follow- ing settings: R Select once: the active playlist is repea-
ted. R Select twice: the current track is repea-
ted. R Select three times: the repeat function
is deactivated. # To play back tracks in random order:
select 9.
Multimedia system 203
# To wind a track forwards or backwards: tap on the desired point on the timeline.
# To select the next track: select ü. # To select the previous track: select û. # To scroll through tracks quickly: press and
hold û or ü. # To show the current track list: select the
track image shown.
Additional options for setting media playback
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media
Calling up additional options # Select f.
The additional options are shown.
The following options are available: R Surprise Mix
A playlist with randomly selected tracks is created. R Add to Favorite Songs The current track is added to the favorite songs. R Remove from Favorite Songs The current track is removed from the favorite songs.
# Select an option.
Media search
Information about the search function in cat- egories Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format. Available categories with Bluetooth® audio equip- ment: R Current Tracklist
The folders and categories of the connected device are shown.
Available categories with audio files: R Current Tracklist R Playlists R Folder R Albums
R Artists R Tracks R Often Played R Most Recently Added R Music Genres R Year R Composers R Podcasts (Apple® devices) R Audiobooks (Apple® devices)
% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analyzed.
Starting a search in categories Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 5 # Select a category.
The media files are shown corresponding to the selected category, e.g. all albums will be shown for the Albums category.
Sorting results shown or playing back all media found # Select Ä. # To play back all results found in the cate-
gory: select Play All. If, for example, the album category is active, all albums found by the desired artist will be played back. # To sort results alphabetically: select Sort from A-Z. # To sort results in reverse alphabetical order: select Sort from Z-A. % The available options depend on the selected category and the connected device.
Using the keyword search Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 5 In the categories under 5 you can use the keyword search with free text input to look for content. # Select a category. # Select Search.
A keyboard for character entry appears. # Enter the term searched for.
204 Multimedia system
% The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become.
# Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search.
Switching the HD radio function on/off
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 HD FM
Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Alternatively: press the | button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected.
Radio overview
# Switch HD on or off. % HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see DTS website. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Setting the frequency band
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Swipe to the left or right on the control ele-
ment.
1 Active frequency band 2 Station logo 3 Station name or set frequency 4 Artist, title, album and radio text 5 HD radio logo 6 Options 7 Switches the HD radio function on or off 8 Mute function 9 Calls up the station list A Search
Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select 4.
The station list appears. # Select a station.
Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select 4.
Multimedia system 205
# Select è. # Enter a station name or frequency. # Select a station.
Storing radio stations Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select a radio station.
Memory slots are available in station presets # Select W. or # Press and hold on the radio station.
Replacing an entry in the station presets # Press and hold on an entry in the station pre-
sets. # Select Yes.
Editing station presets Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio
Moving stations: # Press and hold a stored station. # Select Move. # Move the station to the new position.
Deleting stations: # Press and hold a station. # Select Delete.
Replacing a station: # Press and hold a station. # Select Replace Radio Station.
Displaying emergency messages Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Z % The availability of the function is dependent
on the country. # Activate or deactivate Display Emergency
Warnings.
Displaying radio text
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio 5 Z 5 General # Activate or deactivate Display Radio Text
Information.
Sound Sound settings
Information about the sound system The sound system is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The settings, for example for the equalizer, effect the playback of all media sources.
Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound The following functions are available: R Equalizer R Balance and Fader R Auto. Volume Adjustment
# Select a sound menu.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound # Set TREBLE, MID or BASS.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources. # Activate or deactivate Auto. Volume Adjust-
ment.
Adjusting the balance/fader The availability of this function depends on the vehicle equipment. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound # Adjust the balance and fader.
206 Transporting
Notes on loading guidelines
& DANGER Risk of poisoning from exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the rear-end door is open when the engine is run- ning, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the rear-end door. # Never drive with the rear-end door
open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured objects in the vehicle
When objects are unsecured or inadequately secured, they can slip, tip over or be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. This also applies to: R Luggage or loads R Seats which have been removed and are
being transported in the vehicle in an exceptional case
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking maneuvers or abrupt changes in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about. # Before traveling, secure objects, lug-
gage or load to prevent them slipping or tipping over. # When a seat is removed, keep it prefera- bly outside the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction. # Always store objects such that they can-
not be thrown around in such situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
# Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
If you are using a roof luggage rack, please note the maximum roof load and the maximum load capacity of the roof luggage rack (/ page 285). Camera-based driving systems and the sensor functions of the inside rearview mirror may be impaired if you are transporting a load on the roof and it protrudes more than 16 in (40 cm) over the front edge of the roof. Therefore, make sure that the load does not overhang by more than 16 in (40 cm). The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the load distribution. Therefore, please observe the following notes when loading: R When transporting a load, never exceed the
permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occu- pants). The values are specified on the vehi- cle identification plate on the B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R If possible, always transport the load in the cargo compartment. R Fasten the load to the tie-down eyes and dis- tribute the load evenly among them. R Use tie-down eyes and fastening components which are suitable for the weight and size of the load.
Transporting 207
Load distribution
* NOTE Risk of damage to the floor cover- ing
Excessive point loading on the cargo com- partment floor or on the load area can nega- tively affect the driving characteristics and could damage the floor covering. # Vehicles with rear-wheel drive: dis-
tribute the load uniformly. When doing so, ensure that the overall center of gravity of the load is always as low and close to the center as possible and between the axles near the rear axle. # Vehicles with all-wheel drive: distrib- ute the load uniformly. When doing so, ensure that the overall center of gravity of the load is always as low and close to the center as possible and between the axles.
For Cargo Vans, buses and Passenger Vans: R Always transport loads in the cargo compart-
ment. R Always place the load against the seat backr-
ests of the rear bench seat. R Move large and heavy loads as far towards
the front of the vehicle as possible in the direction of travel against the rear bench seat. Store loads flush with the rear bench seat. R Always additionally secure the load with suita- ble load securing aids or tie downs. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Transport loads behind seats that are not occupied. R If the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert the seat belts crosswise into the seat belt buckle of the opposite seat belt.
Securing loads Notes on load securing
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to incorrect use of the lashing straps
The following can occur: R The tie-down eyes may detach or the lash-
ing strap may tear if the permissible load is exceeded R The load cannot be restrained
The load can slip, tip over or be flung about, striking vehicle occupants. # Always tension the lashing straps in the
proper manner and only between the described tie-down eyes. # Always use lashing straps designed spe- cifically for the loads.
% Observe the information relating to the maxi- mum loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down point. If you combine various cargo tie-down points to secure a load, always take the maximum loading capacity of the weak- est cargo tie-down point into account. During maximum full-stop braking, forces may act which can multiply the weight of the load. Always use several cargo tie-down points to distribute and spread the load. Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-down points or tie-down eyes.
Observe the Operating Instructions or the lashing strap manufacturer's instructions for the opera- tion of the lashing strap. Observe the information relating to the maximum loading capacity of the cargo tie-down points (/ page 284). As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring the following: R The load is secured against slipping, tipping,
rolling or falling off. Take usual traffic conditions as well as swerv- ing or full brake application and bad roads into account. R The applicable requirements and guidelines relating to load-securing practices are met. If this is not the case, this may constitute a punishable offense, depending on local legis- lation and any ensuing consequences. Observe country-specific laws.
208 Transporting
Make sure that the load is secure before every journey and at regular intervals during a long journey. Adjust the load securing as necessary. Information on how to secure loads correctly can be obtained from the manufacturers of the load securing aids or tie downs for load securing, for example. When securing loads, observe the following: R Fill spaces between the load and the cargo
compartment walls or wheel wells. For this purpose, use rigid load securing aids, such as chocks, wooden fixings or padding. R Attach secured and stabilized loads in all directions. Use the cargo tie-down points or tie-down eyes and the loading rails in the cargo com- partment. Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods, lock rods or lashing nets and lashing straps, which have been tested in accordance with current standards (e.g. DIN EN). Always use the cargo tie-down points closest to the load; pad sharp edges. Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should preferably be secured using the tie-down eyes.
% You can obtain tie downs tested in accord- ance with current standards (e.g. DIN EN) from any specialist company or from a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Notes on the partition Without a partition, vehicles that are approved as commercial vehicles (N1, N2) do not fulfill ISO 27956, which describes the equipment for prop- erly securing a load in delivery vehicles. If the vehicle is used to transport goods, retrofitting the partition is strongly recommended, as properly securing the load in vehicles without a partition will always be a complex operation. % Nothing may be stored in the area between
the back of the seats and the partition.
Overview of cargo tie-down points
Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van without loading rails) 1 Tie-down eyes Secure loose loads with an approved lashing net or a tarp. Always fasten the lashing net or tarp to all availa- ble cargo tie-down points. Make sure that the fas- tening hooks are secured against accidental opening. If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails in the cargo compartment floor, you can place lash- ing rods directly in front of and behind the load. The lashing rods directly absorb the potential shifting forces. Securing loads on the cargo compartment floor by lashing them down is only recommended for lightweight loads. Lay anti-slip mats under the load to assist in securing it. Installing and removing tie-down eyes # To install: slide the tie-down eye through a recess in the loading rail close to the load until the locking mechanism engages in the recess. % When you pull the locking mechanism up and out of the recess, the tie-down eye is able to move within the loading rail. Make sure that the locking mechanism is always engaged in a recess. # Check the tie-down eye for firm seating. # To remove: pull the locking mechanism up and pull the tie-down eye towards the locking mechanism and out of the loading rail through a recess.
Transporting 209
Carrier systems Information on the roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of injury due to the maxi- mum roof load being exceeded
When you place a load on the roof as well as all outer and inner attachments, the vehicle's center of gravity will rise and the familiar driv- ing characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics will change. When driving around bends, the vehicle will tilt more heavily and may react more sluggishly to steering movements. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
R The insides of the mounting rails must be free of dirt.
R Re-tighten the screws uniformly after around 300 miles (500 km).
Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you use only roof luggage racks that have been tested and approved for Freightliner Sprinter. These help to prevent vehicle damage. Have mounting rails retrofitted only at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, you could dam- age the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with mounting rails on the roof, you can install a roof luggage rack on the roof. Special fasteners (sliding blocks) are available as accessories for this purpose. These fasteners are available from any Freight- liner Sprinter service center.
Placing a load on the wheel arch Comply with the important safety notes under "Notes on loading" (/ page 206).
1 Mounting rails
Information about the maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical data" section (/ page 285). Observe the following points for assembling roof luggage racks: R Tighten the screws of the roof luggage rack to
a torque of 6.0 lb-ft (8 Nm) 7.4 lb-ft (10 Nm) in the designated sliding blocks. R The tightened screws should not touch the rails. R Ensure that the sliding blocks are not located in the areas around the plastic caps. R The sliding blocks must have the right crosssection.
# Place the objects on wheel arch 2 and lash them using tie-down eyes 1(/ page 208).
% A wheel arch may be subjected to a load of 330 lb (150 kg).
210 Maintenance and care
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message by using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified spe- cialist workshop, e.g. a Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Displaying the service due date On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board com-
puter(/ page 173)
Carrying out maintenance work regularly
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # Always observe the prescribed service
intervals. # Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor- mal vehicle use. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often than prescribed if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops R Mainly short-distance driving R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces R When the engine is often left idling for long
periods R Operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. If the vehi- cle is subjected to higher loads, the tires must be checked more frequently. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on
the Instrument Display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 210).
Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine
hood is latched.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine com- partment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
Maintenance and care 211
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Certain components in the engine compart- ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never touch the danger zone surround-
ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelry and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys- tem work under high voltage. If you touch component parts which are under voltage, you could receive an electric shock. # Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys- tem when the ignition is switched on.
Live components of the fuel injection system include the injectors, for example. Live components of the ignition system include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R Spark plug connectors R Diagnostic socket
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap & WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind- shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood.
# Park the vehicle in a safe location and on a level surface if possible.
# Switch off the engine. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. & WARNING Risk of injury when the hood
is opened When you open the hood, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Before releasing the hood, ensure that
the support is firmly seated in the holder. # Open the hood only when there is noone in the hood's range of movement.
212 Maintenance and care
# To open: pull handle 1 to release the hood. # Reach into the gap and push the hood catch
handle upwards. # Open the hood and hold it up.
# Take support 1 from the bracket on the hood and pull it downwards.
# Insert the support into the bracket below 2. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Cloths or other flammable materials left in the engine compartment by mistake could ignite upon coming into contact with hot sec- tions of the engine or exhaust system. # Ensure that there are no flammable external materials in the engine com- partment or on the exhaust system after maintenance work has been con- ducted. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the engine hood When opening or closing the engine hood, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine hood's range of movement. # Only open or close the engine hood when there are no persons in the engine hood's range of movement.
* NOTE Damage to the hood Pushing the hood closed with your hands could damage it. # To close the hood, let it drop from the
specified height.
# To close: lift the hood slightly. # Move support 1 to the bracket on the hood
and apply light pressure to engage it. # Lower the hood and let it drop from a height
of approximately 0.5 ft (15 cm). # If it is still possible to lift the hood a little,
open the hood again and let it drop from a height of approximately 0.7 ft (20 cm) until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level with the onboard computer
Requirements: R The vehicle is level during the measuring
process. R The hood is closed. R Depending on the driving profile, the oil level
can be displayed only after a driving time of up to 30 minutes and only when the ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level
You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: # Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement
of the oil level not yet possible. Repeat the query after driving for a maximum of 30 minutes. # Engine Oil Level OK and the bar showing the oil level on the multifunction display is green and lies between "MIN" and "MAX": the oil level is OK. # Engine Oil Level Drive until the engine is warm.: warm up the engine to operating tem- perature. # Engine Oil Level Correct Measurement Only if Vehicle Is on Level Ground: park the vehicle on a level surface. # Engine Oil Level Add 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar showing the oil level on the multifunction dis-
Maintenance and care 213
play is orange and lies below "MIN": add 1.0 US qt (1 l ) of engine oil. # Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar showing the oil level on the multifunction display is orange and lies above "MAX": drain off excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On: switch on the ignition in order to check the engine oil level. # Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: the sen- sor is defective or not connected. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavailable: close the hood. % Vehicles with cold oil level displays: the oil level is automatically displayed on the multi- function display after the vehicle has been non-operational for an extended period. If it is not possible to measure the engine oil level, a message to that effect will appear. % The result of the electronic measurement always takes precedence over other meas- urements.
Checking the engine oil level with an oil dip- stick
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
% For oil level measurement, Mercedes-Benz prioritizes electronic measurement while driving with the display in the instrument cluster. If there is a discrepancy between electronic oil level measurement and dipstick method, the result of the electronic oil level measurement is given precedence.
% Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level measurement. For this reason, the oil pipe is closed with a plug. The oil dipstick can be purchased from your authorized Service Partner as special equipment.
Requirements: R The vehicle is on a level surface. R The engine is turned off and the ignition key
is kept out of range. R The engine is at operating temperature. R Wait five minutes after a short drive for the
engine oil to drip off.
Oil dipstick (example, if purchased) # Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe it off. # Slowly insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
guide tube as far as it will go and pull it out after three seconds. R Oil level OK: the oil level is between the
MIN and the MAX mark. R Oil level too low: the oil level is at the MIN
mark or below. # If the oil level is too low, add approx.
1.0 US qt (1 liter) engine oil. # If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Adding engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com- partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
214 Maintenance and care
& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You could come into contact with hot
gases. R You could come into contact with other
hot, escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo- nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage due to incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additive
# Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with specifications deviating from those required for the prescribed service intervals.
Freightliner Sprinter recommends using origi- nal or tested replacement and service parts. # Do not change the engine oil or oil filter
in order to set change intervals longer than those prescribed. # Do not use any additive.
# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil.
* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
OM651 engine
OM642 engine
Maintenance and care 215
M274 engine # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # Add engine oil. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again. Check using the on-
board computer (/ page 212), check with the oil dipstick (/ page 213).
Checking the coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine com- partment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
# Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine com- partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. # Let the engine cool down before open-
ing the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres-
sure. Allow the engine and the engine cooling system to cool down before checking the coolant level or refilling coolant. * NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant
If coolant gets on painted surfaces, the paint- work can be damaged. # Add coolant carefully. # Remove spilled coolant. Checking the coolant level
Example: coolant expansion reservoir # Park the vehicle on an even surface. # Open the hood (/ page 210).
216 Maintenance and care
# Slowly turn coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.
# Turn coolant expansion reservoir cap 1 fur- ther and remove it.
# Check the coolant level. There is enough coolant in coolant expansion reservoir if the coolant reaches the MAX mark.
Adding coolant # Refill the coolant to the MAX mark on the
coolant expansion reservoir.
Only use coolant approved by Freightliner Sprinter to avoid damaging the engine cooling system. # Replace coolant expansion reservoir cap 1
and tighten in a clockwise direction. # Start the engine. # After approximately five minutes, switch off
the engine again and allow it to cool down. # Check the coolant level again and add coolant
if necessary. % Observe additional coolant information
(/ page 278).
Filling up the windshield washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
& WARNING Danger of burns when open- ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine com- partment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com-
partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer fluids that
are also suitable for use on plastic sur- faces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter- Fit.
Adding washer fluid
Washer fluid reservoir (example)
Maintenance and care 217
# Pre-mix the washer fluid in the correct mixing ratio in a container.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface and secure it against rolling away (/ page 137).
# Open the hood (/ page 210). # Pull the cap of the washer fluid container 1
upwards by the tab. # Pour in the pre-mixed washer fluid. # Press cap 1 onto the filler opening until it
audibly engages. # Close the hood (/ page 210). % Mix the washer fluid with windshield washer
concentrate all year round. Comply with the information about windshield washer fluid in the technical data (/ page 279). % Comply with the further information about windshield washer fluid (/ page 279)
If you have to carry out any work in the engine compartment, touch only the following compo- nents: R Hood R Engine oil filler opening cap R Washer fluid reservoir cap R Coolant expansion reservoir cap
Cleaning the water drain valve of the air intake box
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Certain components in the engine compart- ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off. # Never touch the danger zone surround-
ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelry and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart- ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
# Open the hood (/ page 210). # Remove dirt from water drain valve 2 of air
intake box 1.
Draining the fuel filter
& WARNING Danger of fire and explosion due to fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # It is essential to avoid fire, open flames,
smoking and creating sparks. # Before filling up, switch off the engine,
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. There is a risk of fire and explosion due to contact with hot component parts. # Allow the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem to cool down.
218 Maintenance and care
* NOTE Engine damage due to delayed drainage of the fuel filter
Vehicles with a diesel engine: delayed drainage of the fuel filter can lead to engine damage. If the ! indicator lamp lights up, drain the fuel filter immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution due to disposal in a non-envi- ronmentally responsible manner # Dispose of the water/fuel mixture in an environmentally responsible manner.
Engine OM642
# Switch off the engine. # Open the hood (/ page 210). # Place a suitable collecting pan beneath drain
hose 2. # Switch on the ignition. # Open drain screw 1 until the water/fuel
mixture emerges from drain hose 2. # Close drain screw 1 as soon as around
0.2 qt (0.2 liter) of the water/fuel mixture has been collected. After 30 seconds, the electrical fuel pump automatically stops the discharge of the water/fuel mixture. # After draining, switch off the ignition. # Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixture in an environmentally responsible manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. # Check that drain screw 1 has been closed. If the engine is running while drain screw 1 is open, you will lose fuel through drain hose 2. # Close the hood (/ page 210). # ! The indicator lamp does not go out after draining: drain the fuel filter again. # ! The indicator lamp does not go out after the second draining: consult a quali- fied specialist workshop.
Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have the fuel filter drained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine OM651 rear wheel drive
# Park the vehicle in a safe location and secure it against rolling away.
# Switch off the auxiliary heating (/ page 105).
Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.
Maintenance and care 219
* NOTE Risk of damage to the paintwork and plastic components
If you wash your vehicle in Touchless Auto- matic Car Wash systems that use special cleaning agents, the cleaning agents used can damage the paintwork or plastic components of the vehicle. # Do not wash the vehicle in Touchless
Automatic Car Wash systems that use special cleaning agents.
Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, fold in the outside mirrors and remove any additional antennas. Otherwise, the outside mir- rors, antennas or the vehicle itself could be dam- aged. Make sure any additional antennas are re-instal- led and that the outside mirrors are fully folded out again when you leave the automatic car wash. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing before using an automatic car wash: R the side windows and the sliding window are
completely closed. R the blower for ventilation and heating is
switched off. R the windshield wiper switch is in position g.
If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. % Removing the wax from the windshield and
the wiper rubbers after washing the vehicle, will help avoid smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Notes on use of a power washer
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex- pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-
spray nozzles.
# Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately.
Never use a power washer in the vehicle interior. The pressurized water created by the power washer and the associated spray could cause considerable damage to the vehicle. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol- lowing when using a power washer: R Maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle when using 25° flatspray nozzles and concentrated-power jets or 27.6 in (70 cm) when using round-spray noz- zles and observe the information in the equip- ment manufacturer's operating instructions. R Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light bulbs and ventilation slits. R Maintain a minimum distance of 19.7 in (50 cm) for a rear view camera.
Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, for example in many countries washing by hand is only allowed at specially designated wash bays. In this case, make sure that a specially designated wash bay is used for washing by hand. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water and a
soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully spray the vehicle with water and dry off with a leather cloth. Be careful not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grilles. The blower should be switched off while doing so. # Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- work. At the onset of winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible.
Notes on care of paint and matte finish
* NOTE Paintwork damage and corrosion due to inadequate care
Failure to promptly and thoroughly remove dirt from bird droppings or other residue
220 Maintenance and care
could result in paintwork damage and corro- sion at a later date. # Clean dirt off paint and matte finish
thoroughly and as soon as possible.
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid paintwork damage.
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
then wash off. R Bird droppings: soak with water and then
wash off. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro- leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a moist cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not affix stickers, films or similar. R Remove dirt as soon as possible.
Matte finish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Use only automatic car washes that meet cur-
rent technological standards. R Do not use a wash program that ends with a
hot wax treatment in automatic car washes.
R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish- ing products, or gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on the care of vehicle parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
& WARNING Risk of burning from the tail- pipe or tailpipe trim
The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these car parts, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful when in
the vicinity of the tailpipe and tailpipe trims and supervise children very closely when in this area. # Before any contact, allow the car parts to cool down.
Observe the following notes:
Notes on cleaning and care
Preventing damage to the vehicle
Wheels/rims
Windows Wiper blades
Use water and acid-free wheel cleaner.
Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Freightliner Sprinter . Carefully clean the folded-away wiper blades with a damp cloth.
R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. Otherwise, wheel bolts and brake components may be damaged.
R To avoid corrosion of brake discs and brakepads, drive for a few minutes after cleaning before parking the vehicle. The brake discs and brake- pads warm up and dry out.
Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or sol- vent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Maintenance and care 221
Exterior lighting Sensors Rear view camera and 360° Cam- era Trailer hitch
Sliding door
Steps
Aluminum dropsides
Notes on cleaning and care
Preventing damage to the vehicle
Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and Only use cleaning agents or cloths suita- mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. ble for plastic lenses.
Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a power washer, keep a min- imum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean Do not use a power washer. the camera lens.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease
the ball head. R Observe the notes on care in the
trailer hitch manufacturer's operat- ing instructions.
Do not clean the ball neck with a power washer or solvent.
R Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of the contact plates and contact pins of the sliding door.
R Clean the contact plates and contact pins with a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth.
Do not oil or grease the contact plates and the contact pins.
R Clean the electrically operated steps and their housing with a power washer.
R After cleaning, spray the lateral guides with silicone spray.
R Clean the steps in the bumper with a power washer.
Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.
R Brush down the aluminum dropsides Do not use abrasive cleaning agents to with water and a neutral or mild alka- clean the dropsides. line cleaning agent.
Notes on interior care
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol- vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol- vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.
# Do not use any care or cleaning prod- ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.
222 Maintenance and care
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.
* NOTE Damage to property due to incor- rect leather care
The steering wheel, seat covers and other parts of the vehicle interior can be made of leather. Leather becomes brittle and can crack if it is incorrectly cared for or cleaned. # If it gets dirty, thoroughly wipe it with a
damp cloth (water or mild soapy water)
or use leather care agents or cleaners that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Then wipe it over again with a dry cloth. # Do not use a microfiber cloth for clean- ing. # Do not soak the leather. # Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes.
Observe the following notes:
Seat belts
Display Plastic trim Real wood and trim ele- ments Headliner Cloth seat covers
Imitation leather seat covers
Notes on cleaning and care Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
Clean the surface carefully with a micro- fiber cloth and LC/TFT display care product. R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use care product
recommended for Freightliner Sprinter . R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use care product recommended for Freightliner Sprinter . Clean with a soft brush or dry shampoo. Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfiber cloth and a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot-clean. Use cleaning and care products recom- mended for Freightliner Sprinter . Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soapsuds solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot-clean. Use cleaning and care products recom- mended for Freightliner Sprinter .
Preventing damage to the vehicle R Do not use chemical cleaning
agents. R Do not dry the seat belt by heating
above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sun- light. R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Do not use any other agents. R Do not affix stickers, films or similar. R Do not allow to come into contact with cosmetics, insect repellent and sun creams. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Do not use any oil-based cleaning and care products.
Do not use a microfiber cloth. Do not use any oil-based cleaning and care products.
Maintenance and care 223
Steering wheel and gear or selector lever Pedals and floor mats Vehicle inte- rior
Notes on cleaning and care Clean with a damp cloth.
Clean with a damp cloth. Clean with a damp cloth.
Curtains
The curtains may only be dry cleaned.
Preventing damage to the vehicle
Do not use any cleaning and care prod- ucts. R Do not use a power washer. R Allow the vehicle interior to dry com-
pletely after cleaning. R Do not allow liquids to penetrate into
gaps or cavities. Do not wash the curtains.
224 Breakdown assistance
Emergency Removing the safety vest # Remove the safety vest from the storage com-
partment in the driver's door. % Safety vests can also be stored in the storage
compartments of the rear doors and the codriver door.
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry-clean 7 This is a class 2 vest The safety vest only fulfills the legally required standards if it is the correct size and is com- pletely closed. Replace the safety vest if: R Damaged or if the reflex strips are dirty R The maximum permitted number of washes is
exceeded R The safety vest's fluorescence has faded Removing the first-aid kit (soft sided) The first-aid kit (soft sided) is located in the stow- age compartment in the front passenger door. # Remove first-aid (soft sided) kit from the
stowage compartment. Removing the warning lamp The warning lamp is located in the stowage com- partment in the front-passenger door. # Remove the warning lamp from the stowage
compartment.
Emergency Call System Information on the emergency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Emergency Call System ("eCall"). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way repla- ces assistance provided from dialing 911. eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the mobile phone net- work provider. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Freightliner Sprinter vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol- lows (/ page 225). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Freightliner Sprinter Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication module. Deactivation of this module prevents the acti- vation of any and all Mercedes PRO connect services. After the deactivation of eCall, auto- matic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto- matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Freightliner Sprinter dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans- ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Freight- liner Sprinter dealership to reactivate the sys- tem.
Emergency Call System
eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an acci- dent site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. The emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 225) or manually (/ page 225). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Breakdown assistance 225
Message in the media display: SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall is not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. % If an emergency call is unavailable or mal-
functioning, a message to this effect also appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
If restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices have been activated after an accident, eCall may automatically initiate an emergency call. When the emergency call is made: R A voice connection is made to the Freightliner
Sprinter emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Freightliner Sprinter emergency call center. The Freightliner Sprinter emergency call cen- ter can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call center.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto- matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services: # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu- lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long.
When the emergency call is made: R A voice connection is made to the Freightliner
Sprinter emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Freightliner Sprinter emergency call center. The Freightliner Sprinter emergency call cen- ter can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call center. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator.
If no connection can be made to the emergency services: # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentional emergency call # Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress the button for several sec- onds.
Transmitted data with the emergency call system
Data transmitted by the eCall includes but is not limited to: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route
( (a few hundred meters ) before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Estimated number of people in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU- SA's Customer Assistance Center.
226 Breakdown assistance
For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter-
mined R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established
Flat tire Notes on flat tires
& WARNING Risk of an accident when driv- ing with a flat tire
A flat tire greatly impairs driving characteris- tics, as well as steering and braking. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Remove the flat tire and install the
spare wheel or consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, in the event of a flat tire you have the following possibil- ities: R You can call breakdown assistance via the
breakdown assistance call button in the over- head control panel (/ page 181). R Change the wheel (/ page 259).
Battery Notes on the starter battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat- tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys- tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi- lar incident, contact a qualified special- ist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 142) R Further information on ESP®(/ page 143)
Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified special- ist workshop, e.g. an Freightliner Sprinter service center. If you want to replace the battery yourself, observe the following information: R Only replace a faulty battery with a battery
which fulfills the vehicle's specific require- ments. R Carry over detachable parts such as the vent hose or terminal cover from the battery which is to be replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that the detachable parts are con- nected in the same way as before.
For safety reasons, Freightliner Sprinter recom- mends that you only use batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Freight- liner Sprinter. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in an accident.
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec- trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.
Breakdown assistance 227
# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat- tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jump-starting. & WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat- teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to con- nect the battery. Observe the safety notes and protective meas- ures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a safety mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte acid splashes off with clean water. If necessary, seek medi- cal advice. Wear eye protection.
Keep children at a safe distance.
Observe these Operating Instructions.
If you do not use the vehicle for a long period or drive short distances regularly: R Connect the battery to a charger recommen-
ded for Freightliner Sprinter. R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to dis-
connect the battery
Starting assistance and charging the starter battery # Always use the jump-start connection in the
engine compartment for starting assistance and when charging the battery. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over-
voltage When charging using a battery charger with- out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro-
gen gas igniting There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
228 Breakdown assistance
# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con- necting and disconnecting the battery.
# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect battery terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con- necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat- tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo- sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventilation. # Do not lean over a battery.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro- zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera- tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg- ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis- tance.
If the warning/indicator lamps do not light up in the instrument display around or below freezing point, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, observe the following points: R Do not give the vehicle starting assistance or
charge the battery R The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be reduced drastically R The starting behavior may deteriorate, partic-
ularly at low temperatures R It is recommended that you have a thawed
battery checked at a qualified specialist work- shop
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
When jump-starting and charging the batteries, observe the following points: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charging
cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cables/charging cables are connected to the battery/jumpstart connection point R The jumper cables/charging cables must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running R Make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged R Avoid fire and open flames R Do not lean over a battery R When charging: only use a battery charger that has been tested and approved by Freight- liner Sprinter and read the operating instruc- tions for your charger before charging the batteries
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided
using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch each other R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only per-
form starting assistance when the engine and exhaust system are cold
# Vehicles with a battery main switch: check whether the battery main switch is inserted (/ page 119).
# Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the transmission to position j. # Vehicles with manual transmission: shift
to neutral. # Switch off the ignition and all electrical con-
sumers.
Breakdown assistance 229
# Open the hood (/ page 210).
% Right-hand drive vehicle: the jump-start connection may be on the opposite side.
# Remove the cover from the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery.
# First connect a red POSITIVE terminal clamp 1 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the POSITIVE terminal of the donor battery.
# With second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 of the starting assistance/charging cable, slide the red protective cap on jump-start connection 3 back with a clockwise turn.
# Attach second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 to the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start connection 3.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and let it run at idle speed.
# First, connect a black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 4 of the starting assistance/charging cable to the NEGATIVE terminal of the donor battery.
# Connect the second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 of the starting assistance/charging cable to ground point 6 on your own vehicle (bare metal part in the engine compartment).
# During starting assistance: start the engine on your own vehicle.
# When charging: start the charging process. # During starting assistance: let the engine
run for a few minutes. # During starting assistance: before discon-
necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec- trical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete: # To remove the clamps of the starting assis-
tance/charging cable in reverse order: first remove second black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 5 from ground point 6 in the engine compartment, then black NEGATIVE terminal clamp 4 from the donor battery. Then remove second red POSITIVE terminal clamp 2 from the POSITIVE terminal of jump-start connection 3, followed by red POSITIVE ter- minal clamp 1 on the donor battery. The red protective cap springs back to its ini- tial position when second red POSITIVE termi- nal clamp 2 is disconnected from jump-start connection 3. You can obtain further information at a qualified specialist workshop.
Installing/removing the floor covering (vehi- cles with rear wheel drive)
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot slip and provide sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not lay multiple floor mats or carpets on top of one another.
230 Breakdown assistance
# Switch off all electrical consumers. # To remove: unscrew screws 3 and remove
trim 2. # Remove floor covering 1. # To install: insert floor covering 1 and align
it at the base of the driver's seat and at the door sill. # Put trim 2 in place and screw screws 3 back in.
Disconnecting the starter battery
* NOTE Damage to electrical assemblies Electrical assemblies could be damaged if the starter battery is disconnected while the engine is running. # Switch off the engine. Then, release the
battery clamps of the starter battery. # Always disconnect the starter battery in
the battery case in the left footwell first. Otherwise, electrical assemblies, e.g. the alternator, could be damaged.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle's electron- ics
If you do not disconnect the battery as descri- bed here, the vehicle's electronics could be damaged. # Always disconnect the starter battery in
following the sequence, and do not reverse the battery terminals under any circumstances. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics could be damaged.
% If the vehicle is expected to be parked for an extended period or out of use for longer than four weeks, observe the information on park- ing the vehicle for an extended period (/ page 141).
# Vehicles with a battery main switch: remove the main switch of the battery (/ page 120).
# Vehicles without a battery main switch: switch off all electrical consumers.
# Switch off the engine and the power supply. # Remove the floor covering (/ page 229). # Remove screws 1 and slide battery cover
2 in the direction of the arrow. The screws must protrude over the larger recesses. # Remove battery cover 2 upwards.
# First loosen and remove the negative terminal clamp on the battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the terminal.
# Remove the positive terminal clamp cover. # Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold it
up to the side, together with the prefuse box.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Breakdown assistance 231
Removing/installing the starter battery Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the starter battery
# Insert the starter battery into the battery box. # Fold down the bars of the starter battery. # Slide the starter battery into its anchorage in
the opposite direction to the direction of travel. # Insert bracket 3. # Tighten screws 2 on bracket 3 which holds the battery in place.
# Disconnect the starter battery (/ page 230). # Remove breather hose 1 with the connector
bracket from the connection on the degassing cover.
# Pull out and remove screws 2 of bracket 3 upwards.
# Slide the starter battery from its anchorage in the direction of travel.
# Fold the bars of the starter battery upwards and remove the starter battery from the bat- tery box.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the starter battery # When reconnecting the starter battery,
observe the safety measures and protection notes (/ page 227).
# Attach breather hose 1 with the connector bracket to the connection of the degassing cover.
# Reconnect the starter battery (/ page 230).
Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have the starter battery replaced at a qualified special- ist workshop, e.g. a Freightliner Sprinter service center. If you want to replace the starter battery yourself, observe the following notes: R Always replace a defective starter battery
with a starter battery which meets the spe- cific requirements of the vehicle. R Carry over detachable parts such as the vent hose, elbow fitting or terminal cover from the starter battery to be replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con- nected to its original opening on the battery side. Install the existing or newly supplied stop plugs. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that the detachable parts are con- nected in the same way as before.
232 Breakdown assistance
Disconnecting the auxiliary battery in the engine compartment
* NOTE Damage to electrical assemblies Electrical assemblies could be damaged if the starter battery is disconnected while the engine is running. # Switch off the engine. Then, release the
battery clamps of the starter battery. # Always disconnect the starter battery in
the battery case in the left footwell first. Otherwise, electrical assemblies, e.g. the alternator, could be damaged.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle's electron- ics
Incorrectly disconnecting the auxiliary battery can cause damage to the vehicle's electron- ics. # Always disconnect the auxiliary battery
as described in the following sequence. Do not reverse the battery terminals under any circumstances.
# Observe the safety measures and protection notices when disconnecting the auxiliary bat- tery (/ page 227).
# Switch off all electrical consumers. # Switch off the engine and the power supply. # Open the hood (/ page 210). # First loosen and remove the negative terminal
clamp on the auxiliary battery so that the clamp is no longer in contact with the termi- nal. # Remove the positive terminal clamp cover. # Loosen and remove the positive terminal clamp.
Towing or tow-starting Overview of permissible towing methods In the event of a breakdown, Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have the vehicle transpor- ted instead of towed.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow- ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear-wheel drive: if there is a malfunc- tion, the automatic transmission may be locked in position j. If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 235). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.
Permissible towing methods
Breakdown assistance 233
Both axles on the ground
Vehicles with auto-
Yes, no further than
matic transmission and 31 miles (50 km) at
rear-wheel drive
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vehicles with all-wheel drive
Yes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised Yes, no further than 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) No
Rear axle raised
Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock No
To tow with a raised axle: towing should be per- formed by a towing company.
Towing away the vehicle with both axles on the ground # Observe the notes on permissible towing
methods (/ page 232). # Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged. When the battery is discharged, the following sit- uations occur: R The engine will not start. R It is not possible to release or apply the elec-
tric parking brake. R Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long dis- tances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear wheel drive: if there is a malfunc- tion, the automatic transmission may be locked in position j.
If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 235). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to towing away a vehicle that is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the following situations may arise: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may even
tip over.
# Before tow starting or towing away a vehicle, check that it does not exceed the permissible gross weight.
If a vehicle is towed or tow started, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the vehicle's permissible gross
mass can be found on the vehicle identifica- tion plate (/ page 269). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's or co-driver door. Other- wise, the automatic transmission automati- cally shifts to position j. # Install the towing eye (/ page 236). # Secure the towing device.
234 Breakdown assistance
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec- tion of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
% You can also secure the towing device to the trailer hitch.
* NOTE Damage and risk of accident when towing with a tow rope
There is a risk of an accident if you do not observe safety and protective measures when towing using a tow rope. Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: # Secure the tow rope on the same side
on both vehicles, if possible. # Make sure the tow rope does not
exceed the legally prescribed length. # Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g.
with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. # Observe the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance that ensures the tow rope does not sag. # Do not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. Otherwise, you could dam- age the vehicle.
# Deactivate automatic locking (/ page 50). # Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 64). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 147). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to i. # Release the parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi- ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon- ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys-
tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signifi- cantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle away.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Towing a vehicle with the front or rear axle raised
* NOTE Damage when the ignition is switched on
If you leave the ignition switched on when towing the vehicle with the front or rear axle raised, ESP® actuation can damage the brake system. # The ignition must be switched off.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect removal or installation of the propeller shafts
When installing the propeller shafts, they can be damaged if you do not use new screws. Always use new screws when installing the propeller shafts. Only have the propeller shafts installed or removed by qualified, skilled personnel.
Breakdown assistance 235
% If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle at the front axle and if the rear axle is dam- aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission and rear wheel drive: if there is a malfunc- tion, the automatic transmission may be locked in position j. If the automatic transmission cannot be shif- ted to position i, transport the vehicle (/ page 235). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.
# Observe the notes on permissible towing methods (/ page 232).
# The propeller shafts to the drive axles must be removed if the maximum permissible tow- ing distance is exceeded.
# Only have the propeller shafts installed or removed by qualified, trained personnel.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to i.
# Release the parking brake. # Switch off the ignition.
Loading the vehicle for transport
# Observe the notes on permissible towing methods (/ page 233, 234).
# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to load the vehicle.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position i.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: in the event of damage to the electrics, the automatic transmission may be locked in position j. To shift to position i, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 227).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
shift the automatic transmission to position j. # Use the parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with all-wheel drive/vehicles with automatic transmission
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi- cle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to improper loading
An all-wheel drive vehicle may be damaged if it is tilted, pushed or moved while being loa- ded using a hydraulic platform. # When loading a vehicle with all-wheel
drive, the vehicle should only be moved and positioned by its own power. # The vehicle and the surface it is posi- tioned on should no longer be moved when the key is removed or if the door is open. Towing eye storage location The towing eye is located in the vehicle tool kit in the front-passenger footwell (/ page 237).
236 Breakdown assistance
Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the front towing eye
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi- cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc- ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
# Press the top of the cover and remove the cover.
# Screw in towing eye 1 clockwise to the stop and tighten.
Removing the front towing eye # Unscrew towing eye 1 counter-clockwise. # Insert the cover with the tabs at the top and
push in at the bottom until the cover engages.
Tow starting vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans- mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
# Do not tow start vehicles with automatic transmission.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa- ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
Rear towing eye (vehicles with passenger vehicle approval) % Rear towing eye 2 is permanently attached
to the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems could be damaged by incorrect fuses. # Only use fuses which have been
approved by Freightliner Sprinter and which have the correct fuse rating.
The electrical fuses in your vehicle switch off defective circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- nents on the circuit and their functions will cease to operate.
Breakdown assistance 237
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of an equivalent specification, which you can deter- mine by the color and fuse rating. The fuse allo- cation chart and further information on the elec- tric fuses and relays can be found in the "Fuse allocation chart" supplement.
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor- rectly on the fuse box.
If the new fuse which has been inserted also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure of the following before replacing a fuse: R the vehicle is secured such that it does not
roll away R all electrical consumers are switched off R the ignition is switched off The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
(/ page 237) R fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat
(/ page 237)
Opening the fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat
# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 on the cover.
# Remove the cover. # To close: press the cover firmly into the seat
base until fasteners 1 clip in. Opening and closing the fuse box in the codriver's footwell Opening the fuse box # Unlocking and removing the stowage com-
partment cover in the co-driver's footwell (/ page 238).
Example: vehicle tool kit insert # Lift the insert at marked positions 1. # Pull the insert out of clips 2. Closing the fuse box # Slide the insert into clips 2. # Close the insert by pressing on marked posi-
tions 1. # Put on the stowage compartment cover in the
co-driver's footwell and lock it (/ page 238).
Vehicle tool kit Information on the vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage com- partment in the footwell on the co-driver side (/ page 238). The vehicle tool kit contains: R A towing eye R A screwdriver with Torx®, Phillips and slotted
heads
238 Breakdown assistance
The vehicle tool kit may also contain the follow- ing, for example: R An open-end wrench R A wheel wrench R A release tool for the park pawl R A plug-in blade R A socket wrench R Tool for unlocking the lockable DEF filler cap
Unlocking and removing the stowage com- partment cover
Removing the vehicle tool kit
Example: vehicle tool kit insert
# Raise the insert at marked points 1. # Pull the insert out of clips 2.
Storing the vehicle tool kit # Slide the insert into clips 2. # Close the insert by pressing on marked points
1.
# Remove the rubber mat from the frontpassenger footwell.
# To unlock: turn the quick-release fastener 1 counter-clockwise to position 1.
# Slightly raise and pull out the cover.
Inserting and locking the cover # Slide in the cover and press it downwards. # Press down the quick-release fastener 1
until it engages. # To lock: turn the quick-release fastener 1
clockwise to position 2.
Hydraulic jack Information on the hydraulic jack
The hydraulic jack is located in side compartment 1 above the co-driver door step. Vehicles with more than 18 seats
Breakdown assistance 239 # Pull out the holder completely and place it on
the step.
Hydraulic jack 1 is located behind the last bench seat on the right. The jack has a maximum weight of 16.5 lbs (7.5 kg) depending on the vehicle's equipment. You will find the maximum load capacity of the jack stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Jack maintenance: R Clean and grease all moving parts after use. R Extend and retract the pistons fully every six
months.
Removing the pump lever rod and the jack
Requirements: R The co-driver door is open.
# Remove jack 2 and the pump lever rod. # To close: press the cover firmly so that fas-
teners 1 engage.
Vehicles with more than 18 seats Requirement: R The right-hand rear-end door is open.
# To open: press down and unclip fasteners 1 on the cover.
# Remove the cover.
# Open clasps 2 on jack 1, loosen the straps and remove the jack.
# Open clasp 2 on pump lever rod 3, loosen the straps and remove the pump lever rod.
# To store: collapse pump lever rod 3 and place it along with jack 1 in the loosened straps, and tighten clasps 2 to close.
240 Wheels and tires
Information on noise or unusual driving characteristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual driving characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate damage to the wheels or tires. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check if wheels and tires have been damaged or are no longer functioning properly. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual driving characteristics. If no signs of damage can be detected, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of accident from dam- aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. # Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can lead to a loss of tire pressure. Look out for the following types of damage, for example: R Cuts in the tires R Punctures in the tires R Tears in the tires R Bulges on tires R Deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning because tire tread is too low
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire traction. The tire tread will no longer be able to dissipate water. This increases the risk of hydroplaning on wet road surfaces, particularly when traveling at an inappropriate speed.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tire tread. # Regularly check the tire tread depth and
the condition of the tire tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tread depth for use: R In summer: â in (3 mm) R In winter: ãin (4 mm) # For safety reasons, have the tires replaced before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. Conduct the following checks regularly on all wheels, at least once a month or as required, e.g. before a long journey or when driving off-road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 242) R Check the valve caps Valves must be protected from moisture and dirt with valve caps specifically approved by Freightliner Sprinter for your vehicle. R Visually inspect the tread depth and the tire tread across the whole tire width For use in summer, the minimum tread depth is â in (3 mm) and for use in winter ã in (4 mm).
Markings 1 show in which places the bar indica- tors (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible as soon as the tread depth is approximately á in (1.6 mm).
Information on driving with summer tires At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) Summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Freightliner
Wheels and tires 241
Sprinter cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the summer tires you have installed (/ page 253). Once you have installed the summer tires: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 242) R Restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 248)
Information on M+S tires At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use winter tires or all-season tires both are marked with M+S. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to also function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specif- ically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have installed (/ page 253). If you install M+S tires that have a lower maxi- mum permissible speed than the maximum design speed of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. You can obtain this at a qualified specialist workshop. Once you have installed the winter tires, take the following measures: R check the tire pressure (/ page 242) R restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 248)
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rectly installed snow chains
Vehicles with rear-wheel drive: if you have installed snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. # Never install snow chains on the front
wheels.
# Only install snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.
# Vehicles with twin tires: install the snow chains on the outer wheels.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable snow chains
Commercially available snow chains can come loose and damage chassis components or brake hoses. # Only install snow chains approved by
Freightliner Sprinter for these tires.
For safety reasons, Freightliner Sprinter recom- mends that you only use snow chains that have been checked and approved. You can obtain information about snow chains from any qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to snow chains breaking
If you drive too fast with snow chains, they can break, injure other persons, and damage the vehicle. # Observe the maximum permissible
speed for operation with snow chains.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information on them at a qualified specialist workshop. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehi- cle by Freightliner Sprinter, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R The snow chains must be retightened after driving approximately 0.6 miles (1 km). This is the only way to ensure the snow chains are optimally seated with clearance to adjacent components.
242 Wheels and tires
R Vehicles with all-wheel drive: install snow chains on the wheels on the rear axle. On vehicles with twin tires, install the snow chains on the outer wheels. Observe the man- ufacturer's installation instructions.
R Use snow chains only when the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered.
R Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the applicable regula- tions before installing snow chains.
R Activate all-wheel drive before driving off with snow chains (/ page 123, 124).
R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
R Vehicles with Parking Assist: do not use Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are installed.
% You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 144). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf- ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: R The tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
# Comply with the recommended tire pressure and check the tire pressure of all tires including the spare wheel regu- larly:
R at least once a month R when the load changes R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
# Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too low has the following consequences: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect handling characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the han- dling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire faults as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption
& WARNING Risk of accident from exces- sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by highway fill, pot holes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak- ing properties and the handling characteris- tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Excessively high tire pressure can result in: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage
Wheels and tires 243
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. # Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on recommended tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 249). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap .
Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 253). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to insufficient or excessive tire pressure Insufficient or excessive tire pressure short- ens the service life of the tires. # Check the tire pressure regularly, but at least every 14 days.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor: you can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. Only check tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out
of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18°F (10°C) increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table may affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor- ing systems will cause the tire valves to remain open, depending on the design. This can also result in a loss of tire pressure. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by Freight- liner Sprinter for your vehicle onto the tire valves. Notes on trailer operation The applicable tire pressure for the tires of the rear axle is always the recommended tire pres- sure for a full load. Overview of the tire pressure table The tire pressure table can be found on the seat base or on the B-pillar on the driver's side. % The data shown in the images is example data.
The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for the tires installed at the factory on this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures are valid for cold tires and different vehicle load conditions. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for those tire sizes. If the preceding tire sizes are supplemented by the + symbol, the tire pressure information following shows alternative tire pressures. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for varying weights.
244 Wheels and tires
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R16. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the side wall of the tire (/ page 253).
Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and single tires Max. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. front axle load 4101 lbs (1860 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q
Fully laden
320 kPa (3.2 bar/46 psi)
Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and single tires Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q
Fully laden
360 kPa (3.6 bar/52 psi) 1)
1) Only valid for vehicles with a long wheelbase 171 in (4350 mm) and a permissible gross weight of over 7716 lbs (3.5 t).
Rear axle tire pressures on vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and single tires Max. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. rear axle load 5357 lbs (2430 kg)
LT245/75R16 120/116Q LT245/75R16 120/116Q
Fully laden Partially laden 2)
480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi) 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 2)
2) It is only permissible to use this reduced tire pressure if it can be guaranteed by weighing the vehicle that the rear axle load of 4960 lbs (2250 kg) will not be exceeded. In case of doubt, inflate to 480 kPa (4.8 bar/70 psi).
Front axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
380 kPa (3.8 bar/55 psi)
Wheels and tires 245
Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
Max. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Max. front axle load 4630 lbs (2100 kg) 450 kPa (4.5 bar/65 psi)
Rear axle tire pressures for vehicles with all-wheel/rear wheel drive and twin tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. rear axle load up to 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi)
Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
400 kPa (4.0 bar/58 psi)
Max. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
LT215/85R16 115/112Q
Fully laden
Max. rear axle load 7937 lbs (3600 kg)
420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Front axle tire pressures on vehicles with Super Single tires Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden
Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
225/75R16C 121/120R (122L) Fully laden
Max. front axle load 4079 lbs (1850 kg) 340 kPa (3.4 bar/49 psi)
Max. front axle load 4409 lbs (2000 kg) 370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi)
246 Wheels and tires
Rear axle tire pressures on vehicles with rear wheel drive and Super Single tires Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
Max. rear axle load 7055 lbs (3200 kg)
285/65R16C 131R
Fully laden
460 kPa (4.6 bar/67 psi)
Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
Tires/disc wheel
Vehicle load
285/65R16C 131R
Fully laden
Max. rear axle load 7716 lbs (3500 kg)
520 kPa (5.2 bar/75 psi)
Be sure to also observe the following further rela- ted subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 249) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 253)
Overview of the tire pressure tables for emergency spare wheels
Tires/emergency spare wheel
225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1) 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 1)
Air pressure
370 kPa (3.7 bar/54 psi) 690 kPa (6.9 bar/100 psi)
In combination with vehicle tires 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) 285/65 R16C 131R
1) Valid to use as an emergency spare wheel on Super Single vehicles for a maximum distance of 100 km (62 mi) and a maximum permissible speed of 55 km/h (34 mph).
Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitor on sin- gle tires & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor-
rect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and then inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for these tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
Wheels and tires 247
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or sig- nal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal- functions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tem- perature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, are automatically taught-in during the first jour- ney they are used. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the multifunction display (/ page 174). If there is a substantial loss of tire pressure, a warning is issued: R Via display messages (/ page 300) R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pres- sure to the recommended cold tire pressure suit- able for the operating situation. Set the tire pres- sure for cold tires using a tire pressure gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitoring system. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val- ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 248).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If the tire pressure has been set incorrectly R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire R If there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source R If there is a change of tire size
248 Wheels and tires
Make sure to observe the following further rela- ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242) Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres- sure monitoring system Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R The current tire pressure and tire tempera-
ture of the individual wheels.
Instrument Display with color display R The current tire pressure for each wheel.
shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Make sure to observe the following further rela- ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242)
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on each of the wheels (/ page 242). R Restart the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem in the following situations: - The tire pressure has changed. - The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Scroll down in the menu.
The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multi- function display. # Confirm the message to initiate a restart. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pres- sures are within the specified range. The cur- rent tire pressures are then accepted as ref- erence values and monitored.
Instrument Display with black and white display
R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes: the teach-in process of the sys- tem is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored.
# Compare the tire pressure with the recom- mended tire pressure for the current operat- ing condition (/ page 243). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 242).
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis- play may deviate from those of the tire pres- sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those
Wheels and tires 249
Make sure to observe the following further rela- ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242)
Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres- sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio equipment approval
number
Canada
IC: 4008C-TSSRE4A Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Mexico
Model: TSSRE4A & TSSSG4G6, IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
USA
FCC ID: YGOTSSRE4A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Any changes or modifi- cation not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's author- ity to operate this equipment.
Loading the vehicle Tire and Loading Information placard
& WARNING Risk of an accident when driv- ing with an overloaded tire
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris- tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires.
# The load rating must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle. Freightliner Sprinter recommends you use the load-bearing index, which is given in the vehicle documents.
# Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
Only vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Load- ing Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv- er's side.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
% The data shown in the illustration is sample data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R The maximum number of seats indicates the
maximum number of occupants permitted to travel in the vehicle. R The maximum permissible load equals the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, the lug- gage and cargo. R The recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures apply to the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible speed of the vehi- cle. Also observe the following information: R The information about permissible weights on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 269). R The information about tire pressure on the tire pressure table .
250 Wheels and tires
Additional related subjects: R Determining the maximum load
(/ page 250). R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242).
Steps to determining the correct critical load
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in accordance with the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # Step 1: locate the statement, "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on the Tire and Loading Information placard of your vehicle. # Step 2: determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be travel- ing in your vehicle. # Step 3: subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # Step 4: the resulting figure equals the per- missible amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). # Step 5: determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- cle. For safety reasons, this weight must not exceed the cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. # Step 6:
Even if you have calculated the total load care- fully, you should still make sure that the maxi- mum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Information for this can be found on the vehicle identification plate. # Weigh the laden vehicle, including driver, pas-
sengers and load, on a suitable vehicle weigh- bridge. The measured values must not exceed the maximum permitted values listed on the vehi- cle identification plate. Additional related subjects: R Sample calculation for determining the maxi- mum load (/ page 250) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 249) R Tire pressure table R Vehicle identification plate
Sample calculation for determining the maxi- mum load
The following table has examples of how to calcu- late total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This value is for illustrative purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard (/ page 249). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard)
Example 1 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Wheels and tires 251
Step 2
Example 1
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the occupants Weight of occupants
Total weight of all occupants
5
Front: 2 Rear: 3
Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
Example 2 1 Front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)
Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling
5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 253) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (/ page 253) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is sample
data.
Information on tire quality grades According to the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards" tire manufacturers must grade their tires using the following three performance factors:
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (/ page 251)
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number (/ page 252)
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 253) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 253)
252 Wheels and tires
1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is sample
data. % This grading is not legally prescribed for Can-
ada, but specified in most cases anyway. Tread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative grading based on tread wear grade tests conducted under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. Department of Transportation test track. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade- quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include either accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. # Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. These grades relate to the
tire's ability to come to a standstill on a wet pave- ment under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government test surface made from asphalt and concrete. Temperature grade & WARNING Risk of accident from tire
overheating and tire failure The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres-
sures and regularly check the tire pres- sure of all tires including the spare wheel. # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. The temperature grades are A (highest grade), B and C. These relate to a tire's resistance to heat and its ability to release heat on a specified test wheel in laboratory tests under controlled condi- tions. Sustained high temperatures can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life. In addition, excessively high temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C refers to a performance which all passenger vehicle tires must exhibit, according to the U.S. Department of Transportation's requirements. Information on DOT and TIN (Tire Identifica- tion Number) U.S. tire regulations indicate that every tire man- ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
% The data shown in the illustration is sample data.
Wheels and tires 253
The TIN is a unique identification number for tires and consists of the following components: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol 1 indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu- facturer identification code 2 provides infor- mation about the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For fur- ther information about retreaded tires, see (/ page 256). R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Date of manufacture: date of manufacture 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd numbers indicate the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th numbers indicate the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" refers to the 32nd week of the year 2008).
Information on maximum tire pressure
% The data shown in the illustration is sample data.
Maximum permitted tire pressure 1, which is permitted for the tires must not be exceeded. Exception: when using the 225/75 R16C 121/120R (122L) tires as a spare wheel on the rear axle of Super Single vehicles with a distance limit of 62 mi (100 km) and speed limit of 34 mph (55 km/h). Information on tire characteristics
Information on maximum tire load
% The data shown in the illustration is sample data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi- ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maxi- mum permissible load. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Load- ing Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv- er's side (/ page 249).
% The data shown in the illustration is sample data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall 1 and under tire tread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
254 Wheels and tires
# Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
1 First letter(s) 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio (in percent) 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index, single tires 7 Load-bearing index, twin tires 8 Speed rating % The data shown in the illustration is sample
data. Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist work- shop. First letter(s) 1: R "LT": light truck tires in accordance with U.S.
manufacturer standards. R "C": tires for commercial usage in accordance
with European manufacturer standards. Aspect ratio (in percent) 3: The size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R": radial tire Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6 and 7: Numerical code which specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire ("91" equals, e.g. 1,356 lb (615 kg)). The tire load-bearing capacity must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the maxi- mum permissible load of the tires. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 249) R Maximum tire load (/ page 253)
Speed rating 8: Specifies the approved maximum design speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Ensure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating at a Freightliner Sprinter service center.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
L
Up to 75 mph (120 km/h)
M
Up to 81 mph (130 km/h)
N
Up to 87 mph (140 km/h)
P
Up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q
Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
Up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Summer, all-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
L M+S1 M M+S1 N M+S1 P M+S1 Q M+S1 R M+S1
Up to 75 mph (120 km/h) Up to 81 mph (130 km/h) Up to 87 mph (140 km/h) Up to 93 mph (150 km/h) Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Up to 118 mph (170 km/h)
1: or "M+S i" for winter tires. Winter tires are marked with the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.
Wheels and tires 255
Information on definitions (tires and load- ing)
Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated layers in the tire tread and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Average weight of vehicle occupants: the number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uni- form standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temper- ature characteristics. The quality grading assess- ment is made by the manufacturer in accordance with test specifications of the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen- ded tire pressure is the pressure specified for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. load and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): GAWR is the gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating. You can find the Gross Axle Weight Rating on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the Gross Vehicle Weight includes the weight of the vehicle includ- ing fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable. The Gross Vehi- cle Weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) specified on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug- gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli- cable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is speci- fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the vehicle's curb weight, weight of the accessories, maximum load and the weight of the factory installed optional equipment. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand- ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi- mum axle load for one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be correc- ted when the tires are cold. Tire pressure on cold tires: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked with the tires
256 Wheels and tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Special equipment weight: the combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). Special equipment, such as highperformance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique iden- tification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer identifi- cation code, tire size, tire type code and the man- ufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi- tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi- nal load and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires
You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor- rect wheel and tire dimensions
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. Bear the following in mind concerning wheels: R Designation R Type R Permissible wheel load R Wheel offset
Bear the following in mind concerning tires: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type R Load-bearing index R Speed rating
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed- ing the specified tire load-bearing capa- city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Freightliner Sprinter for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Otherwise, certain properties, such as han- dling characteristics, vehicle noise and con- sumption could be adversely affected. Fur- thermore, other tire size could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com-
Wheels and tires 257
ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. # Only use tires, wheels and accessories
that have been checked and recommen- ded by Freightliner Sprinter.
* NOTE Driving safety put at risk by retrea- ded tires
Retreaded tires are not checked or recom- mended by Freightliner Sprinter, as previous damage is not always detected during the retread process. Driving safety cannot, therefore, be guaran- teed. # Do not use used tires when their previ-
ous usage is unknown.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts through the use of tire-installing tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel. Tire-installing tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. Otherwise, the electronic component parts could be damaged. # Always have tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- cle by Freightliner Sprinter, or are not being used correctly, can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
Observe the following points when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Use only tires and wheels of the same type,
design (winter tires, all-season tires) and make. R Only install wheels of the same size and tread design on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size to this in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop.
R Only install tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: all installed wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors for the tire pres- sure monitoring system.
R At temperatures below 50 °F (10 °C) use win- ter tires or all-season tires with the M+S marking on all wheels. Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym- bol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road condi- tions.
R Only use tires with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the installed tires. If this is below the vehicle's maximum per- missible speed, this must be indicated in an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
For more information on wheels and tires, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. % Vehicles with twin tires:
For vehicles with twin tires with a GVW of 11,030 lbs or 12,125 lbs, only use tires with the dimension LT 215/85 R16 which have been approved for this vehicle by the manu- facturer. It is not permissible to use tires with different dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being rendered invalid. % Vehicles with single tires: For vehicles with single tires with a GVW less than or equal to 9,480 lbs, only use tires with the dimension LT 245/75 R16 which have been approved for this vehicle by the manu- facturer. It is not permissible to use tires with different dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being rendered invalid. % Vehicles with Super Single tires:
258 Wheels and tires
For vehicles with single tires with a GVW of 11,030 lbs, only use tires with the dimen- sions 225/75 R16C (FA) and 285/65 R16C (RA) which have been approved for this vehi- cle by the manufacturer. It is not permissible to use tires with different dimensions; doing so may lead to the general operating permit being rendered invalid. Also observe the following further related sub- jects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 249) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (/ page 253) R Tire pressure table R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 264)
Notes on changing wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ- ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tires have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com- ponents may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen- sions.
On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 (5,000) to 6,000 miles (10,000 km), depending on the degree of wear. Ensure that the direction of rota- tion is maintained. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so.
Size categories of wheels The determined vehicle speed is displayed in the instrument cluster and is important for control- ling the driving safety systems and driving sys- tems. The display accuracy of the speedometer and the odometer is legally prescribed. Determin-
ing the speed is dependent on the tire size or the rolling circumference of the tires. The rim diame- ter is always specified in inches. For this reason, the vehicle control units can be coded for the following wheel size categories: Wheel size category 3 R 205/75 R16C FA R 225/75 R16C FA R 285/65 R16C RA R LT245/75 R16 R LT215/85 R16
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you stay within a wheel size category when changing a tire. In this way, you avoid recoding the con- trol units.
If you change the wheel size of your vehicle, for instance when changing wheels for winter opera- tion, check it is assigned to the correct wheel size category. If the wheel size category changes, you must have your vehicle's control units reco- ded at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, the display accuracy of the speedom- eter and the odometer will be outside the legally prescribed tolerance. It may also be lower, i.e. the current road speed is then higher than the speed shown on the speedometer. If a deviation is outside the range of tolerance, driving safety systems and driving systems may be operation- ally impaired or may detect a malfunction and switch themselves off.
Information on the direction of the tires' rota- tion
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- planing. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. You may also install a spare wheel against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the spare wheel.
Wheels and tires 259
Information on storing wheels Observe the following when storing wheels: R Wheels that have been removed should be
stored in a cool, dry and, if possible, dark place. R Protect the tires from oil, grease and fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit Necessary tire-changing tools may include, for example: R Jack R Wheel wrench % You will find the maximum load capacity of
the jack stated on the adhesive label attached to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Vehicles with rear wheel drive
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j.
# Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Take the vehicle tool kit from the footwell on
the co-driver side (/ page 237).
The tire-change tool kit is located in stowage compartment 1 above the step of the co-driv- er's door and in the stowage compartment in the footwell on the co-driver side.
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The tire-change tool kit is available. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground. # Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive # Take the jack and the tire-change tool kit out
of the storage compartment (/ page 259). # If necessary, remove the hub cap. # Assemble the lug wrench extension using the
middle rod and the rod with the largest diam- eter from the three-piece jack pump lever. # Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug wrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench. # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts or bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel nuts or bolts completely. # Raise the vehicle (/ page 259).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
& WARNING Risk of injury from jack tip- ping
If you park a vehicle with air suspension, the air suspension may remain activated for up to one hour, even when the ignition is switched off. If you then raise the vehicle with the jack, the air suspension will attempt to adjust the vehicle level.
260 Wheels and tires
The jack may tip. # Press the Service button on the air sus-
pension remote control before raising the vehicle. This prevents automatic readjustment of the vehicle level and prevents it from being raised or lowered manually.
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from vehicle tip- ping
On slopes, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Never change a wheel on a slope. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup- port points.
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle is prepared for changing a wheel
(/ page 259). Only position the jack on the jack support points intended for this purpose. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Important notes on using the jack: R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has
been tested and approved by Freightliner Sprinter to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. R The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed and is not suitable for carrying out maintenance work under the vehicle. R Avoid changing a wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load bearing and non-slip underlay. R The base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jack support point. Safety instructions while the vehicle is raised: R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehi- cle. R Do not lie underneath the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors. Vehicles with rear wheel drive
Jack support points Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Otherwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack.
Wheels and tires 261
# To prepare the hydraulic jack: insert the third rod of pump lever 1 for the jack into the lug wrench extension.
# Close pressure release screw 3. # To do this, use the flattened section on pump
lever 1 to turn pressure release screw 3 clockwise to the stop.
% Do not turn pressure release screw 3 more than one or two full turns. Hydraulic fluid could otherwise escape.
# Insert pump lever 1 with the largest rod into the recess on the jack and secure by turning it clockwise.
# Place the jack vertically beneath the jack sup- port points described below.
Jack support point, rear axle (example: chassis up to 3.5 t) Jack support point, rear axle (example: Cargo Van and Passenger Van up to 4.0 t)
Jack support point, front axle
Jack support point, rear axle (vehicles 5.0 t)
262 Wheels and tires
# Place the jack beneath the jack support point.
# Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn jack spindle 2 counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
# Raise the vehicle until the tire is raised a max- imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 262).
Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 259). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts with the wheel nut wrench.
# On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove the wheel nut cover.
# Remove the wheel.
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 256).
# Observe the instructions and safety notes on changing a wheel (/ page 256).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have been approved by Freightliner Sprinter and for the wheel in question.
When you install the steel spare wheel, it is essential you use short wheel bolts for a steel wheel. Using other wheel bolts when installing the steel spare wheel may lead to damage to the brake system.
Installing a new wheel
Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 262).
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam- aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving.
1 Wheel bolt for alloy wheel 2 Wheel bolt for steel wheel
# Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfa- ces.
# Vehicles with super-wide tires: first install the adapter for the more narrow spare wheel on the wheel hub.
# Slide the wheel which is to be re-installed onto the wheel hub or the adapter for the spare wheel and push it on.
Vehicles with light alloy wheels # Use the suitable short wheel bolts for the
spare steel wheel found in the vehicle tool kit.
Wheels and tires 263
# Screw in the wheel bolts until they are fingertight.
Wheels with wheel nuts # Front wheels with wheel nut cover: press the
wheel nut cover onto the wheel nuts. # Screw in three wheel nuts over the fixing
discs of the wheel nut cover. # Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are in
the middle of the holes. # Screw in the remaining wheel nuts. # Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.
# Place the jack to one side. # Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off the
pump lever. The shortened pump lever serves as a lug wrench extension. # Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug wrench extension as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
& WARNING Risk of injury through incor- rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor- que checked immediately.
Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 262). Observe the notes on raising the vehicle (/ page 259). Vehicles with rear wheel drive Only use the middle rod and the pump lever rod with the largest diameter for the jack as a lug wrench extension. Only insert the middle rod on the lug wrench, and always as far as it will go. Otherwise, the rods could bend and deform so much that they can no longer be used as pump levers for the jack. Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you mount the spare wheel to the rear axle, do not exceed the maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and the maximum distance of 62 miles (100 km). Oth- erwise, the transmission could be damaged due to the different rotational speeds of the wheels. # Using the pump lever, slowly turn the drain
screw on the jack approximately one revolu- tion and carefully lower the vehicle.
# Tighten the wheel bolts or nuts evenly in the sequence indicated (1 to 6). Specified tightening torque: R Steel wheel bolts: 177 lb-ft (240 Nm) R Wheel nuts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm) R Alloy wheel bolts: 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
# Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in again and close the pressure release screw.
# Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jack spindle clockwise as far as it will go.
% You can now install the hub caps on steel wheels with wheel bolts. The installation pro- cedure depends on whether the hub cap acts as a trim that covers the whole wheel, or just covers the center.
# Wheel with hub cap: position the opening for the tire valve in the hub cap over the tire valve.
# Push the edge of the hub cap onto the wheel rim with both hands until it engages into place. Make sure the hub cap retaining catches engage on the steel wheel.
# Wheel with central hub cap: position the retaining lugs of the central hub cap over the wheel bolts.
264 Wheels and tires
# Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on the wheel.
# Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel bracket.
# Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport the faulty rear wheel on the load area. The rear wheel is too large for the spare wheel bracket.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
# Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to the specified tightening torque after the vehicle has been driven 31 miles (50 km).
# When using a wheel or spare wheel with a new or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel bolts or nuts retightened after approx- imately 620 miles (1,000 km) to 3,100 miles (5,000 km).
% Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor system: all installed wheels must be equip- ped with functioning sensors.
Make sure to observe the following further rela- ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 242)
Spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel and spare wheel
Spare wheel: wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type of tire correspond to the other instal- led wheels. Emergency spare wheel: wheel and/or tire dimensions as well as the type of tire are differ- ent from the wheel to be replaced. A label with a speed limit can be found on the emergency spare wheel. An installed emergency spare wheel or spare wheel changes the driving characteristics and bears risks.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
When the emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel is installed, driving characteris- tics may be severely affected. There is an increased risk of an accident. To prevent hazardous situations: # Once the spare wheel or the emergency
spare wheel has been installed, check
the tire pressure and adjust if neces- sary. # The emergency spare wheel may only be used temporarily and must be replaced with a standard wheel as soon as possible. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel. # When operating your vehicle with the emergency spare wheel installed, adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not switch off ESP®. # Snow chains must not be installed on the emergency spare wheel. # Replace the emergency spare wheel after a maximum of six years, regard- less of wear.
R When using an emergency spare wheel (which is different from the wheel to be replaced) a top speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) must not be exceeded.
R The tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel must be checked before starting a jour- ney .
R Have the emergency spare wheel replaced by a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to dam- aged spare wheel with Super Single tires
Vehicles with Super Single tires If you exceed the maximum speed or maxi- mum distance, or re-install the spare wheel, its tire could be damaged (without this being visible) and cause tire pressure loss. You could lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the spare wheel if it has not
yet been installed on the rear axle with the current tire. # If the spare wheel has been installed on the rear axle, have the tire of the spare wheel replaced after changing the wheel again. # For safety reasons, when changing a tire ensure that only the tire valve type approved for the tires is used.
Wheels and tires 265
* NOTE Damage to the transmission due to differing wheel speeds
Vehicles with Super Single tires: when you install the spare wheel on the rear axle, the transmission may be damaged by the differ- ent rotational speeds of the wheels. # When the spare wheel is installed on
the rear axle, observe the maximum speed of 34 mph (55 km/h) and a maxi- mum driving distance of 62 mi (100 km).
% It is possible, without restrictions, to use the spare wheel only on the front axle of a vehi- cle with Super Single tires.
The following should be checked regularly, partic- ularly prior to long journeys: R The secure positioning of the spare tire R The tire pressure of the spare wheel (adjust
the tire pressure if necessary) (/ page 243) R The fastenings of the spare wheel bracket
Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel. % If you have installed an emergency spare
wheel or spare wheel, the tire pressure moni- tor will not function for this wheel. The emer- gency spare wheel or spare wheel is not equipped with a sensor for monitoring tire pressure.
Installing/removing the spare wheel Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van)
Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van)
# Open the rear-end doors. # Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and
then pry off covers 1. # Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit,
unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock- wise by approximately 20 turns. # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand safety hook 3. # Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and unhook right-hand safety hook 3. # Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the ground.
266 Wheels and tires
# Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
# Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel beyond the rear edge of spare wheel carrier 4.
# Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (Cargo Van or Passenger Van) # Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. # Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve 5 on spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand safety hook 3. # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand safety hook 3. # Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. # Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook bolts 3 by turning them clockwise. # Replace and engage covers 1. # Close the rear-end doors. Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis)
Bolt covers for the safety hooks (example: Cargo Van)
# Open the rear-end doors. # Place a screwdriver into recesses 2 and
then pry off covers 1. # Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit,
unscrew the now visible bolts counter-clock- wise by approximately 20 turns. # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and unhook left-hand safety hook 3. # Assemble the pump lever for the jack and slide it into sleeve 5 on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise the spare wheel carrier with the pump lever and unhook right-hand safety hook 3. # Prepare the jack. # Place the jack beneath the corresponding jack support point. # Move the pump lever up and down until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.18 in (3 cm) off the ground. # Carefully remove the spare wheel from spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. # Install the spare wheel on the vehicle. # Lower the vehicle.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (vehicle with lowered chassis) % In the event of a flat tire, you may store the
faulty wheel inside the vehicle only. An intact wheel may be stored in the spare wheel car- rier only when the vehicle is unladen. A laden vehicle must first be raised.
Wheels and tires 267
# Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto spare wheel carrier 4, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
# Slide the pump lever for the jack into sleeve 5 on spare wheel carrier 4.
# Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand safety hook 3.
# Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and attach left-hand safety hook 3.
# Pull the pump lever out of sleeve 5. # Using the lug wrench, tighten safety hook
bolts 3 by turning them clockwise. # Replace and engage covers 1. # Close the rear-end doors.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive: removing the spare wheel (chassis)
# Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel car- rier.
# Carefully remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel carrier. The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare wheel is removed, the center of gravity changes due to the heavy weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.
Vehicles with rear wheel drive: installing the spare wheel (chassis) # Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel carrier 4. The spare wheel is heavy. When you place the spare wheel onto the spare wheel carrier, the center of gravity changes due to the weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip over. # Slide the pump lever for the jack into the sleeve on spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and attach right-hand safety hook 1. # Slightly raise the spare wheel carrier and attach left-hand safety hook 1. # Pull the pump lever out of the sleeve. # Tighten nuts 2. # Put wing nuts 3 in place and tighten them.
# Loosen wing nuts 3 manually and then remove them.
# Loosen nuts 2 as far as the thread end. # Slightly raise spare wheel carrier 4 and
unhook left-hand safety hook 1. # Assemble the pump lever for the jack and
slide it into the sleeve on the right-hand side of spare wheel carrier 4. # Raise spare wheel carrier 4 with the pump lever and unhook right-hand safety hook 1. # Slowly lower spare wheel carrier 4 to the ground. # Lift spare wheel carrier 4 slightly and pull the pump lever out of the sleeve.
268 Technical data
Notes on the technical data The given data only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further infor- mation at a qualified specialist workshop.
On-board electronics Notes on work on the engine electronics
* NOTES Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. # Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Two-way radios Installation notes for two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit- ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic- ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor-
rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
installed at a qualified specialist work- shop.
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per- mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of twoway radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of after- market radio frequency transmitting equipment) when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna con- nections intended for use with the installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements during installation.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission outputs (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table:
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band
Maximum transmis- sion output
Short wave 3 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband 74 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband 144 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio sys- tem/Tetra 380 460 MHz
10 W
Technical data 269
Frequency band
Maximum transmis- sion output
70 cm waveband 420 450 MHz
Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)
35 W 10 W
The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R Two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol- lowing frequency bands: R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm waveband R 2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate (example: USA, complete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina- tion 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code
Vehicle identification plate, vehicle identifi- cation number (VIN) and engine number Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (example: USA, incomplete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina- tion 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code
Depending on the vehicle model, the vehicle iden- tification plate is located on the seat base of the driver's seat or on the B-pillar. % The data is vehicle-specific and can differ
from that shown. Always observe the specifi- cations on your vehicle's identification plate.
270 Technical data
The vehicle identification plate may also contain the following data: R Payload R Curb weight R Number of passenger seats
VIN engraved underneath the hood
Vehicle identification plate (example: Can- ada, complete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina- tion 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code
Engraved VIN 1 is located underneath the hood. VIN below the windshield
Vehicle identification plate (example: Can- ada, incomplete vehicles) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) 3 Permissible gross mass 4 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina- tion 5 Permissible front axle load 6 Permissible rear axle load 7 Date of manufacture 8 Paint code
The maximum permissible gross vehicle mass is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- pants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
The VIN is also attached as a label on the lower section of windshield 2. Emission Control Information label
Example: Emission Control Information label
Technical data 271
Example: Vehicle Noise Emission Control Infor- mation label % The data is vehicle-specific and can differ
from that shown. Engine number The engine number is stamped onto the crank- case. You can obtain further information from a qualified specialist workshop.
Operating fluids and capacities Notes on operating fluids
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm- ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original contain-
ers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat- ing fluids.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution due to disposing of operating fluids in a non-environmentally responsi- ble manner Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF R lubricants Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ- ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
DEF R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerants
Only use products which have been approved for your vehicle by Freightliner Sprinter. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Freightliner Sprinter guarantee or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Freightliner Sprinter by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids
at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (by entering the designation) R At a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
272 Technical data
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten- tion immediately. Do not induce vomit- ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel Notes on fuel grades on vehicles with a gaso- line engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine.
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Contact a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
Only refuel using low-sulfur regular fuel with at least 87 AKI/91 RON. % E10 fuel contains an additive of up to 10%
ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You can fuel your vehicle with E10 fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. # Only refuel with the recommended fuel.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. Never refuel with the following: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal
# Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec- ommended for your vehicle.
% To ensure the longevity and performance of the engine, only unleaded regular gasoline may be used. Note that the higher quality premium grade gasoline can be refueled at any time.
If you are using drums or canisters to refuel the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before filling. This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel system due to contaminated fuel. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the fuel pump. If there is no identifica- tion on the fuel pump, consult a gas station attendant. % For further information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop or visit http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Notes on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions. # Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Freightliner Sprinterto the fuel.
Freightliner Sprinter recommends using brandname fuels with additives. In some countries, the available fuel may not con- tain sufficient amounts of additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Freightliner Sprinter service center, the fuel should be mixed
Technical data 273
with the cleaning additive recommended by Freightliner Sprinter . You must observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the container. Notes on fuel grades on vehicles with diesel engines
General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel
engines. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Never refuel with the following: R Gasoline R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
oil R Paraffin or kerosene # Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel
and do not use any additive.
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel, observe the following: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Malfunctions due to contaminated fuel
Fuel contamination can lead to malfunctions in the fuel system. # If you are using drums or canisters to
refuel the vehicle, you should filter the fuel before filling.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel Incorrect fuel can lead to engine damage. # Refuel only ULSD or diesel fuel with a
sulfur content of maximum 15 ppm.
Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the fuel dispenser. If there is no identifi- cation on the fuel pump, consult a gas station attendant. The fuel grade recommended for your vehicle is found on the instruction label in the fuel filler flap .
Notes on low outside temperatures
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion from igniting fuel
If you heat up parts of the fuel system, fuel may leak and ignite. Depending on the type of damage, fuel might not escape until the engine is running. # Never heat fuel system components. # Contact a qualified specialist workshop
to rectify the malfunction.
Refill only with commercially available ULTRALOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975 standard. The flow properties of diesel fuel may be inade- quate at low outside temperatures due to paraffin separation. % Malfunctions resulting from paraffin separa-
tion can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a heated garage, for example. To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved flow characteristics is available in the winter months. You can obtain further informa- tion on this at the gas station or from your fuel supplier. Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheating system. This additionally improves the flow char- acteristics of the diesel fuel by about 14.5°F (8°C). ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without risk of malfunction down to an outside temperature of approximately 14.5°F (-10°C).
274 Technical data
* NOTE Damage due to gasoline or paraffin
Gasoline or paraffin in diesel fuel impairs the lubricity of the fuel. This can result in damage to the fuel injection system, for example. # Do not add any gasoline or paraffin to
diesel fuel to improve its flow character- istics.
B20 fuels with bio-diesel content
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuel
Continuous use of fuels with bio-diesel con- tent over 5% (B20 fuels) can lead to fuel filter clogging. Deposits may also form on the fuel injector. This may reduce the engine output. Unburned fuel can get into the oil pan. This causes the engine oil level to rise. This can cause engine mechanical damage. Observe the following points to avoid damage and reducing the engine output: # Fill up with fuels with bio-diesel content
of 5% (ULSD) or less, whenever possi- ble. # Regularly check your engine oil level if you use B20 fuels on a regular basis. # Strictly follow the oil change intervals quoted in the instrument cluster and within your Maintenance Booklet. # Use only engine oils and filters approved for use in your vehicle. # If you do not plan to drive your vehicle for several weeks, completely fill the fuel tank in advance with ULSD fuel.
For more information, consult the gas station staff. The identification of fuels with bio-diesel content (ULSD or B20) must be clear. If the iden- tification is not clear, do not refuel. Do not refuel with any fuels that have not been approved for your vehicle.
Tank content and reserve fuel The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment.
Tank content and reserve fuel
Gasoline engine
Total capacity
M274
Approx. 22.5 gal (85 liters)
Diesel engine OM642 OM651 Gasoline engine
Models with approx. 22.5 gal (85 l) total capacity Diesel engine
Models with approx. 24.5 gal (93 l) total capacity
Total capacity Approx. 24.5 gal
(93 liters) Of which reserve
fuel Approx. 5 gal
(19 liters)
Of which reserve fuel
Approx. 5 gal (19 liters)
DEF
Notes on DEF Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271). DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
* NOTE Irritation to skin, eyes and respira- tory tract due to DEF
DEF can cause irritation if inhaled or inges- ted, or if it comes in contact with eyes or skin. When the tank is open, ammonia vapor can escape. # Do not inhale or ingest DEF. # Make sure DEF does not come into con-
tact with your skin, eyes or clothing. # Keep DEF away from children. # Only fill the DEF tank in well-ventilated
areas. If a person comes into contact with DEF, observe the following: R If you have ingested DEF, drink plenty of
water and seek medical attention immedi- ately. R If DEF has come into contact with your eyes, rinse them for 15 minutes, also beneath the eyelids. R Immediately rinse DEF off your skin with soap and water.
Technical data 275
* NOTE Damage caused by additives in DEF or by diluting DEF
The DEF exhaust gas aftertreatment system could be destroyed by the following: R Additives in DEF R Diluting DEF # Only use DEF in accordance with ISO
22241. # Do not mix additives. # Do not dilute DEF.
* NOTE Damage and malfunctions caused by impurities in DEF
Impurities in DEF result in the following: R Higher emission values R Damage to the catalytic converter R Engine damage R Malfunctions in the DEF exhaust gas
aftertreatment system # Avoid impurities in DEF.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Soiling with
DEF DEF residue crystallizes after some time and stain the affected surfaces. # Immediately rinse surfaces that come in
contact with DEF when filling with water or remove DEF with a damp cloth and cold water. If DEF has already crystallized, clean using a sponge and cold water.
If you open the DEF tank, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Do not inhale any ammonia vapor that may be released. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas. DEF consumption and filling capacity
DEF consumption Like fuel consumption, DEF consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating con- ditions. DEF consumption is usually within a range of 0 and 10% of the fuel consumption. If necessary, DEF must be refilled in accordance with the instructions when the refill message is displayed in the instrument cluster. This may also
be necessary between the scheduled mainte- nance.
Total capacity of DEF tank
Vehicle
Total capacity
All models
5.8 gal (22 liters )
Exhaust gas aftertreatment The vehicle must be operated with DEF if the exhaust gas aftertreatment system is to function correctly. If you operate the vehicle without DEF or with emissions-relevant malfunctions, the legal MOT approval is invalidated. The vehicle could be pro- hibited from public road use by an official ordi- nance. It may be improper or punishable in some coun- tries to operate a vehicle that uses no DEF or one that does not comply with the specifications of these operating instructions. Engine management monitors the exhaust gas aftertreatment components for compliance with emissions laws and regulations. If you attempt to operate the vehicle without DEF, with diluted DEF or with a different reducing agent, this will be detected by the engine management system. Other emissions-relevant malfunctions, e.g. metering malfunctions or sensor errors, are also detected and logged. The engine management system subsequently prevents the engine being restarted after issuing a warning message. Therefore refill the DEF tank regularly during vehi- cle operation or, at the latest, after receiving the first warning message via the instrument cluster.
Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
276 Technical data
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi- tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica- tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Freightliner Sprinter recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on engine oil and oil filter: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluidsat
https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (by enter- ing the designation) R At a qualified specialist workshop
Quality and capacity of engine oil % The containers of the various engine oils are
marked with the ACEA (Association of Euro- pean Automotive Manufacturers) and/or API (America Petroleum Institute) classifications. Only use approved engine oils that corre- spond to the MB Specifications for Operating Fluids and the prescribed ACEA and/or API classifications named below. Engine oils of other grades are not permissible and can result in the loss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The use of other engine oils not approved for diesel engines can damage the diesel particulate filter (DPF).
MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval
Gasoline engines
MB-Freigabe orMBApproval
M274
229.5
Diesel engines
MB-Freigabe orMBApproval
OM642 OM651
228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con- sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes).
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifica- tions marked in the table for the lowest SAE vis- cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes. If the engine oils listed in the table are not availa- ble, you may add a maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of the following engine oils once only: R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: MB-Frei-
gabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4 R Vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe
or MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5
Multigrade engine oils of the prescribed SAE clas- sification (viscosity) may be used all year round, taking the outside temperature into account.
Viscosity of the engine oil
* NOTE Engine damage due to incorrect SAE classification (viscosity) of the engine oil
If the SAE classification (viscosity) of the engine oil added is not suitable for prolonged low outside temperatures, it may cause engine damage. The temperature readings of the SAE classifi- cation are always based on fresh oil. Engine oil ages when driving as a result of soot and fuel residue. The characteristics of engine oil deteriorate significantly at low outside tem- peratures. # Use an engine oil of the appropriate SAE
classification at low outside tempera- tures. # Use oil for all-year-round operation.
The temperature readings of the SAE classifica- tion are always based on fresh oil. The tempera- ture characteristics of the engine oil, especially at low outside temperatures, can deteriorate signifi- cantly due to aging when driving. Therefore, Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you change the engine oil before the start of the cold season. Only use an approved engine oil in the prescribed SAE classification for this pur- pose.
Technical data 277
The viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of a fluid. With regard to engine oil, a high viscosity is synonymous with thick liquid and a low viscos- ity with thin liquid. Depending on the outside temperatures, select the engine oil according to the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows the SAE classifications to be used. The low tem- perature characteristics of engine oils can deteri- orate significantly during operation due to aging and soot and fuel accretion, for example. A regu- lar oil change with an approved engine oil in the appropriate SAE classification is therefore strongly recommended. Additive
* NOTE Engine damage due to use of addi- tives in the engine oil
The use of additional additives in the engine oil can damage the engine. # Do not use any additional additives in
the engine oil.
Miscibility of engine oil The benefits of high-quality engine oils are reduced by mixing oil. We recommend that you only use engine oil of the same grade and SAE classification as the oil filled at the last oil change. If, in exceptional cases, engine oil of the type in the engine is not available, use another approved mineral or syn- thetic engine oil. Vehicles with diesel engines: if the grade is not available, you may also refill with engine oils according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The refill quantity is then limited to maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter). You must then have an oil change carried out at the earliest possible opportunity. Vehicles with a gasoline engine: if the grade is not available, you may refill with engine oils according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3
or ACEA A3/B4. The refill quantity is then limited to maximum 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter). You must then have an oil change carried out at the earliest possible opportunity. Engine oils are differentiated according to: R Engine oil brand R Grade (MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval) R SAE classification (viscosity)
Oil change interval The on-board computer automatically shows the date of the next oil change as an event message on the display. Freightliner Sprinter recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil capacities
Engine
Engine oil
M274
Approx. 11.1 qt (10.5 liters)
OM642
Approx. 13.2 qt (12.5 liters)
OM651 Rear-wheel drive
Approx. 12.2 qt (11.5 liters)
Information on oil consumption Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con- sumes a maximum of 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil per 620 miles (1000 km). In the following cases, oil consumption may also exceed this limit: R The vehicle is new. R You use the vehicle mostly under arduous
conditions. R You drive frequently at a high engine speed.
Regular maintenance is a prerequisite for favora- ble consumption figures. You can only assess the oil consumption after a long journey. Check the oil level in the engine regularly, e.g. weekly or every time you refuel.
Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
278 Technical data
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys- tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
* NOTE Damage to paint, plastic or rubber by brake fluid
There is a risk of damage to property if brake fluid comes into contact with paint, plastic or rubber. # If paint, plastic or rubber comes into
contact with brake fluid, rinse with water immediately.
Observe the notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care (/ page 219). Have the brake fluid renewed every two years at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Freightliner Sprinter in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information on brake fluid is available at the fol- lowing locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids
331.0 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponent parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze.
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
# Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool- ant
# Only add coolant that has been pre- mixed with the required antifreeze pro- tection.
Information on coolant is available at the follow- ing locations: R In the MB Specifications for operating fluids
320.1 - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - In the BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem- peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high out- side temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by Freight-
liner Sprinter . # Observe the instructions in the MB
Specifications for operating fluids320.1.
* NOTE Paintwork damage due to coolant # Do not spill coolant on painted surfa-
ces.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Note the proportion of anti-corrosion agent/anti- freeze in the engine cooling system within the fol- lowing temperature ranges: R At least 50% (antifreeze protection up to
about -35°F (-37°C)) R Maximum 55% (antifreeze protection up to
-49°F (-45°C))
Technical data 279
Coolant capacities
Engine cooling system
Engine
Coolant
M274
approx. 3.0 gal (11.5 liters)
OM642
approx. 2.6 gal (10 liters)
OM651
approx. 2.5 gal (9.5 liters)
Windshield washer fluid Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flam- mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam- age the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. # Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa- ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter- Fit.
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win- terFit with other windshield washer flu- ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the fill level sensor may give a false reading. Information on the windshield washer fluid Recommended windshield washer fluid: R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Mixing ratio For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa- tion on the anti-freeze container. Mix the washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round.
Filling capacities
Windshield washer system
Washer fluid
5.8 qt (5.5 l)
Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 271). % Your vehicle's climate control system may be
filled with the refrigerant R134a. The refriger- ant R134a contains fluorinated greenhouse gas.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect coolant Using the wrong coolant can damage the air conditioning system. # Only use the refrigerant R134a or the
PAG oil approved by Freightliner Sprinter for your vehicle. # The approved PAG oil must not be mixed with any PAG oil that is not approved for the refrigerant R134a.
Maintenance work, such as adding refrigerant or replacing components, may be carried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Have all work on the climate control system car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Example: refrigerant information label 1 Warning symbols 2 Refrigerant capacity 3 Applicable standards
280 Technical data
4 PAG oil part number 5 Refrigerant type Warning symbols 1 refer to the following: R Potential dangers R The performance of maintenance work at a
qualified specialist workshop
Vehicle data Information on vehicle dimensions The following section contains important techni- cal data for your vehicle. Your vehicle documents contain further vehicle-specific and equipmentdependent technical data such as vehicle dimen- sions and weights.
Trailer loads
The permissible weights and loads can also be obtained from the following sources of informa- tion: R Vehicle documents R The type plates of the trailer hitch, trailer and
vehicle
The values approved by the manufacturer can be found in the following table. If the values differ, the lowest value applies. Use a calibrated weigh- ing machine to check that the weight restrictions have been complied with before you start your journey.
Trailer hitch Notes on the trailer hitch
& WARNING Risk of accident due to imper- missible attachment of a trailer tow hitch
If you install a trailer tow hitch or other com- ponents, the longitudinal frame member is weakened and can break. The trailer may become detached from the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only retrofit a trailer tow hitch if permissible.
Observe the notes on trailer operation (/ page 166). Retrofitting a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is specified in your vehicle docu- ments. You can obtain further information on the trailer hitch at a qualified specialist workshop. Freightliner Sprinter recommends that you have a trailer hitch retrofitted at a Freightliner Sprinter service center. Only use a trailer hitch which has been tested and specially approved by Freightliner Sprinter for your vehicle. Use only a ball neck that has been approved for your vehicle and for your Sprinter trailer hitch. Notes on the permissible dimensions of the ball neck can also be found on the identification plate of the trailer hitch. The maximum permissible towing capacity for unbraked trailers is 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
Technical data 281
Maximum permissible weights and loads Vehicle type, gross vehicle weight and curb weight
Vehicle model
Permissible gross vehicle weight GVWR
1500
8550 lbs (3.878 t)
2500
8550 lbs (3.878 t)
9050 lbs (4.105 t)
3500
3500 XD 4500
9480 lbs (4.300 t)
9900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) 9989 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only) 11030 lbs (5.003 t) 12125 lbs (5.500 t)
Permissible unladen weight7)
6950 lbs (3.152 t) (gasoline only) 7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) 6450 lbs (2.926 t) (gasoline only) 7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) 7400 lbs (3.357 t) (diesel only) 7400 lbs (3.357 t)
10470 lbs (4.749 t) 9375 lbs (4.252 t)
7) Maximum permissible curb weight of a road- worthy vehicle without driver or vehicle occu- pants, including all fluids and their reservoirs when filled up to 100%.
Front axle load, rear axle load, gross weight of vehicle combination (series, optional) Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 8,550 lbs (3.878 t), 9,050 lbs (4.105 t) and 9,480 lbs (4.300 t)
Permissible front axle load GAWR (FA)
Permissible rear axle load GAWR (RA)
4100 lbs (1.860 t) 5)
5360 lbs (2.431 t)
4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)
Vehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 9,900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only) and 9,989 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only)
Permissible front axle load GAWR (FA)
Permissible rear axle load GAWR (RA)
4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) 4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)
7060 lbs (3.202 t)
282 Technical data
Vehicle type 3500 XD with a max. permissible gross weight of 11,030 lbs (5.003 t)
Permissible front axle load GAWR (FA)
Permissible rear axle load GAWR (RA)
4080 lbs (1.851 t) 5) 4410 lbs (2.000 t) 1)
7720 lbs (3.502 t)
Vehicle type 4500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 12,125 lbs (5.500 t)
Permissible front axle load GAWR (FA)
Permissible rear axle load GAWR (RA)
4630 lbs (2.100 t)
7935 lbs (3.599 t)
1) Front axle with increased load capacity. 5) Not in combination with all-wheel drive (4x4) and not in combination with vehicle model desig- nation 907.745 (combination vehicles with a vehi- cle length of 290 in (7,367 mm)).
Gross weight of vehicle combination, trailer load, tongue weight Vehicle types 1500 and 2500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 8,550 lbs (3.878 t)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
13550 lbs (6.146 t)
5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2)
Vehicle type 2500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 9,050 lbs (4.105 t)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
13930 lbs (6.319 t)
5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2)
Vehicle type 2500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 9,480 lbs (4.300 t)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
9480 lbs (4.300 t)
Technical data 283
Vehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 9,900 lbs (4.490 t) (Canada only)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
14900 lbs (6.759 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) 15250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
5000 lbs (2.268 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8)
Vehicle type 3500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 9,990 lbs (4.531 t) (USA only)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
14990 lbs (6.799 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) 15250 lbs (6.917 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8) 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8) 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657 8)
Vehicle type 3500 XD with a max. permissible gross weight of 11,030 lbs (5.003 t)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 4)
5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8)
optional: 7500 lbs (3.402 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657
8)
optional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi- cle model designation 907.657 8)
284 Technical data
Vehicle type 4500 with a max. permissible gross weight of 12,125 lbs (5.500 t)
Permissible gross weight of vehicle/trailer combination GCWR 6), 9)
Permissible trailer load GTW, braked 6)
Permissible tongue weight TWR
15250 lbs (6.917 t) 4)
5004 lbs (2.270 t) 2), only for vehicle model designa- tion 907.657 8)
500 lbs (0.227 t) 2), only for vehicle model designation 907.657 8)
optional: 7500 lbs (3.400 t) 3), not for vehicle model designation 907.657
8)
optional: 750 lbs (0.340 t) 3), not for vehi- cle model designation 907.657 8)
2) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 5,004 lbs (2.270 t). 3) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 7,500 lbs (3.400 t). 4) Only NAFTA trailer cross member, towing capa- city 5,004 lbs (2.270 t) or 7,500 lbs (3.400 t). 6) In trailer operation, do not exceed any individ- ual maximum permissible gross weight of those specified in the table. 8) The vehicle length for vehicles with the vehicle model designation 907.657 (Cargo Van) is 290 in (7,367 mm). 9) It is not possible to tow a trailer on vehicles which have not been equipped with a trailer cou- pling as standard. In this case, the maximum per- missible gross vehicle weight corresponds to the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle combination. % If the trailer coupling is retrofitted, adapt the
type plates accordingly with the altered, max- imum permissible weights. Please consult a Freightliner Sprinter service center if you have any further questions.
Cargo tie-down points and carrier systems Information about the cargo tie-down points
* NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum loading capacity of the cargo tie-down point is exceeded
If you combine various cargo tie-down points to secure a load, always take the maximum loading capacity of the weakest cargo tiedown point into account. During maximum full-stop braking, forces may act which can multiply the weight of the load. # Always use several cargo tie-down
points to distribute and spread the load. Distribute the load on the cargo tiedown points evenly.
Nominal tensile load is the maximum permissible tractive power. Further information on the cargo tie-down points and tie-down eyes can be obtained in the "Trans- porting" section (/ page 207).
Tie-down eyes
Nominal tensile load of tie-down eyes
Tie-down eyes
Nominal tensile load
Passenger Van
350 daN
Cargo Van
800 daN
The body builder label is found on the front-end module above the radiator and contains the maxi- mum permissible curb weight for the vehicles.
Technical data 285
Loading rails
Nominal tensile load of cargo tie-down points in the cargo compartment
Cargo tie-down point
Nominal tensile load
Loading rails on cargo 500 daN compartment floor
Lower loading rail on 200 daN side wall
Upper loading rail on 125 daN side wall
The values specified apply only to loads resting on the cargo compartment floor under the follow- ing circumstances: R The load is secured to two cargo tie-down
points on the rail R The distance to the nearest load-securing
point on the same rail is approximately 1 m
Information about roof racks
& WARNING Risk of injury if maximum roof load is exceeded
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics will change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steering and braking characteristics, will be greatly impaired. # Always comply with the maximum roof
load and adjust your driving style.
& WARNING Danger of accident due to uneven loading
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking characteristics, may be greatly impaired. # Load the vehicle evenly. # Secure the load against sliding.
The driving, braking and steering characteristics of the vehicle will change with the type of load, the weight and the center of gravity of the load.
* NOTE Risk of accident if the maximum permissible roof load is exceeded
If the weight of the roof luggage, including the roof rack, exceeds the maximum permissible roof load, there will be a risk of an accident. # Ensure that the weight of the roof lug-
gage and roof rack does not exceed the maximum permissible roof load. # The roof rack supports must be arranged at an even distance from each other. # Freightliner Sprinter advises you to install a stabilizer on the vehicle's front axle.
Further information about safety measures can be found in the "Transport" section (/ page 207).
Max. roof load/pairs of roof rack supports
Vehicles with
Maximum roof load
Minimum number of pairs of sup- ports
Roof
661 lbs
6
(300 kg)
High roof
331 lbs
3
(150 kg)
This information applies if the load is distributed evenly across the entire roof area. If the roof rack is shorter, reduce the load propor- tionately. The maximum load per pair of roof rack supports is 110 lbs (50 kg). The loading guidelines and other information about load distribution and load securing can be found in the "Transport" section (/ page 207).
286 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages Introduction
Function of display messages The display messages appear on the multifunc- tion display. The display messages with graphic displays can be displayed in simplified format in the Opera- tor's Manual and may deviate from the display on the multifunction display. The multifunction dis- play shows high-priority display messages in red. In addition, a warning tone sounds for specific display messages. Act in accordance with the display messages and comply with the additional instructions in this Operator's Manual. In addition, symbols are shown for some display messages: ¤ Further information O Hide display messages
You can use the left-hand Touch Control to select between the symbols by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ¤ displays further information on the multifunction display. Pressing O hides the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the ¤ button or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages are saved in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. You cannot hide high-priority display messages. The multifunction display will show these display messages until their causes have been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages appears on the multifunction display. # Browse through the display messages by
swiping upwards or downwards on the lefthand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the % button.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 287
Safety systems Display messages
6
Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)
6
Front Left Malfunction Service Required (exam- ple)
6
SRS Malfunction Service Required
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The respective window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag
If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The respective restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 32).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system com- ponents may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Ten- sioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immedi-
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when
the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously
or repeatedly during a journey. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 32).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system com- ponents may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Ten- sioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immedi-
ately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when
the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously
or repeatedly during a journey. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
288 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
!
Parking Brake Inoperative
!
Incline Too Steep See Operator's Manual
!
Parking Brake See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * A malfunction has occurred in the system; the parking brake is inop- erative.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system mal- function
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it against rolling away.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j.
# Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.
* The on-board electrical system voltage is low or a malfunction has occurred in the system; the holding force may not be sufficient for the incline.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the electrical parking brake has insufficient holding force
If the electrical parking brake does not have sufficient holding force on a steep incline, the vehicle may roll away. # Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it
against rolling away. # Shift the automatic transmission to position j.
Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 137). * The on-board electrical system voltage is low or a malfunction has
occurred in the system; the closing force may not be sufficient for the incline.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system mal- function
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface only and secure it against rolling away.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j.
# Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist work- shop immediately.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 289
Display messages Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The brakepads have reached their wear limit.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
J
Check Brake Fluid Level
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the brak- ing characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual
Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Manual
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con- ditions. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
* Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 145). # Drive on. When the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will be available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy precipitation R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear, proceed as follows:
290 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages SOS NOT READY
T ! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 220). # Restart the engine.
* The emergency call system is not available. Possible causes for this include: R The ignition is switched off. R The emergency call system is malfunctioning.
# Switch on the ignition. If an emergency call is unavailable, a message to this effect will appear on the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop. % You can find more information on the regional availability of the
emergency call system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect_ecall
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are mal- functioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency brak- ing situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety sys- tems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning. The brake system continues working with the normal effect. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situations.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabili- zation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 291
Display messages
÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
! ÷
Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
! ÷
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabili- zation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Carefully drive some gentle curves at a speed greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) on a suitable stretch of road.
# If the display message does not disappear, visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully when doing so.
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be tem- porarily unavailable.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunc- tioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency brak- ing situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety sys- tems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Carefully drive some gentle curves at a speed greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) on a suitable stretch of road.
# If the display message does not disappear, visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully when doing so.
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning. The brake system continues working with the normal effect. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situations.
292 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunc- tioning
If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency brak- ing situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety sys- tems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Driving systems Display messages Cruise Control Inoperative
¯
Off
¯
- - - mph Active Distance Assist Inoperative
Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, this means cruise control has deacti- vated itself automatically (/ page 147).
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been met. # Observe the activation conditions of cruise control (/ page 148).
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 150). # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions # Restart the engine When the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will be available again.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 293
Display messages
_ Ã á
Currently Unavailable Camera Dirty
Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty
Active Distance Assist Now Available
ë
Off Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist Trailer Not Monitored
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy precipitation or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield. # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R Dirt on the sensors R Heavy precipitation R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
The following systems may be affected: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 150) R Blind Spot Assist (/ page 161) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 145)
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 220). # Restart the engine. # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 152).
* The HOLD function has been deactivated because the vehicle is slip- ping or an activation condition has not been met. # Reactivate the HOLD function later on or check the HOLD func- tion's activation conditions (/ page 153).
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning (/ page 161). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* When you establish an electrical connection with the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will remain available but the area beside the trailer will not be monitored. The function of Blind Spot Assist may be restric- ted as a result (/ page 161).
294 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable (/ page 161). The system limits have been reached (/ page 161). # Drive on. When the causes have been eliminated, the system will be avail- able again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is very dirty, the sensors in the bumper may malfunction.
* The camera view is restricted (/ page 164). Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy precipitation or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning (/ page 164). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable (/ page 164). The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 164). # Drive on. When the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will be available again.
Û
If the display message does not disappear: # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 295
Display messages
Û
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!
ð
Maximum Speed Exceeded
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or increasing inattentive- ness on the driver's part (/ page 159). # If necessary, take a break.
* You have exceeded the maximum permitted speed (specific coun- tries only). # Drive more slowly.
Engine
Display messages
æ
Fuel Level Low
¸
Replace Air Filter
?
!
Check Fuel Filter
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured
4
Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The fuel supplies have reached the reserve level. # Refuel.
* Vehicles with a diesel engine: The engine air filter is clogged and must be replaced. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The fan motor is defective. # Without a high engine load, continue to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant temperature dis- play remains below 248 °F (120 °C).
* The water that has accumulated in the water separator has reached the maximum level. # Drain the water separator (/ page 217).
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrup- ted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Display message for certain engines only: The engine oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure # Avoid driving with insufficient engine oil pressure.
296 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
4
Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter)
4
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
4
Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
4
Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* The engine oil level has fallen to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level at the next fuel stop. Refill engine oil (/ page 213). Observe the notes on engine oil (/ page 275). * Display message for certain engines only: The engine oil level is too high.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil suctioned off.
* Display message for certain engines only: The engine oil level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Check the engine oil level. Add engine oil (/ page 213). Observe the notes on engine oil (/ page 275). * The engine oil level has fallen to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Check the engine oil level at the next fuel stop. Top up engine oil (/ page 213). Observe the notes on engine oil (/ page 275).
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 297
Display messages
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
#
Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual
#
12 V Battery See Operator's Manual
#
See Operator's Manual
?
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The battery's charge level is too low. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! # Let the engine run. # Do not continue driving until the display message goes out.
* The battery is no longer being charged and has reached an exces- sively low battery charge level.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Let the engine run for a few minutes or drive an extended dis-
tance. The battery is charged.
* The battery is no longer being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop in a safe location immediately and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and
switch off the engine.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out.
298 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
?
Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Ensure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not obstruc-
ted. # Avoiding high engine loads, continue to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant temperature dis- play remains below 248°F (120°C). * The coolant level is too low.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. # Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
Regeneration Not Possible
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Top up coolant (/ page 215). * Not all conditions have been met for regeneration of the diesel par-
ticulate filter (/ page 118). # Continue driving as normal until all conditions have been met for
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter.
The load condition of the diesel particulate filter is over 50% and the message still appears on the instrument cluster. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid)
Display messages
å
Refill Additive See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up on the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. The DEF supply has fallen below the first warning threshold. # Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 134). The å DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is stationary, at the latest after 20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the ignition or start the engine after topping up.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 299
Display messages
å
Refill Additive Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Manual
å
Refill Additive Emergency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's Manual
¯
Additive System Fault See Operator's Manual
¯
Additive System Fault Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Manual
¯
Additive System Fault Emergency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* In addition, the yellow DEF indicator lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds. The DEF supply has fallen below the reserve mark. After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF sup- ply will last for approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). The engine can then only be started another 16 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in the message every time the engine is started. # Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 134). The å DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle is stationary, at the latest after 20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the igni- tion or start the engine after topping up.
* In addition, the yellow DEF indicator lamp å lights up on the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. If the Refill Additive Emergency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's Manual display message is shown, you can only drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). # Add at least 2.5 gal (9.5 l) of DEF (/ page 134). The DEF indicator lamp å only disappears when the vehicle is stationary, at the latest after 20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the ignition or start the engine after refilling.
* In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant with ISO 22241. # Have the DEF supply tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible.
* In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliant with ISO 22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or an emissionsrelevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment system. After the message appears for the first time, the engine can only be started another 10 times. The number of remaining engine starts XX (10 to 1) is shown in the message every time the engine is started. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
* In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds. You can only drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
300 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Tires Display messages Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors
h
Tire Press. Sen. Missing Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable
h
Warning Tire Malfunction
h
Check Tires
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The installed wheels do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor has been switched off. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. * The tire pressure sensor signal is missing from one or more tires. No pressure value is displayed for the tire in question. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
* There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable. # Continue driving. As soon as the cause has been eliminated, the tire pressure monitor automatically switches on.
* The pressure in one or more tires suddenly falls. The wheel position is shown.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways: R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,
may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.
Information about flat tires (/ page 226). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. * The pressure in one or more tires has fallen significantly. The wheel position is shown.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pres- sure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,
may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 301
Display messages
h
Please Correct Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 242) and the tires. * The pressure in at least one tire is too low or the pressures of the individual tires deviate too much from each other. # Check the tire pressure, and add air if necessary. # When the tire pressure has been set correctly, re-start the tire
pressure monitor (/ page 248).
* The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Key Display messages
Â
Don't Forget Your Key
Â
Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
Â
Key Not Detected (red display message)
Â
Key Not Detected (white display message)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * This message reminds you not to leave your SmartKey in the vehi- cle. # Take the SmartKey with you when you get out of the vehicle.
* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the SmartKey's position in the vehicle. # Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 109).
* The SmartKey is not detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch the engine off: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot lock the vehicle centrally. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source, proceed as follows: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con-
ditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting with the
SmartKey (/ page 109). * The SmartKey is currently not detected.
# Change the SmartKey's position in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not detected, start the engine with the
SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 109).
302 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
Â
Replace Key Battery
Â
Obtain a New Key
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey's battery is discharged. # Changing the battery (/ page 47).
* The SmartKey must be replaced. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle Display messages
¥
Check Washer Fluid
1 f
&
Inoperative See Operator's Manual
&
Inoperative Refuel Vehicle
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen below the minimum. # Adding washer fluid (/ page 216).
* At least one door is open. # Close all the doors.
* The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con- ditions.
# Close the hood. * The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
# When the vehicle is at a standstill in a horizontal position and the engine has cooled down: try to switch on the stationary heater four times, leaving a gap of several minutes between each attempt.
# If the stationary heater does not switch on: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on. # Refuel the vehicle.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 303
Display messages
&
Inoperative Battery Low
Ð
Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched off. # Drive an extended distance until the battery has been suffi- ciently charged again.
* The steering power assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering char- acteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or com- pletely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
Ð
Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual
# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The steering is malfunctioning. Steerability is heavily impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's oper- ating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine To Engage Transmiss. Position R First Depress the Brake Air Conditioning Malfunction See Operator's Manual Auxiliary Battery Malfunction
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con- ditions. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You have attempted to start the engine in transmission position h or k. # Shift the transmission to position j or i.
* You have attempted to shift from position h or i to position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to position k.
* The function of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. The quantity of air and flow of fresh air are controlled automatically. # Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always shift the transmission to position j manually before you switch off the engine.
304 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages Reversing Not Possible Service Required Transmission Malfunction Stop
d
Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away
Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to select reverse gear. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission automatically shifts to position i. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic con- ditions. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* You are about to exit the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you exit the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the key with you. # If you do not exit the vehicle, switch off the electrical consum- ers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12V battery may dis- charge and it will be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # If the transmission is in position h, visit a qualified specialist workshop, without changing the transmission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle in a safe location. # Inform a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
* The transmission can only be shifted to position j if the vehicle is at a standstill.
* While the vehicle is rolling or driving, the transmission was shifted to position i. # To stop, depress the brake pedal and, when the vehicle is at a standstill, shift the transmission to position j. # To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.
* The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in posi- tion k, i or h. # When parking the vehicle, shift the transmission to position j.
* You have attempted to shift to a different transmission position from position j. # Depress the brake pedal.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 305
Display messages
x
Veh. Tracking Activated See Op. Manual or mobile app
g
Step Not Extended See Operator's Manualor Step Not Extended Malfunction
g
Step Not Retracted See Operator's Manualor Step Not Retracted Malfunction
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The vehicle has activated services from Mercedes PRO at its dis- posal. Locating the vehicle may be possible within the framework of Mercedes PRO connect. # Check the status of the activated services at http:// mercedes.pro. # Ask the vehicle owner for the details.
* The electrical step is not, or is only partially, extended. # Ensure there is sufficient clearance for the electrical step. # Open or close the sliding door again. # If the electrical step does not completely extend again, push it in manually (emergency release) (/ page 60). # Inform passengers that the step is missing before they exit the vehicle.
* The electrical step is not, or is only partially, retracted. # Ensure there is sufficient clearance for the electrical step. # Open or close the sliding door again. # If the electrical step does not completely retract again, push it in manually (emergency release) (/ page 60).
Lights Display messages Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The camera view is reduced. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy precipitation or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. When the causes have been eliminated, the driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not go out: # Stop in a safe location. # Clean the windshield.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 86). # Continue driving. When the causes have been eliminated, the system will be avail- able again. The display message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available appears.
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
306 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Display messages
b
Switch On Headlamps
b
Switch Off Lights
b
Auto Lamp Function Inoperative
b
Malfunction See Operator's Manual
b
Check Left Low Beam (example)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are driving without a low beam. # Turn the light switch to position L. or # Turn the light switch to the à position. * You are leaving the vehicle and the light is still switched on. # Turn the light switch to position Ã.
* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
* Vehicles with trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown. # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the fuses, and replace them if necessary(/ page 236).
* The bulb in question is faulty. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or # Check whether changing the bulb is permitted.
Indicator and warning lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warn- ing lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warn- ing lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been started or during a journey.
Indicator and warning lamps:
L
Low beam (/ page 84)
T
Parking lamps (/ page 84)
K
High beam (/ page 85)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 85)
R
Rear fog lamp (/ page 84)
ü
Seat belt not fastened (/ page 312)
$ and J J J ! + ÷ å æ
F and ! !
!
Ð
USA: Brakes (red) (/ page 307)
Canada: Brakes (red) (/ page 307) Brakes (yellow) (/ page 307) ABS malfunction (/ page 307) Off-road gear ESP® (/ page 307) ESP® OFF (/ page 307) Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 145) USA: Electric parking brake applied (red) (/ page 307) Canada: Electric parking brake applied (red) (/ page 307) Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 307) Electric power steering malfunction (/ page 313)
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 307
#
6 ; æ
? · % h
Electrical malfunction (/ page 313) Restraint system (/ page 307) Check Engine (/ page 313) Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca- tion indicator (/ page 313) Coolant too hot/cold (/ page 313) Distance warning (/ page 313) Preglow Tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 249, 248, 246)
Safety systems Warning/indicator lamp
! F and
Electric parking brake applied red indicator lamp (USA) does not light
! up
Electric parking brake malfunctioning yellow indicator lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*Vehicles with electric parking brake: the electric parking brake red indicator lamp does not light up. The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up. Meaning of the indicator lamps: R The red indicator lamp does not light up: the electric parking brake has been released. R The yellow indicator lamp lights up: the electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
# Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Switch the ignition off and back on. # If the fault message persists, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop. # Park the vehicle only on level ground and secure it against rolling
away (/ page 140).
308 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
! F and
Red electric parking brake applied indicator
! lamp (USA) lights up
Electric parking brake malfunctioning yellow indicator lamp lights up
! F and
Red electric parking brake applied indicator
! lamp (USA) flashes
Electric parking brake malfunctioning yellow indicator lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*Vehicles with electric parking brake: the red and yellow electric parking brake indicator lamps light up. Meaning of the indicator lamps: R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the elec-
tric parking brake has been applied. R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up: the
electric parking brake is malfunctioning. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Switch the ignition off and back on. # If the fault message persists, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop. # If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake, do not
drive the vehicle.
*Vehicles with electric parking brake: the electric parking brake red indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up. Meaning of the indicator lamps: R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp flashes: the activa- tion status of the electric parking brake is unknown. R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp lights up: the electric parking brake is malfunctioning. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Switch the ignition off and back on. # Engage and release the electric parking brake using the switch while depressing the brake pedal. # If the fault message persists, park the vehicle on level ground and secure it against rolling away (/ page 140). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # When the red indicator lamp flashes, the vehicle must not be driven as the brake system may overheat.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 309
Warning/indicator lamp
! F and
Red electric parking brake applied indicator
! lamp (USA) lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*Vehicles with electric parking brake: the electric parking brake red indicator lamp lights up. The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp does not light up. Meaning of the indicator lamps: R The electric parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the elec-
tric parking brake has been applied. R The electric parking brake yellow indicator lamp does not light up:
there are no faults with the electric parking brake. # Do not drive the vehicle if the electric parking brake has been
applied.
The electric parking brake malfunctioning yel- low indicator lamp does not light up
! F and
*Vehicles with manual parking brake: the parking brake red indica- tor lamp lights up. Meaning of the indicator lamp: R The parking brake red indicator lamp lights up: the parking brake has been applied.
# Do not drive the vehicle if the parking brake has been applied.
Red parking brake applied indicator lamp (USA) lights up
J
Brake system warning lamp (yellow)
*The brake system yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system mal- function
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully at an adjusted speed and at a sufficient dis- tance from the vehicle in front.
# If the multifunction display shows a display message, comply with it.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
310 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
J $ and
Brake warning lamp (red) (USA)
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The brake system red warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning. R The EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. R There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) malfunctions
If the EBD malfunctions, the wheels may lock during braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
J $ and
Brake warning lamp (red) (USA)
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the brak- ing characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con- tinue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic condi- tions. Do not continue driving.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. *Only in the USA: The brake system red warning lamp lights up while
the engine is on. Possible cause: R The brakepads have reached their wear limit.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 311
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
6
Restraint system warning lamp
# Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. *The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the engine is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system compo- nents may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as inten- ded during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
*The ESP® yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabiliza- tion. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷
ESP® warning lamp flashes
å
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The ESP® yellow warning lamp flashes during a journey. ESP® intervenes (/ page 143). # Adapt your driving style to the weather and road conditions.
*The ESP® OFF yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. ESP® has been switched off.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
312 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
!
ABS warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactiva- ted
If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
# Comply with instructions to switch ESP® off (/ page 143). *The ABS yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is on.
ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, this means the EBD is malfunc- tioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal- functioning.
& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunc- tioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when brak- ing The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Seat belt Warning/indicator lamp
7
Seat belt warning lamp flashes
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The seat belt red warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger does not have their belt on while the vehicle is in motion (speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h)). # Put on the seat belt (/ page 35). There are objects on the front passenger seat.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 313
Warning/indicator lamp
7
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. *The seat belt red warning lamp lights up after the engine has started.
A warning tone may also sound. When the vehicle is stationary: The seat belt warning lamp reminds drivers and front passengers to put on their seat belt. # Put on the seat belt (/ page 35). Objects on the front passenger seat may prevent the seat belt warn- ing lamp from going out.
Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp
·
Distance warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The red distance warning lamp lights up while you are driving and a warning tone sounds. You are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be ready to apply the brakes immediately. # Increase the distance.
Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp
Ð
Power steering system warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The power steering system red warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering no longer functions as intended, the vehicle's oper- ating safety is jeopardized. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
Engine Warning/indicator lamp
?
Coolant warning lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Possible causes: R temperature sensor malfunctioning R coolant level too low R air supply to the engine radiator obstructed R engine radiator fan faulty
314 Display messages and warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If a warning tone also sounds, the coolant has exceeded the tempera- ture of 248 °F (120 °C).
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
hood closed and call the fire service.
# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving.
# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the tempera- ture scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Electrical malfunction warning lamp
6
Fuel reserve warning lamp
;
Engine diagnosis warning lamp
Otherwise: # Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level(/ page 215). # Ensure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not obstructed. # Without subjecting the engine to excessive strain, continue to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop. Ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 248 °F (120 °C). *The electrical malfunction red warning lamp lights up. A malfunction has occurred in the electrics. # Read the messages on the multifunction display.
*The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
*The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is on. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.
Display messages and warning and indicator lamps 315
Tires Warning/indicator lamp
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
h
Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
*The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for roughly one minute and then lights up permanently. The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The tire pressure monitor yellow warning lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) lights up. The tire pressure monitor has detected a tire pressure loss in at least one tire.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pres- sure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,
may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in a safe location. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
316 Index
1, 2, 3 ... 3-zone automatic climate control (control panel)........................................ 100 12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket
see Socket (115 V) 360° Camera
Care................................................... 220 Function............................................. 157 Selecting a view................................. 159
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............ 142 Acceleration
see Using kickdown Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating........................ 47 Activating/deactivating the HOLD function................................................... 153 Active Brake Assist
Function/notes.................................. 145 Setting................................................ 147 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Calling up a speed.............................. 152 Function............................................. 150 Increasing/decreasing speed............. 152 Requirements..................................... 152 Steering wheel buttons....................... 152 Storing a speed.................................. 152 Switching off/deactivating................. 152 Switching on/activating..................... 152 System limitations.............................. 150 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating...................... 165 Function............................................. 164 System limitations.............................. 164 Trailer operation................................. 164 Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function............................................... 86 Switching on/off.................................. 86 Add-on equipment.................................... 21 Add-on equipment guidelines................. 21 Additional turn signal light (allwheel drive vehicles)............................... 91 Additive DEF............................................. 133, 274
Engine oil............................................ 275 Additives
Fuel.................................................... 272 Additives (DEF)
see DEF Additives (engine oil)
see Additive Additives (fuel)
see Fuel Address book
see Contacts ADR (working speed control)
Adjusting............................................ 166 Function............................................. 165 Switching on/off................................ 165 After-sales service center see ASSYST PLUS Air nozzles see Air vents Air vents adjusting (front).................................. 103 Adjusting (roof)................................... 104 Rear passenger compartment............ 104 Airbag Activation............................................. 33 Front airbag (driver, co-driver).............. 36 Installation locations............................ 36 Overview.............................................. 36 Protection impaired.............................. 37 Protection provided.............................. 36 Side airbag........................................... 36 Window curtain airbag......................... 36 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Alertness assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST All-wheel drive Engaging............................................. 124 Engaging/disengaging........................ 124 LOW range.......................................... 125 Notes.................................................. 123 Android Auto Connecting a mobile phone (wire- less).................................................... 199 Ending................................................ 200 Note................................................... 199 Overview............................................ 198 Sound settings................................... 200 Transferred vehicle data..................... 200 Animals Pets in the vehicle................................ 45
Index 317
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains
Anti-theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.......................................... 63
Anti-theft protection see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Apple CarPlay® Connecting an iPhone®.............. 197, 198 Ending................................................ 198 Notes.................................................. 197 Overview............................................ 197 Sound settings................................... 198 Transferred vehicle data..................... 200
Ashtrays In the windshield stowage com- partment.............................................. 80
ASR (acceleration skid control)............ 143
Assistance graphic (on-board com- puter)....................................................... 176
Assistance Systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods............ 210 Displaying the service due date.......... 210 Function/notes................................... 210 Regular maintenance work................. 210 Special service requirements............. 210
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor...................................... 65 Function............................................... 63 Interior motion sensor function............ 65 Stopping the alarm............................... 64 Switching the tow-away alarm on/off.. 64 Tow-away alarm function...................... 64
Attachments............................................. 21
ATTENTION ASSIST Function............................................. 159 Setting................................................ 161 System limitations.............................. 159
Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights.......................... 84
Automatic measures after an acci- dent........................................................... 37 Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever......................... 120 Engaging drive position...................... 122 Engaging neutral................................. 121 Engaging reverse gear........................ 121 Kickdown............................................ 123 Restricting the shift range.................. 122 Selecting park position....................... 122 Transmission position display............. 120 Transmission positions....................... 120 Auxiliary heating Function............................................. 104 Axle load................................................. 269
B Back support
see Lumbar support (4-way) BAS (Brake Assist System).................... 143 Battery
Charging............................................. 227 Charging the starter battery............... 227 Disconnecting the auxiliary battery in the engine compartment................ 232 Disconnecting the starter battery...... 230 Jump-starting (vehicle)....................... 227 Key....................................................... 47 Notes (vehicle)................................... 226 Removing or installing the starter battery................................................ 231 Starter battery................................... 229 Battery main switch Notes.................................................. 119 Switching power supply on/off.......... 120 Belt see Seat belt Belt warning see Seat belt Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating...................... 162 Function.............................................. 161 Rear Cross Traffic Alert...................... 163 System limitations.............................. 161 Bluetooth® Activating/deactivating...................... 190 Information......................................... 190 Bottle holder............................................. 79 Brake ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).......... 142
318 Index
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function.............................................. 153 Active Brake Assist............................. 145 BAS (Brake Assist System)................. 143 Braking with parking brake:................ 112 Breaking-in notes............................... 109 Downhill gradient................................ 112 Driving notes............................... 110, 112 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)................................................ 145 Heavy and light loads.......................... 112 HOLD function.................................... 153 New brake discs and brake pads/ linings................................................. 112 New/replaced brake disks and brakepads.......................................... 109 Restricted braking effect (salt-trea- ted roads)........................................... 112 Wet road surfaces............................... 112 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake Assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes................................................. 277 Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)................................................ 145 Brakes Post-collision brake.............................. 37 Breakdown Assistance overview............................. 18 Changing a wheel............................... 259 Roadside Assistance............................ 23 Tow starting....................................... 236 Towing away....................................... 233 Transporting the vehicle..................... 235 Breakdown see Flat tire Breaking-in notes................................... 109 Bulbs Reversing light...................................... 93 Buttons Steering wheel.................................... 173
C Call list
Calling up options............................... 197 Making a call...................................... 197 Overview............................................ 196
Calls Accepting........................................... 195 Activating functions during a call........ 195 Calls with several participants............ 195 Declining............................................ 195 Ending a call....................................... 195 Incoming call during an existing call... 195 Making............................................... 195
Camera see 360° Camera see Rear view camera
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care)....................................... 218
Care Car wash............................................. 218 Carpet................................................ 221 Display................................................ 221 Exterior lighting.................................. 220 Headliner............................................ 221 Matte finish........................................ 219 Paint................................................... 219 Plastic trim......................................... 221 Power washer..................................... 219 Real wood/trim elements................... 221 Rear view camera/360° Camera....... 220 Seat belt............................................. 221 Seat cover.......................................... 221 Sensors.............................................. 220 Tailpipes............................................. 220 Trailer hitch........................................ 220 Washing by hand................................. 219 Wheels/rims...................................... 220 Windows............................................ 220 Wiper blades...................................... 220
Cargo compartment lighting Motion detector.................................... 89
Cargo compartment ventilation Deactivating....................................... 106 Setting................................................ 106
Cargo tie-down points Information........................................ 284 Overview............................................ 208
Carpet (care)........................................... 221
Carrier systems (notes)......................... 209
Central locking Wireless central locking....................... 24
Change bulbs Additional turn signal light (allwheel drive vehicles)............................ 91
Index 319
Changing a bulb see Changing bulbs
Changing a wheel Lowering the vehicle.......................... 263 Preparing........................................... 259 Raising the vehicle............................. 259 Removing a wheel.............................. 262
Changing address.................................... 23 Changing bulbs
High beam............................................ 90 Indicator (front).................................... 90 Interior lamps (rear compartment)....... 94 License plate lamp............................... 93 Light bulb types halogen headlamps.... 90 Low beam............................................. 90 Notes................................................... 90 Tail lamp bulb types (Cargo Van and Passenger Van).............................. 91 Tail lamp bulb types (chassis)............... 93 Turn signal light (rear) (chassis)............ 93 Changing lamps see Changing bulbs Changing owner....................................... 23
Characteristics of the tire..................... 253 Charging
Battery............................................... 227 Mobile phone (wireless)....................... 82 Child safety lock (doors)......................... 44 Child seat Attaching (notes).................................. 40 Basic instructions................................. 38 Front-passenger seat (notes)................ 43 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing)............ 41 Notes on risks and dangers.................. 38 Rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem (notes)........................................... 43 Securing on the front passenger seat... 43 Securing on the rear seat..................... 43 Top Tether............................................ 42 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............ 38 Basic instructions................................. 38 Special seat belt retractor.................... 40 Cigarette lighter....................................... 80 Cleaning see Care Cleaning water drain valve of the air intake box................................................ 217 Climate control Activating/deactivating...................... 100 Adjusting rear-compartment heating.. 101
Air distribution settings...................... 102 automatically controlling (rear passenger compartment)................... 101 Auxiliary heating................................. 104 Cargo compartment ventilation.......... 106 Clearing fogged up windows............... 102 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control................................... 100 Controlling automatically.................... 101 Hot-water auxiliary heater.................. 105 Refrigerant......................................... 279 Setting the air distribution.................. 102 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off................................................ 102 Switching synchronization function on/off (control panel)........................ 102 Switching the A/C function on/off..... 101 Switching the rear window defroster on/off................................. 103 Switching the windshield heater on/off................................................ 103 Ventilating the vehicle (conveni- ence opening)...................................... 62 Ventilation nozzles at front................. 103 Ventilation nozzles in the roof............ 104 Ventilation nozzles, rear passenger compartment..................................... 104 Cockpit (overview)..................................... 6 Combination switch see High beam see High-beam flasher see Indicator Computer see On-board computer Contacts Calling up........................................... 196 Deleting.............................................. 196 Downloading (from mobile phone)...... 196 Information......................................... 196 Making a call...................................... 196 Name format...................................... 196 Convenience closing................................ 62
Convenience opening.............................. 62
Conversions.............................................. 21 Coolant
Filling capacities................................. 279 Coolant (engine)
Checking level.................................... 215 Notes.................................................. 278 Copyright License................................................. 31
320 Index
Copyrights Trademarks........................................... 31
Cornering light......................................... 85 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes.................................. 144 Cruise control
Activating........................................... 148 Buttons............................................... 148 Calling up a speed.............................. 148 Deactivating....................................... 148 Function............................................. 147 Requirements..................................... 148 Selecting............................................ 148 Setting the speed............................... 148 Storing a speed.................................. 148 System limitations.............................. 147 Cup holders Overview of center console.................. 79 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........ 27 Customer Relations Department............ 27
D Dashboard
see Cockpit (overview) Dashboard lighting
see Instrument lighting Data acquisition (vehicle)........................ 28 Data protection rights
Data storage......................................... 30 Data storage
Data protection rights.......................... 30 Date
Setting the time and date automat- ically................................................... 189 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves................ 25 Wireless vehicle components......... 24, 25 DEF Additive...................................... 133, 274 Displaying the fill level........................ 134 Filling capacity................................... 275 Purity.......................................... 133, 274 Refilling.............................................. 134 Definitions (tires and loading).............. 255 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection........................... 25
Dial telephone number (on-board computer)............................................... 178
Diesel Low outside temperatures.................. 273 Notes.................................................. 273
Diesel particulate filter Automatic regeneration...................... 118 Canceling regeneration....................... 118 Displaying load.................................... 119 Notes.................................................. 118 Starting regeneration.......................... 118
Digital speedometer............................... 176
Dimming the inside rearview mirror...... 98
DIRECT SELECT lever Engaging drive position...................... 122 Engaging neutral................................. 121 Engaging park position automati- cally.................................................... 122 Engaging reverse gear........................ 121 Function............................................. 120 Selecting park position....................... 122 Transmission positions....................... 120
Direction indicator see Indicator
Display Radio operating permit......................... 24
Display (care).......................................... 221
Display (MBUX multimedia system) Settings.............................................. 189
Display (multimedia system) Home screen...................................... 183 Notes.................................................. 183 Operating........................................... 184 Setting acoustic operating feedback.. 185
Display (on-board computer)................. 174
Display message Calling up (on-board computer).......... 286 Notes................................................. 286
Display messages ? ................................................ 295 ¯ - - - mph.................................... 292 # 12 V Battery See Operator's Manual............................................... 297 ¯ Additive System Fault Emer- gency Op.: XXX mph See Opera- tor's Manual....................................... 299
¯ Additive System Fault See Operator's Manual............................. 299 ¯ Additive System Fault Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Opera- tor's Manual....................................... 299 Û ATTENTION ASSIST Inopera- tive..................................................... 294 Û ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!................................................. 295 b Auto Lamp Function Inopera- tive..................................................... 306 J Check Brake Fluid Level............ 289 ? Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual............................. 298 4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling............................................ 296 4 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter)............................................... 296 ! Check Fuel Filter....................... 295 b Check Left Low Beam (exam- ple)..................................................... 306 h Check Tires............................... 300 ¥ Check Washer Fluid.................. 302 ? Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off................................... 297 _ Currently Unavailable Cam- era Dirty............................................. 293 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.............................. 291 ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.............................. 291 Â Don't Forget Your Key................ 301 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured........................................... 295 4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off...................... 296 4 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine............................... 295 4 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level....... 296 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)................ 287 æ Fuel Level Low.......................... 295
Index 321
! Incline Too Steep See Opera- tor's Manual....................................... 288 & Inoperative Battery Low............ 303 & Inoperative Refuel Vehicle......... 302 ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual............................................... 291 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual............................................... 290 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual............................................... 290 & Inoperative See Operator's Manual............................................... 302 Â Key Not Detected (red dis- play message)..................................... 301 Â Key Not Detected (white dis- play message)..................................... 301 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal- function Service Required (exam- ple)..................................................... 287 b Malfunction See Operator's Manual............................................... 306 ð Maximum Speed Exceeded....... 295 Â Obtain a New Key...................... 302 ¯ Off............................................. 292 ë Off............................................. 293 ! Parking Brake Inoperative......... 288 ! Parking Brake See Operator's Manual............................................... 288 Â Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual............ 301 h Please Correct Tire Pressure..... 301 å Refill Additive Emergency Op.: XXX mph See Operator's Man- ual...................................................... 299 å Refill Additive See Operator's Manual............................................... 298 å Refill Additive Starts until Emerg. Op.: XXX See Operator's Manual............................................... 299 ¸ Replace Air Filter....................... 295 Â Replace Key Battery.................. 302 # See Operator's Manual............. 297
322 Index
6 SRS Malfunction Service Required............................................. 287 Ð Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual............................. 303 Ð Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual.. 303 g Step Not Extended See Oper- ator's Manual or Step Not Exten- ded Malfunction................................. 305 # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running.............................................. 297 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual............................................... 297 b Switch Off Lights...................... 306 b Switch On Headlamps............... 306 h Tire Press. Sen. Missing............ 300 x Veh. Tracking Activated See Op. Manual or mobile app.................. 305 d Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting............ 304 h Warning Tire Malfunction.......... 300 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur- rently Limited See Operator's Man- ual...................................................... 289 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi- ted See Operator's Manual................ 289 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual... 292 Active Distance Assist Inoperative..... 292 Active Distance Assist Now Availa- ble...................................................... 293 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual............................................... 294 Active Lane Keeping Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual............................................... 294 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoper- ative................................................... 294 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Manual............................................... 305
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual............................................... 305 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera- tive..................................................... 305 Air Conditioning Malfunction See Operator's Manual............................. 303 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P'.............. 304 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction............. 303 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.... 294 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.............. 293 Blind Spot Assist Trailer Not Moni- tored.................................................. 293 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual............................................... 289 Cruise Control Inoperative................. 292 Currently Unavailable Radar Sen- sors Dirty........................................... 293 Driver's Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away.................................................. 304 N Permanently Active Risk of Roll- ing Away............................................. 304 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary.......................................... 304 Radar Sensors Dirty See Opera- tor's Manual....................................... 289 Regeneration Not Possible................. 298 Reversing Not Possible Service Required............................................. 304 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer.............................. 304 Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine........ 303 SOS NOT READY................................ 290 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable......................................... 300 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative...... 301 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors.............................. 300 To Engage Transmiss. Position R First Depress the Brake...................... 303 Transmission Malfunction Stop.......... 304
Index 323
Display range (trip menu)...................... 176
Display total distance (trip menu)......... 176 Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Distance recorder
see Trip distance DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Door
Locking (emergency key)...................... 51 Unlocking (emergency key)................... 51 Door control panel................................... 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)......................................................... 252
Drinking and driving............................... 110
Drive Away Assist................................... 162 Driver's seat
see Seats Driving and drinking............................... 110
Driving characteristics (unusual)......... 240 Driving instructions
Foreign trip (information).................... 112 Driving light
see Automatic driving lights Driving notes
Brake subject to load.......................... 112 Braking............................................... 112 Breaking-in notes............................... 109 Downhill gradient................................ 112 Drinking and driving............................ 110 General driving tips............................. 110 New brake discs and brake pads/ linings................................................. 112 Parking brake...................................... 112 Restricted braking effect (salt-trea- ted roads)........................................... 112 Transport by rail.................................. 112 Wet road surfaces............................... 112 Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).......... 142 ASR (acceleration skid control).......... 143 BAS (Brake Assist System)................. 143 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)................................................ 145 ESP® Crosswind Assist....................... 144 ESP® trailer stabilization.................... 145 Overview............................................ 142 Radar sensors.................................... 142 Responsibility..................................... 142
Driving safety system see Active Brake Assist see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Driving system see 360° Camera see Activating/deactivating the HOLD function see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Lane Keeping Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Lane Keeping Assist see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera
Driving tips Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam)................................................... 84 Driving in winter.................................. 114 Driving off-road................................... 115 Driving on flooded roads..................... 114 Driving on wet roads........................... 114 Hydroplaning...................................... 114
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Activating/deactivating...................... 149 Notes.................................................. 149
DYNAMIC SELECT Displaying vehicle data....................... 192
E
E10........................................................... 272 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)..................................................... 145 ECO display
Function.............................................. 117 Resetting............................................ 177 Electric parking brake Applying automatically....................... 140 Applying or releasing manually........... 140 Emergency braking............................. 141 Notes.................................................. 139 Releasing automatically...................... 140 Electric sliding door Function............................................... 53 Opening with button............................. 53 Opening with the door handle.............. 55 Opening/closing with the key.............. 54 Programming the key........................... 54
324 Index
Resetting.............................................. 56 Unlocking manually.............................. 55 Electrical closing assist Notes................................................... 53 Electrical consumption Key....................................................... 47 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical step Emergency release............................... 60 Extending/retracting............................ 59 Function............................................... 59 Obstacle............................................... 59 Preventing extending............................ 59 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electronics.............................................. 268
Emergency Assistance overview............................. 18 First-aid kit (soft sided)...................... 224 Safety vest.......................................... 224 Warning lamp..................................... 224
Emergency braking Electric parking brake......................... 141 Manual parking brake......................... 139
Emergency call system Automatic emergency call.................. 225 Information......................................... 224 Manual emergency call...................... 225 Overview............................................ 224 Transferred data................................. 225
Emergency engine start........................ 236
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................ 109
Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation............................................. 33
Engaging drive position (automatic transmission).......................................... 122
Engaging neutral (automatic trans- mission)................................................... 121
Engaging reverse gear............................ 121
Engaging/disengaging LOW RANGE..... 125
Engine Engine number................................... 269 Parking (start/stop button)................ 137 Problems............................................ 132 Starting (in emergency operation mode)................................................. 109 Starting (start/stop button)............... 108 Starting assistance............................. 227
Engine data Showing............................................. 192
Engine electronics (notes).................... 268 Engine number....................................... 269 Engine oil
Additive.............................................. 275 Checking the oil level (on-board computer)........................................... 212 Checking the oil level with a dip- stick.................................................... 213 Filling capacity.................................... 276 Topping up.......................................... 213 Engine output Notes on changes................................. 26 ENR (electronic level control) Function............................................. 125 Lowering the vehicle........................... 126 Manually inflating air bellows............. 129 Problems............................................ 130 Raising the vehicle.............................. 126 Entering characters Function/notes.................................. 188 Setting the keyboard language........... 189 Using the media display..................... 188 Environmental protection Notes................................................... 20 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist................................ 144 Trailer stabilization............................. 145 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating...................... 144 Function/notes.................................. 143 Exhaust emission monitoring................ 111 Exterior lighting Care................................................... 220 Exterior lighting see Lights
F Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST Favorites
Adding................................................ 187 Calling up........................................... 187 Deleting.............................................. 187 Moving................................................ 187 Overview............................................ 187 Renaming........................................... 187
Index 325
First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 224
Flat tire Changing a wheel............................... 259 Notes................................................. 226
Floor covering Installing/removing (starter bat- tery)................................................... 229
Floor mat.................................................. 83
Foreign trip Instructions......................................... 112 symmetrical low beam......................... 84
Free software............................................ 31
Frequencies Mobile phone..................................... 268 Two-way radio.................................... 268
Front airbag (driver, co-driver)................ 36
Front door Opening (from inside)........................... 49 Unlocking (from inside)........................ 49
Front passenger bench seat Folding the seat cushion forwards/ backwards............................................ 72
Front seats 8-way adjustment options.................... 69 Adjusting (electrically).......................... 69 Adjusting (manually)....................... 66, 68 Memory function.................................. 69 Turning................................................. 72 With Seat Comfort Package................. 68 Without Seat Comfort Package............ 66
Fuel Additives............................................ 272 Diesel................................................. 273 Draining the filter................................ 217 E10..................................................... 272 Flexible fuel vehicles.......................... 272 Fuel reserve........................................ 274 Gasoline............................................. 272 Low outside temperatures.................. 273 Problems............................................ 132 Quality (diesel)................................... 273 Quality (gasoline)................................ 272 Refueling............................................ 130 Sulfur content.................................... 272 Tank capacity...................................... 274
Fuel consumption (on-board com- puter)....................................................... 176
Fuel consumption indicator Calling up........................................... 192
Fuses Before replacing................................. 236
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell.............................................. 237 Fuse box in the seat base of the driver's seat....................................... 237 Notes................................................. 236
G Gasoline.................................................. 272 General operating permit number (EU).......................................................... 269 Genuine parts........................................... 20 Getting into and out of the vehicle......... 51 Grab handles
Using.................................................... 51 Gross axle weight rating....................... 269 Gross mass............................................. 269
H Handbrake (electrical)
see Electric parking brake Handbrake (manual)
see Manual parking brake Handling control system
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Hazard warning light system
Switching on/off.................................. 85 Hazardous substances
Information........................................... 23 Head restraint
Adjusting mechanically......................... 76 Head unit
Multimedia system............................... 24 Headliner (care)...................................... 221 Heating system (control panel).............. 99 High beam
Activating/deactivating........................ 85 Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................... 86 Changing bulbs.................................... 90 High-beam flasher.................................... 85 Hill start assist....................................... 153 HOLD function........................................ 153 Home screen (media display)................ 183 Hot-water auxiliary heater Function............................................. 105 Switching on/off with on-board computer............................................ 106 switching on/off with the button....... 105
326 Index
Hydroplaning........................................... 114
I Identification plate
Engine................................................ 269 Refrigerant......................................... 279 Vehicle............................................... 269 Ignition key see Key Immobilizer............................................... 63 Indicator Activating/deactivating........................ 85 Changing bulbs (front).......................... 90 Changing bulbs (rear) (Cargo Van and Passenger Van).............................. 92 Changing bulbs (rear) (chassis)............ 93 Installations.............................................. 21 Instrument display Adjusting the lighting.......................... 175 Function/notes.................................. 172 Overview........................................ 8, 172 Instrument Display see Warning/indicator lamp Instrument lighting................................ 175 Intelligent light system Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................... 86 Cornering light..................................... 85 Interior lamps (rear compartment) (replacing the light bulbs)....................... 94 Interior lighting Box bodies............................................ 87 Bus equipment..................................... 88 Cargo compartment............................. 89 Reading lamp above the passenger seat...................................................... 89 Rear compartment............................... 89 Setting.................................................. 87 Switch-off delay time........................... 89 Interior motion sensor Function............................................... 65 Switching on/off.................................. 65 iPhone® see Apple CarPlay®
J Jack
Hydraulic............................................ 238 Removing the hydraulic jack from the stowage compartment................. 239 Storage location of hydraulic jack...... 238
Jump-start connection........................... 227
K Key
Battery................................................. 47 Electrical consumption......................... 47 Functions............................................. 46 Key ring attachment............................. 47 Mechanical key..................................... 47 Overview.............................................. 46 Problem................................................ 49 Radio connection................................. 46 Unlocking setting................................. 47
L Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist
Function............................................. 163 System limitations.............................. 163 Trailer operation................................. 163 Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes.................................................. 192 Setting................................................ 192 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor Installing............................................... 41 Level control see ENR (electronic level control) License plate lamp (changing bulbs)...... 93 Light switch (overview)........................... 84 Lighting Adjusting the instrument lighting........ 175 Lighting see Lights Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist.................... 86 Automatic driving lights........................ 84 Combination switch.............................. 85 Cornering light..................................... 85 Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam)................................................... 84 Hazard warning light............................ 85 High beam............................................ 85 High-beam flasher................................ 85 Indicator............................................... 85
Index 327
Light switch.......................................... 84 Low beam............................................. 84 Parking light......................................... 84 Rear fog light........................................ 84 Responsibility with lighting systems..... 84 Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time....................................... 86 Switching the surround lighting on/off.................................................. 87 Limited Warranty (vehicle)...................... 28 Limiting speed......................................... 111 Load Determining the maximum................. 250 Sample calculation............................. 250 Load distribution.................................... 207 Load securing Cargo tie-down points........................ 208 Installing and removing tie-down eyes................................................... 208 Notes.................................................. 207 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................ 253 Loading Definitions.......................................... 255 Loading guidelines................................. 206 Loading information table..................... 249 Low beam Activating/deactivating........................ 84 Changing bulbs.................................... 90 Setting for abroad (symmetrical).......... 84 LOW range............................................... 124 Lubricant additives see Additive Lumbar support (4-way).......................... 71
M
M+S tires................................................. 241 Maintenance
Vehicle................................................. 23 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction
Restraint system.................................. 32 Malfunction message
see Display message Maneuvering assistance
Activating/deactivating...................... 159 Manual parking brake
Applying/releasing............................. 138 Emergency braking............................. 139
Folding up/down................................ 139 Manually inflating air bellows (ENR).... 129
Matte finish (cleaning instructions)...... 219 Maximum load
Determining....................................... 250 Sample calculation............................. 250 Maximum tire load................................. 253
Maximum tire pressure......................... 253 MBUX multimedia system
Configuring display settings............... 189 Overview............................................ 183 Resetting (factory setting).................. 192 Mechanical key Locking door......................................... 51 Removing/inserting............................. 47 Unlocking door..................................... 51 Media Menu (on-board computer)................. 178 Operating media playback.................. 178 Selecting a media source................... 178 Media display Entering characters............................ 188 Home screen...................................... 183 Notes.................................................. 183 Media mode Adding a favorite song........................ 203 Connecting Bluetooth® audio equipment.......................................... 202 Connecting USB devices.................... 202 Controlling media playback................ 202 Copyright and trademarks.................. 201 Notes about the search function in categories.......................................... 203 Overview of the media menu.............. 201 Removing a favorite song................... 203 Starting a search in categories........... 203 Starting media playback..................... 202 Supported format and data storage media................................................. 200 Using the keyword search.................. 203 Medical aids.............................................. 27
Memory function (seat)........................... 71 Menu (on-board computer)
Assistance graphic.............................. 176 Media................................................. 178 Overview............................................. 173 Radio.................................................. 177 Service............................................... 175 Settings.............................................. 179 Telephone........................................... 178 Trip..................................................... 176
328 Index
Mercedes me Information......................................... 180
Mercedes me connect Breakdown assistance call via the breakdown assistance button............. 181 Calling the Customer Center.............. 180 Consenting to data transfer................ 181 Information......................................... 180 Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel............................................ 181 Transferred data................................. 181
Mercedes PRO Information......................................... 180
Mercedes PRO connect Breakdown assistance call via the breakdown assistance button............. 181 Calling the Customer Center.............. 180 Consenting to data transfer................ 181 Information......................................... 180 Making a call via the overhead con- trol panel............................................ 181 Transferred data................................. 181
Message (multifunction display) see Display message
Message memory................................... 286
Mirrors Adjusting the inside rearview mirror..... 98
Mirrors see Outside mirrors
Mobile phone Frequencies....................................... 268 Transmission output (maximum)........ 268 Wireless charging................................. 82
Mobile phone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay® see Mobile phone see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition Starting.............................................. 195 Stopping............................................. 195
Model series........................................... 269
Mounting a load..................................... 206
Multi Purpose Vehicle (MPV)................... 27
Multifunction display (on-board computer)................................................ 174
Multifunction steering wheel Button overview.................................. 173
Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel
Multimedia system Adjusting the volume.......................... 186 Main functions................................... 185 Radio operating permit......................... 24 Switching the sound on/off............... 186
Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see Entering characters see MBUX multimedia system
N Near Field Communication (NFC)
Connecting a mobile phone to the MBUX multimedia system................... 194 General information............................ 194 Switching mobile phones.................... 194 Using a mobile phone......................... 194 NFC see Near Field Communication (NFC) Nozzles see Air vents
O Occupant safety
see Airbag see Automatic measures after an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see Restraint system see Seat belt Odometer see Display total distance (trip menu) Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Adjusting stationary heater/venti- lation.................................................. 106 Assistance graphic menu.................... 176 Diesel particulate filter load display.... 119 Displaying the service due date.......... 210 Media menu........................................ 178 Menus overview.................................. 173 Multifunction display.......................... 174 Operating........................................... 173 Radio menu........................................ 177 Service menu..................................... 175 Settings menu.................................... 179 Telephone menu................................. 178 Trip menu............................................ 176 On-board diagnostic interface see Diagnostics connection
Index 329
On-board electronics Engine electronics.............................. 268 Notes................................................. 268 Two-way radios................................... 268
Open-source software.............................. 31 Opening rear-end doors with door retainer
Opening................................................ 57 Opening the cup holder in the rear passenger compartment......................... 79 Opening/closing the hood..................... 210 Operating fluids
Additives (fuel)................................... 272 Brake fluid.......................................... 277 Coolant (engine)................................. 278 DEF..................................................... 274 Engine oil............................................ 275 Fuel (diesel)........................................ 273 Fuel (gasoline).................................... 272 Notes.................................................. 271 Windshield washer fluid..................... 279 Operating Instructions (vehicle equipment)............................................... 22 Operating safety Changes in the engine power output.... 26 Declaration of conformity (vehicle components that receive and/or transmit radio waves)..................... 24, 25 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................ 25 Information........................................... 23 Operating system On-board computer............................ 173 Outside mirrors folding in/out....................................... 97 Setting.................................................. 97 Setting options..................................... 16 Overhead control panel Adjusting the interior lighting............... 87 Overview............................................... 11
P
Paint (cleaning instructions)................. 219 Paint code............................................... 269 Park position
Engaging............................................. 122 Engaging automatically....................... 122 Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating........................................... 154 Adjusting warning tones..................... 155 Drive Away Assist............................... 162 Function............................................. 154 Switching off...................................... 154 System limitations.............................. 154
Parking brake (electrical) see Electric parking brake
Parking brake (manual) see Manual parking brake
Parking for an extended period............. 141 Parking light............................................. 84 Partition sliding door
From the cargo compartment.............. 58 From the driver's compartment............ 58 Permissible gross mass........................ 269 Permissible towing methods................ 232 Pets in the vehicle.................................... 45 Phone book see Contacts Placing a load on the wheel arch.......... 209 Plastic trim (care)................................... 221 Post-collision brake.................................. 37 Power supply Battery main switch............................ 120 Switching on (start/stop button)........ 107 Power washer (care)............................... 219
Q QR code (rescue card)............................. 28 Qualified specialist workshop................ 26
R Radar sensors......................................... 142 Radio
Activating........................................... 204 Activating/deactivating radio text...... 205 Calling up the station list.................... 204 Deleting stations................................ 205 Direct frequency entry....................... 204 Displaying emergency messages........ 205 Displaying emergency warnings......... 205 Displaying information....................... 205 Displaying radio text........................... 205 Managing favorites............................. 205 Managing station presets................... 205 Menu (on-board computer)................. 177 Moving stations.................................. 205
330 Index
Overview............................................ 204 Searching for stations........................ 204 Setting a channel............................... 204 Setting the waveband......................... 204 Storing radio stations......................... 205 Switching the HD Radio function on/off................................................ 204 Radio connection Key....................................................... 46 Radio operating permit Display................................................. 24 Transmitter key..................................... 25
Real wood (care)..................................... 221
Rear Motion detector.................................... 89
Rear bench seat see Seats
Rear Cross Traffic Alert......................... 163
Rear fog light............................................ 84
Rear view camera Care................................................... 220 Function............................................. 155
Rear window wiper Replacing.............................................. 97 Switching on/off.................................. 95
Rear-compartment heating.................... 101
Rear-end doors Opening and closing (from inside)........ 58 Opening and closing (from outside)...... 56
Reducing agent see DEF
Refrigerant (air conditioning) Notes................................................. 279
Refuel Displaying the DEF level..................... 134 Refilling DEF....................................... 134
Refueling Refueling the vehicle.......................... 130
Regeneration Canceling............................................ 118 Notes.................................................. 118 Starting............................................... 118
Registration Vehicle................................................. 26
Removing the vehicle tool kit............... 238
Replacing a wheel Installing a new wheel........................ 262
Replacing light bulbs Indicators (rear) (Cargo Van and Passenger Van)..................................... 92 Reversing lights (Cargo Van and Passenger Van)..................................... 92
Reporting safety defects......................... 27 Rescue card.............................................. 28 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)................................................... 192 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)
see Reset function (MBUX multi- media system) Resetting (factory setting) see Reset function (MBUX multi- media system) Restraint system Basic instructions for children.............. 38 Function in an accident........................ 33 Functionality......................................... 32 Malfunction.......................................... 32 Protection limited................................. 32 Protection provided.............................. 32 Self-test................................................ 32 Warning lamps..................................... 32 Restricting the shift range.................... 122 Reversing light Changing bulbs.................................... 93 Reversing lights Replacing light bulbs (Cargo Van and Passenger Van).............................. 92 Rims (care)............................................. 220 Roadside Assistance (breakdown)......... 23 Roll away protection see Activating/deactivating the HOLD function see HOLD function Roof luggage rack (notes)..................... 209 Roof rack................................................. 285
S Safety systems
see Driving safety system Safety vest.............................................. 224 Seat belt
Adjusting the height............................. 35 Care.................................................... 221 Fastening............................................. 35 Protection impaired.............................. 34 Protection provided.............................. 33
Index 331
Releasing.............................................. 35 Warning lamps..................................... 35 Seat cover (care).................................... 221 Seats 4-way lumbar support........................... 71 8-way adjustment options.................... 69 Adjusting the head restraints mechanically......................................... 76 Adjusting the seat backrests (rear bench seat)........................................... 76 Adjusting the seat cushion (twin co-driver's seat)................................... 72 correct driver's seat position............... 66 Folding the folding seat up/down........ 72 front (adjust electrically)...................... 69 Front (adjusting manually, with Seat Comfort Package)........................ 68 Front (adjusting mechanically, without Seat Comfort Package)............ 66 Front (adjusting mechanically)............. 68 Installing and removing rear bench seat...................................................... 73 Memory function.................................. 69 Operating the memory function............ 71 Setting options..................................... 16 Turning (front seat)............................... 72 With Seat Comfort Package................. 68 Without Seat Comfort Package............ 66 Securing luggage................................... 206 Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Sensors (care)........................................ 220 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service (on-board computer)................. 175 Service center see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Service products Refrigerant (air conditioning).............. 279 Setting the date format......................... 189
Setting the distance unit....................... 192 Setting the speed
see Cruise control Settings (on-board computer)............... 179
Short-distance trips................................ 111
Side airbag................................................ 36 Side window
Closing using the key........................... 62
Convenience closing............................ 62 Convenience opening........................... 62 Opening with the key............................ 62 Side windows Closing................................................. 60 Closing (all).......................................... 60 Opening................................................ 60 Opening (all)......................................... 60 Problem................................................ 63 Resetting.............................................. 62 Size designation (tires).......................... 253 Sliding door B-pillar door sill (button)....................... 53 Center console (button)....................... 53 Child safety lock................................... 44 Opening and closing (from the inside).................................................. 52 Opening and closing (from the out- side)..................................................... 52 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal....... 47 Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay® see Telephone Snow chains............................................ 241 Socket (12 V) Front center console............................ 80 Socket (115 V) Lower control panel.............................. 81 Sound see Sound settings Sound settings Adjusting the balance/fader.............. 205 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings...................................... 205 Automatic volume adjustment........... 205 Calls up the sound menu.................... 205 Information........................................ 205 Spare wheel Installing/removing............................ 265 Notes................................................. 264 Special seat belt retractor...................... 40 Specialist workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Speed rating (tires)................................ 253
Speedometer (digital)............................. 176 Standby mode
Activating/deactivating...................... 141
332 Index
Start/stop button Parking the vehicle............................. 137 Starting the vehicle............................ 108 Switching on the power supply or the ignition......................................... 107
Starting see Vehicle
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting-off aid see Hill start assist
Station Deleting.............................................. 205 Direct frequency entry....................... 204 Moving............................................... 205 Searching........................................... 204 Setting............................................... 204 Storing............................................... 205
Station list Calling up........................................... 204
Station presets Managing........................................... 205
Stationary heating/ventilation Adjusting (on-board computer)........... 106
Stationary heating/ventilation see Auxiliary heating see Hot-water auxiliary heater
Steering wheel Adjusting.............................................. 78 Buttons............................................... 173
Stopping the alarm (ATA)......................... 64
Stowage areas see Stowage space
Stowage compartments see Stowage space
Stowage space Armrest................................................ 78 Center console..................................... 78 Door..................................................... 78 Glove box............................................. 78
Sulfur content......................................... 272
Summer tires.......................................... 240
Surround lighting Switching on/off.................................. 87
Surround View see 360° Camera
Switch-off delay time Exterior................................................ 86 Interior................................................. 89
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off...................................................... 102 Switching on ignition (start/stop button)..................................................... 107 Switching seat heating on/off................ 77 Switching synchronization function on/off (control panel)............................ 102 Switching the A/C function on/off....... 101 Switching the rear window defroster on/off..................................... 103 Switching the windshield heater on/off...................................................... 103 System settings
Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)............................................... 192 Setting the distance unit.................... 192 Setting the time and date automat- ically................................................... 189 Setting the time zone......................... 189 Setting the time/date format............. 189 Switching transmission of the vehi- cle position on/off............................. 190 System settings see Bluetooth® see Language see Wi-Fi
T
Tailpipes (care)....................................... 220 Tank capacity
Fuel.................................................... 274 Reserve (fuel)..................................... 274 Tank content DEF..................................................... 275 Technical data Information........................................ 268 Notes (trailer hitch)............................ 280 Tire pressure monitor......................... 249 Vehicle identification plate................. 269 Telephone Activating functions during a call........ 195 Calls with several participants............ 195 Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC))............... 194 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass- key).................................................... 193 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................... 193 De-authorizing a mobile phone........... 194 Incoming call during an existing call... 195 Information......................................... 193
Index 333
Menu (on-board computer)................. 178 Mobile phone voice recognition.......... 195 Notes.................................................. 193 Reception and transmission volume... 195 Switching mobile phones.................... 194 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC))............... 194 Telephone menu overview.................. 193 Telephone operation........................... 195 Using Near Field Communication (NFC).................................................. 194 Wireless charging (mobile phone)........ 82 Temperature grade................................. 251
Tie-down eyes......................................... 208 Time
Manual time setting............................ 189 Setting the time and date automat- ically................................................... 189 Setting the time zone......................... 189 Setting the time/date format............. 189 Tire and Loading Information placard.. 249
Tire Identification Number (TIN)........... 252
Tire information table............................ 249 Tire labeling
Characteristics................................... 253 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)................................................... 252 Load-bearing capacity........................ 253 Maximum tire load............................. 253 Maximum tire pressure...................... 253 Overview............................................. 251 Size designation................................. 253 Speed rating....................................... 253 Temperature grade............................. 251 Tire quality grades.............................. 251 Traction grade.................................... 251 Tread wear grade................................ 251 Tire load (maximum).............................. 253 Tire pressure Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)............................................... 248 Maximum........................................... 253 Notes.................................................. 242 Restarting the tire pressure monitor.. 248 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................ 246 Tire pressure table..................... 243, 246 Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure................. 248 Checking the tire temperature........... 248 Function............................................. 246 Restarting........................................... 248
Technical data.................................... 249 Tire pressure table......................... 243, 246
Tire quality grades.................................. 251 Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)............................................... 248 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................ 246 Tire tread................................................. 240
Tire-change tool kit................................ 259 Tires
Characteristics................................... 253 Checking............................................ 240 Checking the tire pressure (tire pressure monitoring system).............. 248 Definitions.......................................... 255 Direction of rotation........................... 258 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)................................................... 252 Flat tire.............................................. 226 Installing............................................ 262 Load-bearing capacity........................ 253 M+S tires............................................ 241 Maximum tire load............................. 253 Maximum tire pressure...................... 253 Noise.................................................. 240 Notes on installing............................. 256 Overview of tire labeling..................... 251 Removing........................................... 262 Replacing................................... 256, 259 Restarting the tire pressure monitor.. 248 Selecting............................................ 256 Size designation................................. 253 Snow chains....................................... 241 Speed rating....................................... 253 Storing............................................... 259 Summer tires...................................... 240 Temperature grade............................. 251 Tire and Loading Information plac- ard...................................................... 249 Tire pressure (notes).......................... 242 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................ 246 Tire pressure table..................... 243, 246 Tire quality grades.............................. 251 Traction grade.................................... 251 Tread wear grade................................ 251 Unusual driving characteristics.......... 240 Wheel size categories......................... 258 Tool see Removing the vehicle tool kit see Vehicle tool kit see Vehicle tool kit stowage compartment
334 Index
Top Tether................................................. 42 Topping up the windshield washer system..................................................... 216 Touch Control
On-board computer............................ 173 Operating........................................... 184 Setting acoustic operating feedback.. 184 Setting the sensitivity......................... 184 Touchscreen (media display) Operating........................................... 184 Setting acoustic operating feedback.. 185 Tow starting............................................ 236 Tow-away alarm Function............................................... 64 Switching on/off.................................. 64 Towing away Raised front or rear axle..................... 234 Towing eye Installing/removing............................ 236 Storage location................................. 235 Towing eye (storage location) see Vehicle tool kit Towing methods..................................... 232
Traction grade......................................... 251 Trailer hitch
Care................................................... 220 General notes..................................... 280 Information......................................... 169 Information about trailer operation.... 166 Permissible trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights......................... 170 Power supply...................................... 171 Socket................................................ 168 Trailer loads............................................ 280 Trailer operation Active Lane Keeping Assist................. 164 Coupling/Decoupling the trailer......... 168 Gross axle weight rating..................... 269 Information......................................... 169 Lane Keeping Assist........................... 163 Notes.................................................. 166 Permissible trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights......................... 170 Power supply...................................... 171 Socket................................................ 168 Trailer loads........................................ 280 Trailer stabilization................................ 145 Transferred vehicle data Android Auto...................................... 200 Apple CarPlay®................................... 200
Transmission position display............... 120 Transmission ratio
LOW range.......................................... 124 Transmission ratio
see Engaging/disengaging LOW RANGE Transmitter key
Radio operating permit......................... 25 Transport by rail...................................... 112 Transporting (vehicle breakdown)........ 235 Tread wear grade.................................... 251 Trim element (care)................................ 221 Trip
Display total distance......................... 176 Menu (on-board computer)................. 176 Trip computer Resetting............................................ 177 Showing.............................................. 176 Trip distance Showing.............................................. 176 Trip odometer Resetting............................................ 177 Trip odometer see Trip distance Turn signal light Additional turn signal light (allwheel drive vehicles)............................ 91 Twin co-driver's seat................................ 72 Two-way radio telephone see Mobile phone Two-way radios Frequencies....................................... 268 Installation notes................................ 268 Transmission output (maximum)........ 268
U
Units of measurement Setting................................................ 192
Unlocking setting..................................... 47 Unlocking/locking
Switching automatic locking fea- ture on/off........................................... 50 Unlocking and opening front doors from inside........................................... 49 USB port Connecting devices............................ 202 USB socket in the rear passenger compartment............................................ 81 Using kickdown...................................... 123
Index 335
Using the telephone see Calls
V Vehicle
Correct use.......................................... 26 Data acquisition................................... 28 Diagnostics connection........................ 25 Equipment............................................ 22 Limited Warranty.................................. 28 Locking (automatic).............................. 50 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)..... 51 Lowering............................................ 263 Maintenance........................................ 23 Medical aids......................................... 27 Notifying problems............................... 27 Parking (start/stop button)................ 137 Parking for an extended period........... 141 QR code rescue card............................ 28 Qualified specialist workshop............... 26 Raising............................................... 259 Registration.......................................... 26 Starting (in emergency operation mode)................................................. 109 Starting (start/stop button)............... 108 Switching on power supply (start/ stop button)........................................ 107 Unlocking (from inside)........................ 50 Ventilating (convenience opening)........ 62 Vehicle components that receive and/or transmit radio waves (decla- ration of conformity).......................... 24, 25 Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves Declaration of conformity..................... 25 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)........... 192 Showing............................................. 192 Transferring to Android Auto.............. 200 Transferring to Apple CarPlay®........... 200 Vehicle height.................................... 280 Vehicle length.................................... 280 Vehicle width...................................... 280 Wheelbase......................................... 280 Vehicle data memory Service providers................................. 30 Vehicle data storage Electronic control units........................ 28 Event data recorders............................ 30 Vehicle dimensions................................ 280 Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate EU general operating permit num- ber..................................................... 269 Gross axle weight rating..................... 269 Paint code.......................................... 269 Permissible gross mass...................... 269 VIN..................................................... 269
Vehicle identification plate see Model series
Vehicle key see Key
Vehicle level Lowering............................................. 126 Raising................................................ 126
Vehicle location Activating/deactivating transmis- sion.................................................... 190
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada.................. 22
Vehicle tool kit............................... 235, 237 Vehicle tool kit stowage compart- ment........................................................ 238 VIN
Identification plate............................. 269 Reading out........................................ 269 Seat................................................... 269 Windshield......................................... 269
W
Warning and indicator lamps Overview............................................ 306
Warning lamp......................................... 224 Warning system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Warning/indicator lamp
! ABS warning lamp..................... 312 ! and.................... 307, 308, 309, 310 J Brake system warning lamp (yellow)............................................... 309 $ Brake warning lamp (red) (USA).................................................. 310 ? Coolant warning lamp................ 313 · Distance warning lamp.............. 313 F Electric parking brake applied red indicator lamp (USA) does not light up................................ 307
336 Index
! Electric parking brake mal- functioning yellow indicator lamp lights up..................................... 307, 308 # Electrical malfunction warn- ing lamp.............................................. 314 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp................................................... 314
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............ 311
÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes........ 311
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up..... 311 6 Fuel reserve warning lamp......... 314 Ð Power steering system warn- ing lamp.............................................. 313 F Red electric parking brake applied indicator lamp (USA) flashes............................................... 308 F Red electric parking brake applied indicator lamp (USA) lights up.............................................. 308, 309 F Red parking brake applied indicator lamp (USA) lights up............ 309 6 Restraint system warning lamp.................................................... 311 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes................................................ 312 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up....................................................... 313 ! The electric parking brake malfunctioning yellow indicator lamp does not light up........................ 309 h Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes................... 315 h Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up................. 315
Warranty................................................... 28
Warranty terms and conditions.............. 22
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care)......................... 219
Wheel rotation........................................ 258
Wheel wrench......................................... 259
Wheels Care................................................... 220
Characteristics of the tire................... 253 Checking............................................ 240 Checking the tire pressure (tire pressure monitoring system).............. 248 Definitions.......................................... 255 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)................................................... 252 Flat tire.............................................. 226 Installing............................................ 262 Load-bearing capacity........................ 253 Maximum tire load............................. 253 Maximum tire pressure...................... 253 Noise.................................................. 240 Notes on installing............................. 256 Overview of tire labeling..................... 251 Removing........................................... 262 Replacing................................... 256, 259 Restarting the tire pressure monitor.. 248 Rotating............................................. 258 Selecting............................................ 256 Size designation................................. 253 Snow chains....................................... 241 Speed rating....................................... 253 Storing............................................... 259 Temperature grade............................. 251 Tire and Loading Information plac- ard...................................................... 249 Tire pressure (notes).......................... 242 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................ 246 Tire pressure table..................... 243, 246 Tire quality grades.............................. 251 Traction grade.................................... 251 Tread wear grade................................ 251 Unusual driving characteristics.......... 240 Wheel size categories......................... 258 Wi-Fi Overview............................................ 190 Setting................................................ 190
Window curtain airbag............................ 36
Window lifter see Side windows
Windows see Side windows
Windows (care)...................................... 220
Windshield Replacing the wiper blades.................. 95 Replacing the wiper blades (WET WIPER SYSTEM).................................... 96
Windshield see Windshield
Windshield washer fluid Information......................................... 279
Windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades.................. 95 Replacing the wiper blades (WET WIPER SYSTEM).................................... 96 Switching on/off.................................. 94
Winter driving (snow chains)................. 241
Winter tires............................................. 241 Wiper blades
Care................................................... 220 Replacing (rear window)....................... 97 Replacing (WET WIPER SYSTEM).......... 96 Replacing (windshield)......................... 95 Wireless central locking.......................... 24 Wireless charging Function/notes.................................... 82 Mobile phone....................................... 82 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Index 337
AH XSL Formatter V6.4 MR1 for Windows (x64) : 6.4.3.27525 (2017/01/23 10:11JST) OneVision PDFengine (Windows 64bit Build 25.092.S)